Ситроен с3 аиркросс инструкция по эксплуатации

Посмотреть инструкция для Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории автомобили, 89 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 8.6. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: русский. У вас есть вопрос о Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) — это компактный кроссовер от французского производителя Citroën. Автомобиль оснащен передним приводом и представлен двумя типами бензиновых двигателей объемом 1,2 литра и мощностью 110 или 131 лошадиная сила. Есть также дизельный двигатель объемом 1,5 литра и мощностью 100 лошадиных сил.

Кузов автомобиля имеет компактные размеры и высоту, что делает его легким в управлении. Кроссовер оснащен множеством новых функций, таких как мультимедийная система, камера заднего вида, система безопасности и круиз-контроль.

Колеса автомобиля имеют диаметр от 16 до 17 дюймов. Объем багажника в этом автомобиле составляет от 410 до 520 литров. Салон Citroën C3 Aircross 2021 оборудован высокотехнологичными приборами и удобными сиденьями.

Кроссовер также оснащен системой управления тягой и усилием торможения, что обеспечивает хорошую маневренность и стабильность на дороге. Система экономии топлива экономит затраты на топливо, что делает автомобиль более экономичным.

В целом Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) предлагает широкий спектр функций и возможностей для комфортного и безопасного вождения, что делает его хорошим выбором для тех, кто ищет компактный и маневренный автомобиль.

Главная

Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Citroën C3 Aircross (2021).

Как перевести мили в километры?

1 миля равна 1,609344 километрам, а 1 километр — 0,62137119 милям.

Где я могу узнать идентификационный номер транспортного средства Citroën?

Место размещения идентификационного номера транспортного средства зависит от марки и типа транспортного средства. Номер может быть выбит на раме транспортного средства или указан на номерном знаке. Чтобы узнать место расположения идентификационного номера транспортного средства лучше всего ознакомиться с руководством по эксплуатации Citroën C3 Aircross (2021).

Что такое идентификационный номер транспортного средства (VIN)?

Идентификационный номер транспортного средства — уникальный для каждого транспортного средства идентификационный номер. Аббревиатура VIN расшифровывается как «Vehicle Identification Number» (Идентификационный номер транспортного средства).

Когда транспортному средству Citroën требуется техническое обслуживание?

Регулярное техническое обслуживание необходимо всем транспортным средствам. С информацией о том, как часто необходимо проходить техническое обслуживание и чему именно стоит уделять особое внимание можно ознакомиться в инструкции по техническому обслуживанию. Как правило, транспортное средство требует технического обслуживания каждые 2 года или 30 000 километров пробега.

Когда следует заменять тормозную жидкость на Citroën?

Тормозную жидкость рекомендуется менять каждые два года.

В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?

В топливе E10 содержится до десяти процентов этанола, в то время как в E5 содержится менее пяти процентов. Соответственно, топливо E10 менее вредит окружающей среде.

Одна или несколько дверей не открываются изнутри. Что мне делать?

Скорее всего, замок оснащен защитой от детей и поэтому не может быть открыт изнутри. Процедура открытия замка с защитой от детей зависит от марки и типа замка.

Автомобильный радиоприемник не включается, что делать?

Если автомобильный радиоприемник не включен, на него не будет подаваться питание. Убедитесь, что красный провод подключен к контактному источнику питания, а желтый провод — к источнику питания постоянной мощности.

Инструкция Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) доступно в русский?

Да, руководствоCitroën C3 Aircross (2021) доступно врусский .

Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

CITROEN C3 Aircross Handbook

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. CITROEN Manuals
  4. Automobile
  5. C3
  6. Handbook

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

www.carobook.com

HANDBOOK

loading

Related Manuals for CITROEN C3 Aircross

Summary of Contents for CITROEN C3 Aircross

  • Page 1
    www.carobook.com HANDBOOK…
  • Page 2
    Install the Scan MyCitroën application (content View or download the handbook at the following available offline). address: Also available in the MyCitroën App application. http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/ Scan this QR Code for direct access. Select: – the language, www.carobook.com – the vehicle and body style, –…
  • Page 3
    Welcome Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Citroën C3 Aircross. This document contains the key information and recommendations you Additional information will need to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly recommend familiarising yourself with it, as well as the Maintenance and Environmental protection feature Warranty Guide.
  • Page 4
    Contents   ■ Overview Ventilation Seat belts Heating/Manual air conditioning Airbags Child seats Automatic air conditioning   ■ Eco-driving Front demist — defrost Deactivating the front passenger airbag Heated windscreen ISOFIX child seats Rear screen demist — defrost i-Size child seats Instruments Front fittings Installing child seats…
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Contents Connected navigation Parking sensors Petrol engines Top Rear Vision Diesel engines Applications Park Assist Dimensions Radio Identification markings DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Media Practical information Telephone Bluetooth® audio system Compatibility of fuels Settings Refuelling First steps Frequently asked questions Misfuel prevention (Diesel) Steering mounted controls Snow chains…

  • Page 6
    Overview Steering-mounted controls Instruments and controls Courtesy lamp Warning lamps display for seat belts and These illustrations and descriptions are intended front passenger airbag as a guide. The presence and location of some Panoramic opening sunroof controls elements vary depending on the version or trim Interior rear view mirror level.
  • Page 7
    Overview Central control bar F. Select an audio source G. Display the list of radio stations/audio tracks Side control bar «Safety — Child seats — Deactivating the front passenger airbag» section: «Safety — ISOFIX mountings» section: i-Size TOP TETHER 1. Hazard warning lamps «Safety — Manual child lock»…
  • Page 8
    Overview «In the event of a breakdown — Spare wheel» section: «In the event of a breakdown — 12 V battery» section: www.carobook.com…
  • Page 9
    Eco-driving Eco-driving Control the use of electrical equipment Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof Before moving off, if the passenger compartment Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows practices that allow the motorist to optimise roof box.
  • Page 10
    Instruments If the vehicle is not equipped with an audio LCD text instrument panel C. Resetting the trip distance recorder. system or touch screen, this display screen Depending on version: enter the configuration allows you to configure certain equipment. menu (long press), confirm a choice (short For more information on Configuring press).
  • Page 11
    Instruments Control buttons When the ignition is switched on 3. Display area: alert messages or state of functions, trip computer, digital speedometer Certain red or orange warning lamps come on A. Resetting the service indicator (mph or km/h), range associated with the for a few seconds when the ignition is switched Alert log display and the SCR system (miles or km),…
  • Page 12
    Instruments List of warning and Door(s) open Maximum engine coolant temperature Fixed, associated with a message indicator lamps Fixed. identifying the access. The temperature of the cooling system is Red warning/indicator lamps A door or the tailgate is not properly closed too high.
  • Page 13
    Instruments Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake Front passenger airbag (ON) Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as Flashing. possible. Fixed. The system activates and brakes the Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting The front passenger airbag is activated. vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of the pressure.
  • Page 14
    Instruments Low fuel level AdBlue (BlueHDi) SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) ® Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal On for around 30 seconds when starting Fixed when the ignition is switched the vehicle, accompanied by a message on, accompanied by an audible and a message.
  • Page 15
    Instruments Direction indicators Identify the cause of the fault using the message – the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. displayed on the instrument panel. If the engine does not start, make the engine Flashing with audible signal. You may be able to deal with some faults starting request again, while keeping your foot The direction indicators are on.
  • Page 16
    Instruments Black/white warning lamps – In zone B, the temperature is too high. – An alert message indicates the distance The associated warning lamp and the remaining, as well as the period before the next Foot on the brake STOP warning lamp light up in red on the service is due or how long it is overdue.
  • Page 17
    Instruments the ignition is switched on, after the servicing For more information on Checking levels, information. refer to the corresponding section. The level read will only be correct if the AdBlue range indicators ® vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.
  • Page 18
    Instruments Malfunction of the SCR emissions Warning/ Action Remaining control system indicator range Malfunction detection lamps on Between Top up. If a malfunction is detected, 1,500 miles these warning lamps come and 500 CHECK on, accompanied by an miles (2,400 audible signal and the km and 800 display of an «Emissions…
  • Page 19
    Instruments indicating the driving range in miles or the road speed must be displayed in the local It measures the distance travelled since it was country’s official unit (km/h or mph). reset by the driver. kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 The unit is changed via the screen Resetting the trip recorder seconds.
  • Page 20
    Instruments Pressing this button takes you back up a – the time, ► Press the MENU button for access to the level or cancels the current operation. – the date, main menu: – the exterior temperature (this flashes if there is •…
  • Page 21
    Instruments “Trip computer» menu Define the vehicle parameters – the heating / air conditioning controls, – menus for adjusting settings for vehicle This menu allows the following equipment to be functions and systems, activated / deactivated, depending on the version –…
  • Page 22
    Instruments Workflow Vehicle or Driving (depending on equipment). Use the buttons on each side of the touch screen Allows the activation, deactivation and to access the menus, then use the buttons that adjustment of settings for certain functions. appear on the touch screen. The functions accessible from this menu are Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or 2 arranged under two tabs: «Vehicle settings»…
  • Page 23
    Instruments Information display ► Press the button located on the end of the wiper control stalk. Details are displayed successively. – The current information tab with: • trip mileage. • range. • current fuel consumption. • the Stop & Start time counter. •…
  • Page 24
    Instruments Distance travelled Distance that can still be travelled with the With the lamps on, press button A to increase fuel remaining in the tank (based on the the brightness of the lighting, or button B to (miles or km) average fuel consumption over the last few miles Calculated since the last trip computer decrease it.
  • Page 25
    Instruments Setting the date and time With audio system Without audio system ► Press the MENU button to access the main menu. ► Press the «7» or «8» buttons to select the Set the date and time via the instrument panel «Personalisation-configuration»…
  • Page 26
    Access etc. For more information on the Back-up Remote control / Key procedures, refer to the corresponding section. Remote control function Built-in key Depending on version, using the remote control built-in key, you can perform the following operations: – Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. –…
  • Page 27
    Access Locating the vehicle – The activation of the alarm for other versions. Locking the vehicle Driving with the doors locked could make This function helps you to spot your vehicle from If one of the doors or the boot is not fully it more difficult for the emergency services a distance, with the vehicle locked: closed, the locking does not take place.
  • Page 28
    Access Locking the vehicle Deadlocking electronic key on your person in the recognition zone A. Normal locking Unlocking the vehicle Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also disables the central locking button. The horn remains operational. ► With the electronic key in recognition zone Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it A, press your finger or thumb on the handle of is deadlocked.
  • Page 29
    Access about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with ► Insert the key into the door lock. Back-up procedures an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically. ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ lock the vehicle. Lost keys, remote control, ►…
  • Page 30
    Access Other doors Battery type: CR2032/3 volts. located in the corner, then clip the cover onto the unit. Unlocking Without Keyless Entry and Start ► Reinitialise the remote control. ► Pull the interior door opening control. For more information on Reinitialising the Locking remote control, refer to the corresponding section.
  • Page 31
    Access Risk of explosion or leaking of ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key inflammable liquid or gas! from the ignition switch. Do not use in/store in/place in an environment The remote control is now fully operational where the temperature is extremely high or again.
  • Page 32
    Access Closing Locking after closing Boot If the fault persists after closing again, the boot ► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior Opening will remain locked. grab handles. In the event of a malfunction or if you Central locking experience difficulty opening or closing the tailgate, have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay,…
  • Page 33
    Access Self-protection function ► After deadlocking, you must use the Alarm remote control, the «Keyless Entry and The system checks whether any of its Start» system or the built-in key to unlock the components are out of service. vehicle. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring is put out of service or Automatic (anti-intrusion damaged.
  • Page 34
    Access Locking the vehicle without Reactivating the interior volumetric but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be and anti-tilt monitoring activated after 45 seconds, at the same time activating the alarm as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt ► Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring ►…
  • Page 35
    Access Anti-pinch system Regularly check the condition of the B. Sunroof control sunroof seals (e.g. presence of dust, If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle The sunroof or blind can be operated when the dead leaves). when closing, the movement is automatically ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged If using a car wash, check first that the roof is reversed.
  • Page 36
    Access Electric windows locking control. The manoeuvre stops as soon switch is released. Pressing the switch again as the locking control is released. stops the movement of the window. The electric window switches remain Closing of the blind is limited by the operational for approximately one minute position of the sunroof: the blind cannot after the key has been removed.
  • Page 37
    Access Deactivating the rear If an electric window meets an obstacle during operation, the movement of the window controls (depending window must be reversed. To do this, press on version) the relevant control. When the driver operates the passengers’ electric window controls, it is important to ensure that nothing can prevent the window from closing properly.
  • Page 38
    Ease of use and comfort Correct driving position Front head restraints ► Press lug A to release the head restraint and raise it fully. ► Stow the head restraint securely. Adjusting the height For safety reasons, adjustments must only be made when the vehicle is Refitting a head restraint stationary.
  • Page 39
    Ease of use and comfort Backrest angle Passenger seat backrest ► Raise the control bar and slide the seat forwards or backwards. table position (driver) ► Release the control bar to lock the seat in position on one of the notches. Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is no person or object that might prevent the full travel of the seat.
  • Page 40
    Ease of use and comfort Before moving the seat backwards, ► Use the adjustment knob to switch on and Rear seats ensure that there is nothing that might select the level of heating required: Bench seat with a fixed cushion or on rails prevent the full travel of the seat.
  • Page 41
    Ease of use and comfort Longitudinal seat Removing a head restraint adjustment (depending on version) Folding or unfolding the seats must only be done with the vehicle stationary. Each 2/3 — 1/3 part can be adjusted individually. ► Release the backrest using control 1. ►…
  • Page 42
    Ease of use and comfort ► Lower the head restraints. ► Operate backrest release handle 1 or pull ► Put backrest 3 in the upright position and ► If necessary, move the front seats forward. strap 2. push it firmly to latch it home. ►…
  • Page 43
    Ease of use and comfort Steering wheel Adjustment Mirrors adjustment Door mirrors ► Move control A or turn control C (depending on the version you have) to the right or to the left ► When stationary, pull the control to release to select the corresponding mirror.
  • Page 44
    Ease of use and comfort Electric folding nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, To ensure optimum visibility while headlights of other vehicles, etc. manoeuvring, the mirror automatically Depending on equipment, the door mirrors can brightens when reverse gear is engaged. be folded electrically.
  • Page 45
    Ease of use and comfort Air distribution ► Operate the air conditioning system for at Servicing the ventilation and air least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to conditioning system keep it in good working order. ► Ensure that the passenger compartment ►…
  • Page 46
    Ease of use and comfort Adjusting the air distribution Operation of the air conditioning and regulation Heating/Manual air of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the Central and side air vents. conditioning passenger compartment are automatic. Press the Climate menu button located Footwells.
  • Page 47
    Ease of use and comfort For maximum cooling or heating of the In cold weather with the engine cold, the Each press on a button activates or deactivates passenger compartment, press the air flow is increased gradually until the the function. temperature setting button up or down until comfort setting has been reached, in order to All three buttons can be activated…
  • Page 48
    Ease of use and comfort This function does not operate the air During the winter period, direct the side air With Stop & Start, when demisting vents towards the side windows to optimise their — defrosting has been activated, STOP conditioning.
  • Page 49
    Ease of use and comfort Front fittings Switching on/off version, the door mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current. ► To stop the defrosting operation before it automatically turns off, press this button again.
  • Page 50
    Ease of use and comfort Sun visor Wireless smartphone It contains the front passenger airbag deactivation switch. charger Never drive with the glove box open when a passenger is at the front. It may cause injury during sharp deceleration! 12 V accessory sockets The sun visors are fitted with a vanity mirror with concealing flap and a card holder (or ticket holder).
  • Page 51
    Ease of use and comfort USB socket State of the Meaning When the portable device is detected, the indicator lamp charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It remains lit for the whole time that the battery is Flashing orange Foreign object detected in being charged.
  • Page 52
    Ease of use and comfort Front armrest Removing/refitting ► To remove it on the driver’s side, move the Height adjustment seat backwards and unclip the fasteners. ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by pressing down. ► Check that the mat is secured correctly. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: –…
  • Page 53
    Ease of use and comfort Folding from the passenger compartment ► Push armrest 3 down to the horizontal position. Please note: when putting the armrest back in place, ensure that it is correctly locked and that the red indicator of each strap is no longer visible.
  • Page 54
    Ease of use and comfort Closed storage ► push the shelf down towards to pins to clip it, 6. Storage compartment beneath the boot ► hook the two cords. compartments carpet Hooks Rear shelf To remove the shelf: ► Pull upwards to unclip and open the ►…
  • Page 55
    Ease of use and comfort Front and rear courtesy ► Raise the boot floor as much as possible to access the storage well. lamps Depending on version, it includes: In this position, the courtesy lamp comes – a temporary puncture repair kit with the tool kit, on gradually: –…
  • Page 56
    Ease of use and comfort Front and rear map reading – When the ignition is off, approximately 10 lamps minutes. – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 ► With the ignition on, operate the seconds. corresponding switch. – With the engine running, unlimited. Take care not to put anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.
  • Page 57
    Lighting and visibility Lighting control stalk If one or more lamps fails, a message ► Pull the lighting control stalk to switch asks you to check the lamp or lamps between dipped and main beam headlamps. In «AUTO» and sidelamps mode, pull the lighting Never look too closely at the light beam concerned.
  • Page 58
    Lighting and visibility Front foglamps and rear only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may Direction indicators vary depending on country). foglamp Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when they are no longer necessary. Switching off of the lighting when the ignition is switched off When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps turn off immediately, except for the…
  • Page 59
    Lighting and visibility upwards or downwards, depending on the side Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a In daytime running lamps mode, the of the traffic (e.g. when parking on the right, push qualified workshop. diodes are brighter. the lighting control stalk down to light up on the Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor left).
  • Page 60
    Lighting and visibility ► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control – Road users that do not have their own conditions, using a camera located at the top of stalk toward you («headlamp flash») to activate/ lighting, such as pedestrians. the windscreen.
  • Page 61
    Lighting and visibility Cornering lighting The state of the system stays in the memory If the «AUTO» and «Main beam» indicator lamps when switching off the ignition. were on, the system changes to dipped beam. ► To reactivate the function, once again switch Operation the headlamps manually between dipped and If the ambient light level is very low and traffic…
  • Page 62
    Lighting and visibility With AUTO wiping Wiper control stalk – from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. Before operating the wipers in wintry It becomes inactive: conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost – below a certain angle of rotation of the from the windscreen and around the wiper steering wheel.
  • Page 63
    Lighting and visibility Special position of the The height of the front screenwash jets This function is activated by default. can be adjusted. To change the factory windscreen wipers setting, insert a needle into each of the jets, This maintenance position is used while cleaning then direct them.
  • Page 64
    Lighting and visibility Automatic windscreen After refitting a windscreen wiper blade Do not release them while moving them. Risk of damaging the windscreen! wipers ► To return the wiper blades to their initial position after the operation, switch on the ignition ►…
  • Page 65
    Lighting and visibility Switching off ► Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). Depending on version, this indicator lamp disappears from the display or goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.
  • Page 66
    The relevant certificates are available on the of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/ website. for information on the range of approved accessories. – As a safety measure, access to the…
  • Page 67
    Safety Operation of the system Horn 2. Localised Assistance Call – Upon switching on the ignition, the indicator Localised Emergency Call lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes out: the system is operating correctly. (PE112) – The indicator lamp is fixed red: system ►…
  • Page 68
    Safety Emergency Call» system used with the “112” Access to data By default, depending on equipment, You have the right to access the data deactivate/reactivate geolocation by European single emergency call number. The «Localised Emergency Call» system is and, if necessary, submit a request to simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then able to collect and process only the following rectify, erase or restrict the processing of…
  • Page 69
    Safety Anti-slip regulation (ASR) The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive Electronic stability control carefully at a moderate speed. / Dynamic stability control (ESC) Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a (DSC) qualified workshop. The electronic stability control programme This warning lamp, when lit together with includes the following systems: Anti-slip regulation (or traction control) optimises…
  • Page 70
    Safety ► Or, depending on version, turn the repair procedures provided by CITROËN An indicator lamp associated with each mode «Grip control» knob to this position. comes on, accompanied by the display of a dealers. Deactivation is confirmed by the lighting In order to ensure that these systems remain message to confirm your choice.
  • Page 71
    Safety All terrain (mud, damp or of the brakes in the event of a change of the gear engaged, while progressively releasing trajectory. the brakes. grass, etc.) These systems are reactivated automatically For the system to activate, the gradient This mode, when moving off, allows from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the must be greater than 5%.
  • Page 72
    Safety Switching off its lamp lights up; this indicator lamp appears in The inertia reels are fitted with a device which green on the instrument panel. automatically locks the strap in the event of a The system becomes active at speeds below 19 collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls mph (30 km/h).
  • Page 73
    Safety Installation by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified ► To adjust the height of the anchorage point, workshop. squeeze control A and slide it to the notch desired. Front seat belts Rear seat belts ► Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the left buckle.
  • Page 74
    Safety Fastening Advice The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off. 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp always fasten the seat belt, even for short 3.
  • Page 75
    Safety Impact detection zones – not show signs of tearing or fraying. Airbags – not be changed or modified, in order to avoid affecting its performance. General information This system is designed to improve the safety Recommendations for children of the occupants of the front seats and the rear Use a suitable child seat if the passenger outer seats in the event of a violent collision.
  • Page 76
    Safety Front airbags Lateral airbags of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
  • Page 77
    Safety Advice Passengers must not place their feet on the Curtain airbags dashboard. Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, For the airbags to be fully effective, Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags as this could cause head injuries when the observe the safety recommendations can cause burns or the risk of injury from a curtain airbag is deployed.
  • Page 78
    Safety Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Installing a booster seat positioned and tightened. The chest part of the seat belt must be For child seats with a support leg, ensure that positioned on the child’s shoulder without the support leg is in firm and steady contact touching the neck.
  • Page 79
    Safety «Forward facing» To ensure the safety of the child, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated when a «rearward facing» child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed in the event of deployment of the airbag.
  • Page 80
    Safety Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg «RÖMER Baby-Safe» «GRACO Booster» Installed in the «rearward facing» position. The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the front Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg passenger seat or on the rear side seats.
  • Page 81
    Safety Recommended ISOFIX child ► Remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once seats the child seat has been removed). ► Pass the strap of the child seat behind the Also consult the user guide from the child seat backrest, centring it between the openings seat’s manufacturer to find out how to for the head restraint rods.
  • Page 82
    Safety «RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX» «RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX» (size category: B1) (size category: B1) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Suitable for forward-facing installation only. Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
  • Page 83
    Safety Seat number Front seats Rear seats Activated «ON» (c) Deactivated «OFF» Front passenger airbag Position compatible with a universal (a) yes (d) (j) yes (d) (k) yes (e) (f) no (l) yes (e) (f) child seat www.carobook.com Position compatible with an i-Size child no (l) no (l) seat…
  • Page 84
    Safety Seat position suitable for the installation (b) To install a «rearward facing» child seat at Seats not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. of a child seat secured using the seat belt this seat position, the front passenger airbag (m) Remove the head restraint. and universally approved «rearward facing»…
  • Page 85
    Safety For seat adjustments, refer to the table ► To deactivate the child lock, turn the key in Any other status of the indicator lamp «Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child the opposite direction. indicates a malfunction of the electric seats».
  • Page 86
    Driving Driving recommendations On flooded roads Do not park the vehicle or leave the engine running on a flammable We strongly advise against driving on flooded ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (e.g. dry grass, dead leaves).The roads, as this could cause serious damage to the vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
  • Page 87
    Driving Towing Tyres Side wind ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more Driving with a trailer places greater vehicle and of the trailer, observing the susceptible to wind when towing. demands on the towing vehicle and recommended pressures.
  • Page 88
    Driving Starting / Switching off the economy mode. The power supply is cut off Wait until this warning lamp goes off on automatically to preserve the remaining battery the instrument panel, then turn the key to engine with the key charge.
  • Page 89
    Driving Starting To facilitate unlocking of the steering If the key has been left in the ignition switch column, it is recommended that the in position 2, the ignition will be switched off wheels be returned to the straight ahead automatically after one hour.
  • Page 90
    Driving Switching on the ignition Key not detected In some circumstances, a message indicates that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel without starting the engine while pressing the «START/STOP» button to Back-up starting assist unlocking of the steering column. A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, to enable the engine to be started if the system Petrol engines…
  • Page 91
    Driving Back-up switch-off (manual gearbox) or move the selector lever Parking brake to position P (automatic gearbox). For towing, your vehicle is approved for Release parking on slopes of up to 12%. 5-speed manual gearbox Engaging reverse gear ► Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever fully.
  • Page 92
    Driving Gear selector module As a safety precaution and to facilitate 6-speed manual gearbox engine starting: ► Always select neutral. Engaging 5 or 6 gear ► Press the clutch pedal. ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to engage 5 or 6 gear.
  • Page 93
    Driving Information displayed on If the conditions are not met, you will hear an gear according to the driving style, the road audible signal, accompanied by the display of a profile and the load in the vehicle. the instrument panel For maximum acceleration without touching the message.
  • Page 94
    Driving This programme improves starting and traction The Sport and Snow programmes are inactive Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer when grip is poor. or a qualified workshop. in manual operation. This symbol is displayed if a gear is not There is a risk of damaging the gearbox: Return to automatic operation engaged correctly (gear selector between…
  • Page 95
    Driving With an automatic gearbox, the system is The hill start assist function cannot be Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary only active in manual operation. deactivated. However, using the parking and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its for a short time when you release the brake The information appears on the pedal.
  • Page 96
    Driving With/Without audio system any risk of injury caused by the engine – With a manual gearbox: with the gear lever in neutral and the clutch pedal released. restarting automatically. – With an automatic gearbox: with the gear selector in mode D or M, the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle stops or the gear selector in mode N, with the vehicle stationary.
  • Page 97
    Driving coming out of reverse gear or turning the Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a The tyre under-inflation detection cannot, steering wheel. qualified workshop. in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The vehicle stalls in STOP mode This system does not avoid the need to Restarting the engine (START mode)
  • Page 98
    Driving With/Without audio system Snow chains blow-out. This is because analysis of the The system does not have to be values read by the wheel’s speed sensors reinitialised after fitting or removing snow can take several minutes. chains. The alert may be delayed at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a sporty driving mode.
  • Page 99
    Driving Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a These systems do not make it possible to alternating shade and light) can also impair qualified workshop. exceed the laws of physics. detection performance. In the event of a windscreen replacement, «Space-saver»…
  • Page 100
    Driving A front or rear impact to the vehicle can Units of speed Once the system has been activated, the upset the sensors’ settings, which is not Ensure that the units of speed displayed following information is grouped together in the always detected by the system: distance on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are head-up display:…
  • Page 101
    Driving Brightness adjustment Memorising speeds 3. Brightness adjustment ► With the engine running, adjust the 4. Display height adjustment This function, used only for the speed limiter brightness of the information display using the and programmable cruise control, lets you buttons 3: Activation/Deactivation save speed settings that will subsequently be…
  • Page 102
    Driving Head-up display For more information on the Speed limiter instrument panel must match that of the or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding country you are driving in. section. Automatic sign reading is a driving aid system and does not always display the Road signs recognition correct speed limits.
  • Page 103
    Driving Steering-mounted controls The driver can adjust the vehicle’s speed – Poor weather (rain, snow). according to the information given by the system. – Atmospheric pollution. – Towing. Activation/Deactivation – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel or snow chains fitted. By default, the system is automatically activated –…
  • Page 104
    Driving Head-up display speed setting. «MEM» flashes for a few seconds This system prevents the vehicle from on the display. exceeding the speed programmed by the driver (speed setting). If there is a difference of less than 6 mph The speed limiter is switched on manually. (9 km/h) between the speed setting and The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h).
  • Page 105
    Driving Adjusting the limit speed For more information on Memorising speeds 7. Speed limiter on/pause status indication or the Road signs recognition, refer to the setting 8. Programmed speed setting value corresponding sections. 9. Speed suggested by the Road signs You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in Displays in the instrument recognition…
  • Page 106
    Driving On a steep descent or in the event of between vehicles, the driver remains – In heavy traffic. sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will responsible for their driving. – On winding or steep roads. not be able to prevent the vehicle from In the interest of public safety, only use cruise –…
  • Page 107
    Driving Head-up display Cruise control remains active after 5. Depending on version: changing gear, regardless of the gearbox Display the speed thresholds saved using the type, on engines fitted with the Stop & Start Memorising speeds function function. Use the speed suggested by the Road signs Switching off the ignition cancels any recognition (MEM display) speed setting.
  • Page 108
    Driving Modifying the cruise speed Switching off ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request. setting ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the «OFF» position: ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested the cruise control information disappears from Cruise control must be active.
  • Page 109
    Driving Deactivation/Activation – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of – Following an impact to the windscreen close to collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian. the detection camera. By default, the system is automatically activated –…
  • Page 110
    Driving Active Safety Brake ► Select one of the three pre-defined first level of alert may not be displayed: the thresholds: «Far», «Normal» or «Close». level 2 alert may be displayed directly. The last threshold selected is memorised when Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed the ignition is switched off.
  • Page 111
    Driving – The vehicle’s speed is between 6 mph and Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a The status of the function is saved when the 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) when a moving qualified workshop. ignition is switched off.
  • Page 112
    Driving Deactivation / Activation The following situations may interfere with the operation of the system or The system is activated every time the ignition prevent it from working: is switched on. – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks); –…
  • Page 113
    Driving Malfunction – When overtaking a vehicle, the speed difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). In the event of a malfunction, this – When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed warning lamp comes on on the difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h). instrument panel, accompanied by the display of –…
  • Page 114: Parking Sensors

    Driving by the Service warning lamp coming on and the display of a message. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. The system may be temporarily disturbed by certain climatic conditions (e.g. rain, hail). This system detects and signals the proximity of In particular, driving on a wet road or going obstacles (e.g.

  • Page 115: Top Rear Vision

    Driving When the distance between the vehicle and is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle The system status is memorised when the the obstacle becomes less than about thirty remains below 6 mph (10 km/h). ignition is switched off. centimetres, the audible signal becomes The front parking sensors are interrupted if the The rear parking sensors system will be…

  • Page 116
    Driving The screen is divided into two parts with a between the brackets) in real time and as the contextual view and a view from above the manoeuvre progresses. vehicle in its close surroundings. It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when The parking sensors supplement the information parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle on the view from above the vehicle.
  • Page 117
    Driving AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are. changes according to the position of the steering It is important to monitor the sides of the wheel.
  • Page 118: Park Assist

    Driving This view is only available via the view selection To help the driver monitor the manoeuvre, the Activating the function deactivates the system automatically triggers the display from menu. Blind spot monitoring system. the Top Rear Vision function and activates the Quick start mode You can deactivate the function at any parking sensors.

  • Page 119
    Driving Parking space search When the system finds an available space, «OK» “Go forwards». is displayed on the parking view, accompanied ► You should drive at a distance of between The manoeuvring status is indicated by these 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal.
  • Page 120
    Driving The images from the camera(s) The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, – The system does not detect spaces that displayed on the touch screen may be accompanied by the «Manoeuvre cancelled» are much larger than the vehicle itself or that distorted by the terrain.
  • Page 121
    Driving – After modifying one or both bumpers (added protection). – If the sensors have been repainted other than by the CITROËN dealer network. – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. Malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs during use, indicated by this warning lamp coming on, it causes the function to deactivate.
  • Page 122
    prefers FILL UP WITH CONFIDENCE WITH TOTAL QUARTZ LUBRICANTS For more than 50 years, TOTAL and CITROËN www.carobook.com have shared common values: excellence, creativity and technological innovation. It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants adapted for engines in CITROËN vehicles, making them ever more fuel efficient and environmentally friendly.
  • Page 123: Practical Information

    Practical information Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating signal are repeated with increasing frequency as correctly. In these temperature conditions, use the fuel level drops towards 0. winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid more than 50 % full.

  • Page 124: Misfuel Prevention (Diesel)

    Practical information Operation Do not continue after the nozzle’s third cut- out. Doing so may cause malfunctions. ► Put the filler cap back in place and turn it to the right. ► Close the fuel filler flap. If you have put in the wrong fuel for the vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine.

  • Page 125: Snow Chains

    Practical information Snow chains ► Fit the snow chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer. In wintry conditions, snow chains improve ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h).

  • Page 126
    Practical information Fitting the towball If the towball is not locked, the trailer can A. Locked position (green mark opposite the become detached — risk of an accident! white mark); the wheel is in contact with the towball (no gap). During use B.
  • Page 127
    Practical information Removing the towball ► The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- ► Remove the protective cover from the clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear! towball. ► Attach the trailer to the towball. ► Grasp the trailer’s plug, perform a quarter ►…
  • Page 128: Towing Device

    Practical information ► Open the lock using the key. axle, and the nose weight approaches the ► Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using maximum permitted without exceeding it. the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing a clockwise direction until it stops;…

  • Page 129: Energy Economy Mode

    Practical information Roof bars Selecting the mode – Do not transport more than 4 conventional bicycles or 2 electric bicycles. A confirmation message is displayed when When loading bicycles onto a bicycle carrier As a safety measure and to avoid energy economy mode is entered, and the active on a towball, be sure to place the heaviest damaging the roof, it is essential to use…

  • Page 130: Bonnet

    Practical information Fitting on longitudinal bars Maximum load distributed over the roof The location of the interior bonnet bars, for a loading height not exceeding release lever prevents the bonnet being 40 cm: opened when the left-hand front door is –…

  • Page 131
    Practical information Closing Petrol engine ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the bottom of the door frame, towards you. ► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the support slot. ► Clip the stay in its housing. ►…
  • Page 132: Checking Levels

    Practical information Used products Checking using the dipstick 10. Priming pump* For the location of the dipstick, please refer Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or Diesel fuel system to the illustration of the corresponding engine fluids with the skin. This system is under very high pressure.

  • Page 133
    Practical information Screenwash fluid supplied with the vehicle (or available from Clean the cap before removing it to refill. your CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop). Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed Top up to the required level when Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate container.
  • Page 134: Checks

    Practical information Particle filter (Diesel) For more information on the Indicators and in For more information on the precautions particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to to take before any work on the 12 V The start of clogging of the particle filter is the corresponding section.

  • Page 135: Adblue® (Bluehdi)

    Practical information Automatic gearbox Wheels and tyres Always mark the direction of rotation on the tyres that will be stored when fitting winter or summer The gearbox does not require any The inflation pressure of all tyres, tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place and away maintenance (no oil change).

  • Page 136
    Practical information further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is The SCR system includes a heater for the Never store AdBlue ® containers in your empty and the vehicle is immobilised. tank, allowing you to continue driving vehicle. AdBlue ®…
  • Page 137: Advice On Care And Maintenance

    Practical information for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried “Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible” – it is out. essential to add at least 5 litres. Never pour the AdBlue into the Diesel ® After refilling fuel tank. ►…

  • Page 138
    Practical information move the electronic key away and deactivate the controls located on the centre console. Be Do not use a high-pressure washer to the «hands-free» function (Hands-Free vigilant! clean the vehicle — risk of damaging or To clean instrument panels, touch screens detaching the decals! Tailgate Access).
  • Page 139: In The Event Of A Breakdown

    In the event of a breakdown Running out of fuel Non-BlueHDi engines ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, (Diesel) unclip the cover to access the priming pump. With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be ► Operate the priming pump repeatedly primed if you run out of fuel.

  • Page 140
    In the event of a breakdown With spare wheel If the vehicle does not have its original jack, 3. Removable towing eye and flat blade contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified screwdriver workshop to obtain the one that was intended The flat blade screwdriver allows the cover by the manufacturer.
  • Page 141
    In the event of a breakdown Access to the kit Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on this label. For more information on Identification markings, particularly this label, refer to the corresponding section. ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the bottle of sealant.
  • Page 142
    In the event of a breakdown After use, do not discard the bottle into the environment; take it to a CITROËN dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
  • Page 143: Spare Wheel

    In the event of a breakdown Checking/adjusting tyre Removing the spare wheel Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise pressures the under-inflation detection system. The compressor can be used, without injecting For more information on Tyre under-inflation sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the detection, refer to the corresponding section.

  • Page 144
    In the event of a breakdown With an automatic gearbox, select mode P – If the vehicle has steel wheels, remove the to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, wheel trim. unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch –…
  • Page 145
    In the event of a breakdown Fitting a wheel Fitting a steel or «space-saver» type spare wheel ► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the place. ► Lower the vehicle again fully. washers A do not make contact with the steel ►…
  • Page 146: Changing A Bulb

    In the event of a breakdown Putting the spare wheel After changing a wheel internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear back in place With a «space-saver» type spare wheel after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

  • Page 147
    In the event of a breakdown Direction indicators Refitting the lamp units If you need to replace this type of bulb, Perform the operations in the reverse you must contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. order to dismantling. Do not touch the «Full LED»…
  • Page 148
    In the event of a breakdown Rear lamps Reversing lamps and foglamp ► Unscrew the two fixing screws located in the openings. 1. Brake lamps / Sidelamps (W21/5W) Replacing bulbs ► Unclip the lamp unit and carefully extract it 2. Direction indicators (WY21W) Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified pulling straight towards the outside.
  • Page 149: Fuses

    In the event of a breakdown Lead-acid starter batteries ► Fit the console back into place around the Fuses courtesy lamp and clip it correctly. These batteries contain harmful Changing a fuse Rear courtesy lamp substances (sulphuric acid and lead). All work must be carried out only by a They must be disposed of in accordance CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop…

  • Page 150
    In the event of a breakdown ► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal ► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if release lever, then the external safety catch. the vehicle has one. ► Raise the bonnet. ► Allow the engine to run for at least (+) Positive terminal.
  • Page 151
    In the event of a breakdown Follow the instructions provided by the ► At the end of the charging operation, switch Before disconnecting the battery: manufacturer of the charger. off charger B before disconnecting the cables ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, Never reverse polarities.
  • Page 152: Towing

    In the event of a breakdown Reconnecting the (+) terminal correctly, locking will then not be possible. – Sunroof and electric blind. Start the procedure again. – Electric windows. – Date and time. – Preset radio stations. Following reconnection After reconnecting the battery, the After reconnecting the battery, turn on the message «Collision risk detection ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the…

  • Page 153
    In the event of a breakdown When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering assistance. A professional recovery service must be called in the following cases: – broken down on a motorway or main road; –…
  • Page 154
    In the event of a breakdown Accessing the tools Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle ► On the front bumper, unclip the cover from ► On the rear bumper, unclip the cover from The tools are located in the boot. Depending below using the flat blade screwdriver.
  • Page 155: Technical Data

    Technical data Engine technical data and must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude. towed loads The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the Engines towball. The engine characteristics are given in the When exterior temperatures are high, the vehicle’s registration document, as well as in vehicle performance may be limited in…

  • Page 156
    Technical data Engines and towed loads — PETROL Engine PureTech 82 PureTech 110 Gearbox Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Code EB2FMA EB2F MB5 EB2DTM AT6III EB2DTM AT6III (Euro 4) (Euro 6.1) (Euro 4) (Euro 5) Model codes: 2R…
  • Page 157
    Technical data Engine PureTech 110 S&S PureTech 110 PureTech 130 S&S Gearbox Manual 6-speed (BVM6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Code EB2ADT MB6 EB2DTM AT6III EB2ADTS (Euro 6.3) (Euro 6.1) (Euro 6.3) Model codes: 2R… HNPM HNVW HNS1 1,199 1,199 1,199 Cubic capacity (cm…
  • Page 158
    Technical data Engines and towed loads — DIESEL Engine HDi 92 BlueHDi 110 S&S BlueHDi 120 S&S Gearbox Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 6-speed (BVM6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Code DV6D BE DV6D BE DV5RCe MB6 STT DV5RCD AT6III STT (Euro 4) (Euro 5) (Euro 6.3)
  • Page 159: Www.carobook.com

    Technical data Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle. * Mirrors folded in. ** Version with longitudinal bars. www.carobook.com Identification markings A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the right-hand front seat floor. Various visible markings for vehicle identification Stamped on the chassis.

  • Page 160
    Technical data – Maximum weight on the front axle. – Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres label. Affixed to the driver’s door. Bears the following information about the tyres: – Tyre pressures, unladen and laden. – Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions and type as well as the load and speed indices.
  • Page 161: First Steps

    Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth To avoid discharging the battery, the Short press: select the preset radio station. ® audio system audio system may switch off after a few Long press: preset a radio station. minutes if the engine is not running. Radio: Automatic step by step search up/down for radio stations.

  • Page 162: Steering Mounted Controls

    Bluetooth® audio system During a telephone call: In the event of a telephone call: Steering mounted controls Short press: open the contextual telephone Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call. Steering mounted controls — menu. Long press: end the call. During a telephone call: Type 1 Confirm a selection.

  • Page 163: Radio

    Bluetooth® audio system Long procedure «Telephone»: Call, Directory Press this button to display the list of management, Telephone management, stations received locally. Press the MENU button. To update this list, press for more than two Hang up. «Trip computer». seconds. The sound is cut while updating. Select «Audio functions».

  • Page 164: Dab (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Radio

    Bluetooth® audio system Press the TA button to activate or DAB (Digital Audio deactivate traffic messages. Broadcasting) radio Receiving INFO messages Depending on version The INFO function gives priority to TA If the current DAB radio station is not Full list of radio stations and «multiplexes». alert messages.

  • Page 165: Media

    Bluetooth® audio system When the radio station is displayed in the If the «DAB» station you are listening to is When the USB port is used, the portable screen , press «OK» to display the not available on FM («DAB/FM» option device charges automatically.

  • Page 166
    Bluetooth® audio system Select by «Folder» / «Artist» / «Genre» / applicable to the product and/or the standard Press the LIST button to display the list of «Playlist». IEC 60950-1. tracks on the CD. Depending on availability and type of device Press and hold one of these buttons for Press the SOURCE button several times fast forward or rewind.
  • Page 167: Telephone

    Bluetooth® audio system Information and advice Press and hold one of these buttons for In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the fast forward or rewind. Joliet standard is recommended. The CD player can play files with “.mp3”, “.wma”, To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

  • Page 168
    Bluetooth® audio system The services available depend on the from the system), ensure that the code is the Press OK to confirm. network, the SIM card and the same in the system and in the telephone. compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Select «Bluetooth Connections If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not Check the instructions for your telephone and…
  • Page 169
    Bluetooth® audio system connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free Press this button for more than two Confirm with OK. seconds for access to your directory, then kit and streaming). – «Delete connection»: to delete the pairing. navigate using the thumb wheel. Microphone off Ending a call When you delete a pairing in the system,…
  • Page 170: Settings

    Bluetooth® audio system Interactive voice response compatibility, and while it is connected via With the engine off, the audio system Bluetooth. switches off after a few minutes of use. From the contextual menu, select «DTMF With certain telephones connected by When the engine is switched off, the audio tones»…

  • Page 171
    Bluetooth® audio system balance and Le-Ri balance) to the middle The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for ► Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot position, setting the musical ambience to «None», example when going through an automatic car be played if it is too badly damaged.
  • Page 172
    Bluetooth® audio system You did not grant access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. ► Accept or confirm access by the system to the contacts on your telephone. I am unable to continue a conversation when getting into my vehicle. Handset mode is activated.
  • Page 173
    CITROËN Connect Radio CITROËN Connect Radio – Changing the system settings and At all times it is possible to display the rolling configuration. menus by pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. All touch-sensitive areas on the screen are The system is protected so that it only white.
  • Page 174
    CITROËN Connect Radio enter standby mode (with the screen and Increase volume. Audio source selection (depending on sound off) for 5 minutes or more. equipment): The system will resume normal operation Decrease volume. – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on when the temperature in the passenger equipment).
  • Page 175
    CITROËN Connect Radio Radio Media Settings Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a list. Short press: confirm a selection;…
  • Page 176
    CITROËN Connect Radio Navigation Press this button to search and select a Applications recipient. Select the «Quick messages” tab. Viewing photos Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display settings for messages. To protect the system, do not use a USB Press this button to write a new message.
  • Page 177
    CITROËN Connect Radio Enter the FM and AM waveband values Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. Press «OK» to confirm. Press «Preset». Activate/deactivate «News». Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station.
  • Page 178
    CITROËN Connect Radio Select the «Tone», «Balance», «Sound», Press in the shaded area to confirm. DAB (Digital Audio «Voice» or «Ringtones» tab to configure Broadcasting) radio the sound settings. If «FM-DAB Follow-up» is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. may be a time offset of a few seconds Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to «FM»…
  • Page 179
    CITROËN Connect Radio Information and advice Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the The system supports USB mass storage connected.
  • Page 180
    CITROËN Connect Radio Telephone Android Auto smartphone On connecting the USB cable, the function deactivates the connection CarPlay ® USB sockets system’s Bluetooth ® mode. The «CarPlay» function requires the use of Depending on country. Depending on equipment, for more information On the smartphone, download the a compatible smartphone and compatible on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay…
  • Page 181
    CITROËN Connect Radio Press the «PHONE» button to display the If the pairing procedure fails, we Depending on the type of telephone, you may by recommend deactivating and then prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and secondary page. Press «Android Auto» to start the reactivating the Bluetooth function on the messages.
  • Page 182
    CITROËN Connect Radio Press «OK» to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button Press «Call». to reject the call. Calling a recently used Managing paired telephones Press «End call». number This function lets you connect or disconnect a device or delete a pairing. Making a call Press Telephone to display the main Press Telephone to display the main…
  • Page 183
    CITROËN Connect Radio Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page. Settings Press Settings to display the main page. Press «Configuration» to access the Configuring profiles secondary page. Press «Configuration» to access the Press Settings to display the main page. Press «Screen configuration».
  • Page 184
    CITROËN Connect Radio Press «Configuration» to access the Press this button to set the date. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, secondary page. Press «Date and time». Press the back arrow to save the date. including in RDS mode.
  • Page 185
    CITROËN Connect Radio ► Delete the files supplied with the memory Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the USB cables are of poor quality. bass settings, and vice versa.
  • Page 186: Citroën Connect Nav

    CITROËN Connect Nav CITROËN Connect Nav – Connecting to the CarPlay With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. ® or Android Increase or decrease the volume using Auto applications (certain applications stop displaying when the vehicle is moving). the wheel or the «plus»…

  • Page 187: Steering Mounted Controls

    CITROËN Connect Nav – Go to the «Notifications» of messages, emails, In very hot conditions, the volume may Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, map updates and, depending on the services, be limited to protect the system. It may end call;…

  • Page 188: Applications

    CITROËN Connect Nav Applications Telephone Vehicle Run certain applications from a Connect a telephone via Bluetooth , read Activate, deactivate or configure certain ® smartphone connected via CarPlay vehicle functions. ® messages and emails and send quick Android Auto. messages. Air conditioning Check the status of the Bluetooth ®…

  • Page 189
    CITROËN Connect Nav Example of a «voice command» for the radio and Voice commands media: «Play artist Madonna» Steering wheel-mounted Example of a «voice command» for the controls telephone: «Call David Miller» Voice commands: Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the «Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,…
  • Page 190
    CITROËN Connect Nav step. There’s more information available in To plan a route, say «navigate to» followed by the distance» or «arrival time». To learn more «novice» mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying «help with navigation».
  • Page 191
    CITROËN Connect Nav «Radio Media» voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available only with a USB connection. commands What’s playing? Voice commands Help messages «Telephone» voice commands Turn on source radio — Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you’d like to play, start by saying — ……
  • Page 192
    CITROËN Connect Nav David Miller, I’ll be late». To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I’ll be late». Check the phone menu calls, say «display calls». For more information on the one you’d like to send.
  • Page 193
    CITROËN Connect Nav To a recent destination To a contact an address from the «Contact» list or the address «History». Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the number, the Press the «MENU»…
  • Page 194
    CITROËN Connect Nav To a point on the map You can only select this method of A marker is displayed in the middle of the using the service if a network connection screen, with the «Latitude» and Press Navigation to display the main is active;…
  • Page 195
    CITROËN Connect Nav legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the «Secured», «Not secured» or corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the «Stored” tab. smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. communication process between the Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions…
  • Page 196
    CITROËN Connect Nav Activate or deactivate: – «Give an audible warning». Press Navigation to display the main – «Advise proximity of POI 1». page. – «No data sharing except for company – «Advise proximity of POI 2». Press the «Declare a new danger zone» vehicles».
  • Page 197
    CITROËN Connect Nav Displaying charging station Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly information. changing, we recommend keeping the details Press this button to display detailed smartphone’s operating system up-to- Press Navigation to display the main weather information.
  • Page 198
    CITROËN Connect Nav From the system, press «Applications» to During the procedure, several screen Select the country of residence. display the main page. pages relating to certain features are Press «Connectivity» to access the «CarPlay Press «OK» to save and start the browser. ®…
  • Page 199
    CITROËN Connect Nav Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have «Emergency and Press Connect-App to display the main assistance call» services), after first activating Select the name of the system in the list page. smartphone connection sharing. Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the of detected devices.
  • Page 200: Radio

    CITROËN Connect Nav This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press «OK» to confirm. Radio context of radio wave transmission, and in no way indicative of an audio system Selecting a station RDS station tracking may not be malfunction. available nationwide, as many radio Press Radio Media to display the main stations do not cover 100 % of the country.

  • Page 201: Dab (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Radio

    CITROËN Connect Nav TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the Media previously playing media resumes at the end of secondary page. the message. Select «Radio settings». USB port Select «Announcements». Insert the USB memory stick into the USB Activate/deactivate «Traffic Select «General».

  • Page 202
    CITROËN Connect Nav Selecting the source Information and advice If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the Press Radio Media to display the main The system supports USB mass storage smartphone. devices, BlackBerry devices and Apple page.
  • Page 203: Telephone

    CITROËN Connect Nav Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone. Press Telephone to display the main All three profiles may connect by default. Pairing a Bluetooth ® page. Press «Bluetooth search».

  • Page 204
    CITROËN Connect Nav Calling a recently used Managing paired telephones Select «End call» on the touch screen. number This function lets you connect or disconnect a device or delete a pairing. Making a call Press Telephone to display the main Press Telephone to display the main page.
  • Page 205: Settings

    CITROËN Connect Nav Managing quick messages Press this button to sort contacts by Access to email messages depends on Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the Press Telephone to display the main name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system. page.

  • Page 206
    CITROËN Connect Nav The «Position» settings (All passengers, Press «OK» again to save the settings. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Driver and Front only) are common to all the screen and/or the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the main page. sources.
  • Page 207: Frequently Asked Questions

    CITROËN Connect Nav Navigation Select «Setting the time-date». Press «OK» to confirm. I cannot enter the navigation address. Select «Date». The address is not recognised. The system may not automatically Press this button to set the date. ► Use the «intuitive method» by pressing manage the change between winter and the «Search…»…

  • Page 208
    CITROËN Connect Nav ► Activate the audible warning in the On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. «Navigation» menu and check the voice volume 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites The surrounding area (e.g.
  • Page 209
    CITROËN Connect Nav The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check the compatibility of the Some telephones offer display options. artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to telephone on the Brand’s website (services). Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can a few minutes.
  • Page 210
    CITROËN Connect Nav ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass, Treble, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to «None», setting loudness correction to «Active» in USB mode and «Inactive» in Radio mode.
  • Page 211
    Event data recorders Event data recorders As a rule such data is transient and is not stored Data is generally read via the OBD (On-Board for longer than an operational cycle, and only Diagnostics) port prescribed by law in the Electronic control units are installed in your processed on board the vehicle itself.
  • Page 212
    Event data recorders Depending on the equipment level in question, integration, this includes data such as position and the associated data protection information is these include data, day / night mode and other general vehicle provided. Personal data may be used to provide –…
  • Page 213
    Alphabetical index 180° rear vision 44–45 Air intake Brakes Air vents Braking assistance system 31–32 Braking, automatic emergency 106–108 Alarm Brightness Android Auto connection Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Bulbs Antitheft / Immobiliser Bulbs (changing) 144–146 178, 195 Accessories Apple CarPlay connection Active Safety Brake 106–108 Applications…
  • Page 214
    Alphabetical index Children 72, 78–80 Cruise control, dynamic with Stop Children (safety) function 101–102 Child seats 72, 75–76, 78 Cup holder EBFD Child seats, conventional 78, 80, 82 Eco-driving (advice) Child seats, i-Size 80, 82 Economy mode Child seats, ISOFIX 78–80, 82 Electric windows Cleaning (advice)
  • Page 215
    Alphabetical index Fitting roof bars 127–128 Inflating tyres and accessories Fittings, boot (using the kit) 138, 141 Fittings, interior 47–48, 50 Hazard warning lamps Infrared camera Fittings, rear headlamp adjustment 8, 8–9, 98 Instrument panel Flap, fuel filler Headlamp adjustment Instrument panel, matrix 121–122 Flashing indicators…
  • Page 216
    Alphabetical index Lamp, boot 54, 147 Oil consumption Lamps, parking OIl, engine Lamps, rear Maintenance (advice) 53, 137–138 On-board tools Lams with Full LED technology Maintenance, routine 98, 132 Opening the bonnet Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) Opening the boot 24, 26, 30 Lane Departure Warning System 110–111 53–54…
  • Page 217
    Alphabetical index Reversing camera 97, 113–114, 116 Socket, 12 V accessory Roof bars 127–128 Socket, auxiliary 164, 177, 199 161–162, 174–175, 198 Running out of fuel (Diesel) Socket, Jack 164, 199 Radio Radio, digital (Digital Audio Broadcasting — 99, 101–104 Speed limiter 162, 176, 199 100–101…
  • Page 218
    Alphabetical index Wiper blades (changing) 61–62 Wiper, rear Tank, fuel Under-inflation (detection) 121–122 60, 62–63 Wipers Technical data 154, 156 24, 26 Unlocking Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 62–63 Telephone 165–168, 179–180, 201–203 Unlocking from the inside Telephone, Bluetooth with voice Unlocking the doors 30–31 Updating the date…
  • Page 219
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 220
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 221
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 222
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 223
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 224
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 225
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 226
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 227
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 228
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 229
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 230
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 231
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 232
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 233
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 234
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 235
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 236
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 237
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 238
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 239
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 240
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 241
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 242
    www.carobook.com…
  • Page 243
    4DCONCEPT Automobiles CITROËN declares, in accordance Groupe MAURY Imprimeur with the provisions of European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are 10-31-1282 used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
  • Page 244
    www.carobook.com ANG. 21A88.0040 *21A88.0040*…

Комментарии
4

Войдите или зарегистрируйтесь, чтобы писать комментарии, задавать вопросы и участвовать в обсуждении.

Войти
Зарегистрироваться

Alex817

Я езжу на Citroen C3 Aircross

При покупке дилер руководство по эксплуатации не дал, сказали качай с нета. Но я у них через месяц забрал, наверно отдали со следующей партии. Сколько машин покупал, никогда такого не было. Думал только я попал, а нет… Дилер случайно не в Химках?

4 года

ONIS71

Автор

Я езжу на Citroen C3 Aircross

Нет, не в Химках.
Не нашли, сказали что позже привезут.
Как понял что потеряли на месте.

4 года

Alex817

Я езжу на Citroen C3 Aircross

Ну, песня та же… Дожимай!

1

4 года

ONIS71

Автор

Я езжу на Citroen C3 Aircross

Дожал))
www.drive2.ru/l/536723578…fwSPX8wPBsAocdR_xVOPVA-rM

4 года

Смотреть руководство для Citroën C3 Aircross (2021) ниже. Все руководства на ManualsCat.com могут просматриваться абсолютно бесплатно. Нажав кнопку «Выбор языка» вы можете изменить язык руководства, которое хотите просмотреть.

Страница: 1

РУКОВОДСТВО ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

Страница: 2

Доступ к руководству по эксплуатации
ПРИЛОЖЕНИЕ ДЛЯ СМАРТФОНА
Установите приложение Scan MyCitroën (контент
доступен в автономном режиме).
ИНТЕРАКТИВНАЯ ВЕРСИЯ
Посетите веб-сайт CITROËN и выберите раздел
MyCITROËN для просмотра или загрузки
руководства по эксплуатации. Или перейдите по
адресу:
http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
Отсканируйте QR-код, чтобы
получить прямой доступ.
Данным символом обозначена
последняя доступная информация.
Затем выберите:
– автомобиль,
– период выдачи, соответствующий начальной
дате регистрации автомобиля.
Выбрать:
– язык,
– автомобиль и тип кузова,
– период выдачи руководства по эксплуатации,
соответствующий начальной дате регистрации
автомобиля.

Страница: 3

Добро пожаловать!
Благодарим вас за выбор Citroën C3 AIRCROSS.
В руководстве содержатся рекомендации и основная информация по
безопасной эксплуатации вашего автомобиля. Настоятельно рекомендуем
вам ознакомиться с данным документом, а также изучить содержание
сервисно-гарантийной книжки.
В комплектации вашего автомобиля содержится только часть
представленного здесь оборудования — в зависимости от варианта
исполнения, модификации и характеристик, предназначенных для
страны, в которую он поставляется.
Описания и рисунки могут быть использованы только в информативных
целях.
Компания Automobiles CITROËN оставляет за собой право на внесение
изменений и усовершенствований в свои изделия и в их оборудование
без обязательства вносить их в данное руководство.
При передаче автомобиля новому владельцу не забудьте передать ему
данное Руководство.
Условные обозначения
Предупреждение, касающееся безопасности
Дополнительная информация
Функция защиты окружающей среды
Автомобиль с левосторонним управлением
Автомобиль с правосторонним управлением
Черным прямоугольником обозначается
место расположения описываемой системы/
кнопки.

Страница: 4

2
Оглавление

Общий обзор

Эко-вождение
1
Бортовые приборы
Панели приборов  8
Контрольные лампы систем  9
Индикаторы  14
Счетчики пробега  17
Настройки систем на автомобилях
без экрана  18
Монохромный дисплей C  18
Сенсорный экран  20
Бортовой компьютер  21
Настройка даты и времени  23
2
Доступ
Пульт дистанционного управления  25
Дистанционный ключ-пульт  26
Срочная процедура  29
Двери  31
Багажное отделение  31
Центральный замок  32
Охранная сигнализация  33
Панорамная крыша  35
Электрические стеклоподъемники  37
3
Эргономика и комфорт
Передние сиденья  39
Задние сиденья  41
Регулировка положения рулевого колеса  43
Зеркала заднего вида  44
Вентиляция  45
Система отопления и кондиционирования с
ручными настройками  46
Автоматический кондиционер воздуха  47
Удаление конденсата и инея
с передних стекол  49
Ветровое стекло с подогревом  49
Обдув и обогрев заднего стекла  50
Оборудование передней части салона  50
Обустройство задней части салона  54
Оборудование багажного отделения  55
Плафоны  57
Освещение салона  57
Освещение в багажном отделении  58
4
Освещение и обзор
Выключатель световых приборов  59
Указатели поворотов  60
Автоматическое включение фар  61
Дневные ходовые огни/стояночные огни  61
Автоматическое переключение
дальнего света фар  62
Корректор угла наклона фар  63
Выключатель стеклоочистителя  64
Замена щетки стеклоочистителя  66
Автоматическая работа стеклоочистителя  67
5
Системы безопасности
Рекомендации по безопасной
эксплуатации  68
Фонари аварийной сигнализации  68
Звуковой сигнал  69
Вызов технической или
экстренной помощи  69
Электронная система курсовой
устойчивости (ESC)  71
Grip control  73
Система помощи на спусках
Hill Assist Descent  74
Ремни безопасности  75
Подушки безопасности  78
Детские кресла  81
Отключение подушки безопасности
переднего пассажира  83
Детские кресла с креплениями ISOFIX  86
Детские кресла i-Size  89
блокировка замков с механическим
приводом  90
6
Вождение автомобиля
Рекомендации по вождению  92
Пуск/выключение двигателя ключом  94
Пуск/выключение двигателя с помощью
системы «Дистанционный ключ-пульт»  95
Стояночный тормоз  97
5-ступенчатая механическая
коробка передач  98
6-ступенчатая механическая
коробка передач  98
Автоматическая коробка передач (EAT6)  99
Индикатор выбора передач  101
Система помощи при начале
движения на уклоне  102
Система «стоп-старт»  102
Система обнаружения низкого
давления в шинах  104
Помощь при вождении и
маневрировании — общие рекомендации 106
Индикация на выдвижной панели  107
Изменение параметра пороговой
скорости  108
Распознавание дорожных знаков  109
Ограничитель скорости  112
Круиз-контроль — особые рекомендации  114
Круиз-контроль  115

Страница: 5

3
Оглавление
bit.ly/helpPSA
Доступ к дополнительным
видеороликам
Active Safety Brake с системой Датчик
интервала и интеллектуальной системой
экстренного торможения  117
Отмечена потеря внимания  120
Сигнал о снижении внимания водителя  121
Отслеживание слепых зон  121
Помощь при парковке  123
Видеокамера заднего обзора
«Top Rear Vision»  124
Park Assist  127
7
Практические советы
по эксплуатации и обслуживанию
Допустимые виды топлива  132
Топливо  132
Ограничитель горловины топливного
бака (на дизельных модификациях)  133
Цепи противоскольжения  134
Быстросъемный фаркоп с
шаровой опорой  134
Тягово-сцепное устройство  138
Энергосберегающий режим  138
Дуги для перевозки багажа на крыше  139
Капот  140
Моторный отсек  141
Проверка уровней  142
Проверки  144
AdBlue® (BlueHDi)  146
Рекомендации по уходу за автомобилем  148
8
В случае неисправности
Если топливо в баке закончилось (на
автомобиле с дизельным двигателем)  150
Штатный комплект инструментов  150
Ремонтный комплект для временного
устранения прокола в шине  151
Запасное колесо  154
Замена лампы  157
Замена предохранителя  161
Аккумуляторная батарея 12 В  164
Буксировка  167
9
Технические характеристики
Характеристики двигателей и буксируемых
прицепов  170
Бензиновые двигатели  171
Дизельные двигатели  173
Габаритные размеры  173
Идентификационные данные  174
10
Аудиосистема Bluetooth®
Первое знакомство  176
Блок переключателей на рулевом колесе  177
Меню  178
Радио  178
Радиоприемник DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting)  179
Медиа  180
Телефон  183
Часто задаваемые вопросы  186
11
CITROËN Connect Radio
Первое знакомство  188
Переключатели на рулевом колесе  189
Меню  190
Приложения  191
Радио  192
Радиоприемник DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting)  193
Медиа  194
Телефон  195
Конфигурация  199
Часто задаваемые вопросы  200
12
CITROËN Connect Nav
Первое знакомство  203
Переключатели на рулевом колесе  204
Меню  205
Голосовые команды  206
Навигация  209
Подключенный навигатор  211
Приложения  213
Радио  216
Радиоприемник DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting)  217
Медиа  218
Телефон  219
Конфигурация  222
Часто задаваемые вопросы  225

Алфавитный указатель

Страница: 6

4
Общий обзор
Органы управления и
контрольные приборы
1 Рукоятка для отпирания капота из салона
2 Блок электрических предохранителей в
приборной панели
3 Плафон
Панель контрольных ламп ремней
безопасности и подушки безопасности
переднего пассажира
Управление панорамным потолочным
люком
Салонное зеркало заднего вида
Кнопки вызова срочной и технической
помощи
4 Монохромный экран с аудиосистемой
Сенсорный экран с CITROËN Connect Radio
или CITROËN Connect Nav
5 Вентиляция
Отопление
Кондиционер с ручными настройками
Автоматический кондиционер воздуха
Удаление инея и конденсата с ветрового
стекла
Удаление конденсата/инея с заднего стекла
6 Кнопка START/STOP
Управление коробкой передач
7 Стояночный тормоз
8 Разъем USB
Розетка 12 В
9 Звуковой сигнал
10 Панель приборов
Переключатели на рулевом колесе
1 Выключатели внешних световых приборов/
указатели поворотов
2 Выключатели стеклоочистителя/
стеклоомывателя/бортового компьютера
3 Блок управления аудиосистемой
4 Выключатели круиз-контроля/ограничителя
скорости
Боковая панель переключателей
Инициализация системы обнаружения
низкого давления воздуха в шинах.
Отключение «Стоп-старт»
Включение обогрева ветрового стекла
OFF
Сигнал пересечения линии дорожной
разметки

Страница: 7

5
Общий обзор
«Детская» блокировка замков с
электроприводом
Отключение контроля пространства
салона, внешнего периметра и
положения кузова
Помощь при парковке
Хед-ап дисплей
Ручной корректор угла наклона фар
Центральная панель переключателей
Фонари аварийной световой
сигнализации
Отпирание/запирание замков из салона
Grip control
Включение/выключение Hill Assist
Descent

Страница: 8

6
Эко-вождение
Эко-вождение
Эко-вождение — это повседневная практика
управления автомобилем, способствующая
оптимизации расхода топлива и уменьшению
выбросов CO2
.
Оптимизация работы коробки передач
На автомобилях с механической коробкой передач
начинайте движение плавно и не запаздывайте
с переходом на высшие передачи. При разгоне
переключайтесь на высшую передачу пораньше.
На автомобилях с автоматической коробкой
передач отдавайте предпочтение автоматическому
режиму движения и старайтесь не нажимать на
педаль акселератора сильно или резко.
Индикатор переключения передач будет
подсказывать вам момент, когда нужно перейти на
самую подходящую передачу: как только на панели
приборов появится подсказка, сразу следуйте ей.
На автомобиле с автоматической коробкой
передач индикатор переключения передач
работает только в режиме ручного переключения.
Придерживайтесь плавного стиля вождения
Соблюдайте безопасные интервалы между
автомобилями, старайтесь больше тормозить
двигателем, а не педалью тормоза, плавно
нажимайте на педаль акселератора. Такой
стиль вождения способствует экономии топлива,
сокращению выбросов CO2
и снижению шумового
фона на дороге.
Если дорожное движение не плотное, при наличии
системы круиз-контроля включите ее, как только
превысите 40 км/ч.
Умеренно пользуйтесь бортовым
электрическим оборудованием
Если перед поездкой в салоне слишком жарко,
проветрите его — опустите стекла и откройте
дефлекторы, прежде чем включить кондиционер.
По достижении скорости более 50 км/ч поднимите
стекла и оставьте дефлекторы открытыми.
Пользуйтесь дополнительными средствами
регулирования температуры в салоне (заслонкой
потолочного люка, шторками и т. п.).
Как только будет достигнута желаемая
температура, выключите кондиционер, если это не
климат-контроль.
Отключите обдув и обогрев стекол, если они не
управляются автоматически.
Как можно раньше выключайте подогрев сидений.
Выключайте фары и противотуманные фары, если
видимость на дороге достаточна.
Не следует прогревать двигатель перед
началом движения, особенно зимой; в движении
автомобиль прогревается быстрее.
Если вы пассажир, не перегружайте бортовую
электросеть мультимедийными приборами
(киноприставками, аудиоплеерами, видеоиграми
и т. д.) — так экономится электроэнергия, а значит
и топливо.
Покидая автомобиль, отключайте от бортовой сети
переносные приборы.
Ограничьте причины перерасхода топлива
Равномерно распределяйте груз в автомобиле;
тяжелые предметы укладывайте в багажном
отделении как можно ближе к задним сиденьям.
Ограничивайте загрузку автомобиля и снижайте
его аэродинамическое сопротивление (уберите
с крыши дуги, багажник, велобагажник, отцепите
прицеп и т. п.). Желательно использовать кофр для
перевозки багажа на крыше.
Снимите с крыши багажные дуги и багажник для
перевозки грузов после использования.
По окончании зимнего сезона замените зимние
шины летними.
Соблюдайте рекомендации в части
обслуживания автомобиля
Регулярно проверяйте давление воздуха на
холодных шинах, оно должно соответствовать
указанному на этикетке в дверном проеме со
стороны водителя.
В частности, эту проверку следует выполнять:
– перед длительной поездкой.
– в межсезонье.
– после длительного перерыва между поездками.
Не забывайте проверять давление в запасном
колесе и в колесах прицепа или дома-фургона.
Своевременно проводите техническое
обслуживание автомобиля (замену масла,
масляного и воздушного фильтров, салонного
фильтра и т. д.) и придерживайтесь графика
операций, указанных в плане технического
обслуживания автопроизводителя.

Страница: 9

7
Эко-вождение
Если на автомобиле установлен дизельный
двигатель BlueHDi, то в случае неисправности
системы SCR автомобиль начинает загрязнять
окружающую среду. Как можно быстрее
обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр, чтобы привести
содержание оксидов азота в отработавших газах в
соответствие с требованиями нормативов.
При заправке во избежание перелива из
топливного бака прекратите попытки долить
топливо после третьего отключения заправочного
пистолета.
Уже после первых трех тысяч километров пробега
на новом автомобиле вы начнете замечать, что его
средний расход топлива постепенно становится
стабильным.

Страница: 10

8
Бортовые приборы
ЖК-панель приборов с
текстом
Бортовые приборы
1. Счетчик пробега (км/ч или миль/ч).
2. Индикатор уровня топлива.
3. Экран дисплея.
4. Индикатор температуры охлаждающей
жидкости.
5. Тахометр (x 1 000 об/мин).
Кнопки управления
A. Обнуление индикатора обслуживания.
Напоминание о плановом техническом
обслуживании или оставшийся запас хода на
версиях с системами SCR и AdBlue®
.
В зависимости от модификации: вернуться на
уровень вверх, отменить текущую операцию.
B. Регулятор общего освещения.
В зависимости от модификации: перемещения в
меню, списке; изменение значения.
C. Обнуление счетчика пробега за поездку.
В зависимости от модификации: вход в меню
настроек (длительное нажатие), подтверждение
выбора (краткое нажатие).
Экран дисплея
1. Температура наружного воздуха
2. Настройки системы круиз-контроля или
ограничителя скорости
Скорость, предложенная Распознавание
дорожных знаков
3. Цифровой спидометр (км/ч или миль/ч)
4. Индикатор переключения передач и/или
положение селектора, передача и индикатор
режима «Спорт» и «Снег» на автомобиле с
автоматической коробкой передач
5. Бортовой компьютер и счетчик времени
«Стоп-старт».
6. Дисплей: счетчик пробега за поездку (в км или в
милях), индикатор технического обслуживания
или пробега в соответствии с системами
AdBlue®
и SCR (в км или в милях), счетчик
общего пробега, уведомляющие сообщения или
контроль состояния систем
Если автомобиль не оборудован аудиосистемой
или сенсорным экраном, данный дисплей позволяет
настраивать определенное оборудование.
Дополнительную информацию о настройке
бортовых систем на автомобилях без дисплея
см. в соответствующей рубрике.

Страница: 11

9
Бортовые приборы
1
Матричная панель
приборов
Бортовые приборы
1. Счетчик пробега (км/ч или миль/ч).
2. Индикатор уровня топлива.
3. Экран дисплея.
4. Индикатор температуры охлаждающей
жидкости.
5. Тахометр (x 1 000 об/мин).
Кнопки управления
A. Обнуление индикатора обслуживания
Просмотр журнала уведомлений
Напоминание о плановом техническом
обслуживании или оставшийся запас хода в
соответствии с AdBlue®
или системой SCR (км
или мили)
Отображение показателей давления в шинах
B. Регулятор общего освещения
C. Обнуление счетчика пробега за поездку
Экран дисплея
1. Настройки системы круиз-контроля или
ограничителя скорости
Скорость, предложенная Распознавание
дорожных знаков
2. Индикатор переключения передач и/или
положение селектора, передача и индикатор
режима «Спорт» и «Снег» на автомобиле с
автоматической коробкой передач
3. Область индикации: сообщения о состоянии или
работе бортовых систем, бортового компьютера,
цифрового спидометра (км/ч или мили/ч), запаса
хода по присадке AdBlue®
и системы SCR (км
или мили), т. п.
4. Индикатор пробега до планового технического
обслуживания, затем счетчик общего пробега (в
км или милях)
При включении зажигания эти функции
отображаются последовательно.
5. Счетчик пробега за поездку (в км или в милях)
Контрольные лампы систем
Визуально воспринимаемые сигналы,
отображающиеся в виде символов, информируют
водителя о появлении какой-либо неисправности
(контрольные лампы неисправных состояний) или
о состоянии той или иной системы (контрольные
лампы включения или отключения). Некоторые
лампы могут работать в двух режимах (мигают и
горят постоянно), а также в нескольких цветовых
режимах.
Сопутствующие уведомления
Некоторые лампы могут загораться в
сопровождении звукового сигнала и сообщения на
панели приборов.
Сопоставив режим лампы с поведением
автомобиля, можно судить, исправны его системы
или речь действительно идет о появлении
неисправности. Для получения дальнейшей
информации изучите описание каждой лампы.

Страница: 12

10
Бортовые приборы
При включении зажигания
Некоторые контрольные лампы красного или
оранжевого цвета загораются на несколько секунд
сразу при включении зажигания. Они должны
погаснуть сразу с пуском двигателя.
Дополнительную информацию о функции или
системе см. в соответствующей рубрике.
Контрольная лампа горит
постоянно
Горящая контрольная лампа красного или
оранжевого цвета свидетельствует о неисправности,
требующей анализа.
Если контрольная лампа продолжает гореть
Индексы (1), (2) и (3) в описании контрольных
ламп указывают на необходимость обратиться
к квалифицированным специалистам помимо
принятия срочных рекомендованных мер.
(1): необходимо остановить автомобиль.
При первой же возможности остановитесь и
выключите зажигание.
(2): обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.
(3): посетите сервисную сеть CITROËN или
специализированный техцентр.
Перечень контрольных ламп
Красные сигнализаторы
STOP
Горит постоянно, одновременно с другим
сигнализатором неисправности в
сопровождении текстового сообщения и звукового
сигнала.
Обнаружена серьезная неисправность двигателя,
тормозной системы, рулевого управления с
усилителем или с существенным сбоем в работе
бортовой электрической сети.
Выполните пункт (1), затем пункт (2).
Стояночный тормоз
Горит постоянно.
Стояночный тормоз затянут или
недостаточно отпущен.
Торможение
Горит постоянно.
Значительное падение уровня тормозной
жидкости в системе.
Выполните пункт (1), затем долейте жидкость,
соответствующую рекомендациям производителя.
Если проблема остается, выполните пункт (2).
Горит постоянно.
Электронный регулятор тормозных
сил (EBFD) неисправен.
Выполните пункт (1), затем пункт (2).
Дверь не закрыта
Горит постоянно с сообщением,
указывающим на открытую дверь.
Дверь или крышка багажника не закрыта (скорость
меньше 10 км/ч).
Горит постоянно с сообщением,
указывающим на открытую дверь, и
звуковым сигналом.
Дверь или крышка багажника не закрыта (скорость
больше 10 км/ч).
Напристегнутые/отстегнутые ремни
безопасности
Горит постоянно или мигает, подается
усиливающийся звуковой сигнал.
Ремень безопасности не был пристегнут или был
отстегнут.
Зарядка батареи 12 В
Горит постоянно.
Неисправен контур подзарядки батареи
(загрязнены клеммы, ремень генератора ослаблен
или оборван и т. д.).
Очистите и повторно затяните клеммы. Если
контрольная лампа не погасла при пуске двигателя,
выполните (2).
Давление масла в двигателе
Горит постоянно.
Система смазки двигателя неисправна.
Выполните пункт (1), затем пункт (2).
Слишком высокая температура
охлаждающей жидкости
Горит постоянно.
Температура в системе охлаждения
двигателя слишком высокая.
Выполните пункт (1), дождитесь охлаждения
двигателя, чтобы пополнить, при необходимости,
запас охлаждающей жидкости. Если проблема
остается, выполните пункт (2).
Система самодиагностики двигателя
Горит постоянно.
Обнаружена существенная
неполадка в двигателе.
Выполните пункт (1), затем пункт (2).

Страница: 13

11
Бортовые приборы
1
Оранжевые контрольные лампы
Система самодиагностики двигателя
Горит постоянно.
Обнаружена незначительная
неполадка в двигателе.
Выполните пункт (3).
Мигает.
Система управления двигателем
неисправна.
Существует риск разрушения каталитического
нейтрализатора отработавших газов.
Необходимо выполнить (2).
Горит постоянно.
Система снижения токсичности
отработавших газов неисправна.
Контрольная лампа должна погаснуть при пуске
двигателя.
Срочно выполните пункт (3).
Датчик интервала/Active Safety Brake
Мигает.
Краткими притормаживаниями система
снижает скорость фронтального столкновения с
впереди идущим автомобилем.
Горит постоянно, сопровождается
сообщением и звуковым сигналом.
Система неисправна.
Выполните пункт (3).
Горит постоянно в сопровождении
сообщения.
Система отключена через меню настроек бортовых
систем.
Антиблокировочная тормозная система ABS
Горит постоянно.
Антиблокировочная тормозная система
неисправна.
Тормозная система продолжает работать в штатном
режиме.
Ведите автомобиль осторожно на умеренной
скорости, затем выполните пункт (3).
Недостаточное давление воздуха в шине
Горит постоянно в сопровождении звукового
сигнала и сообщения.
Давление воздуха недостаточно в одном или
нескольких колесах.
Срочно проверьте давление воздуха в шинах.
Повторно запустите систему обнаружения после
установки давления.
Контрольная лампа недостаточного
давления воздуха в шине мигает, а
затем горит постоянно, а также постоянно горит
контрольная лампа обслуживания
Неисправна система контроля давления в шинах.
Падение давления воздуха в шинах больше не
контролируется.
При первой же возможности проверьте давление в
шинах и выполните пункт (3).
Система динамической стабилизации DSC/
противобуксовочная система ASR
Горит постоянно.
Система отключена.
Система DSC/ASR вновь активируется при пуске
двигателя и при достижении скорости 50 км/ч.
При скорости ниже 50 км/ч систему можно включить
вручную.
Мигает.
Система DSC/ASR активируется в случае
потери сцепления или траектории.
Горит постоянно.
Неисправна система DSC/ASR.
Выполните пункт (3).
Подушки безопасности
Горит постоянно.
Неисправна одна из подушек безопасности
или пиротехнических преднатяжителей ремней
безопасности.
Выполните пункт (3).
Подушка безопасности переднего пассажира
(OFF — отключена)
Горит постоянно.
Фронтальная подушка безопасности
переднего пассажира выключена.
Переключатель находится в положении «OFF».
Детское сиденье в положении «спинкой вперед»
можно установить при отсутствии неисправности
с подушками безопасности (контрольная лампа
подушек безопасности горит).
Сажевый фильтр(Дизельное топливо)
Горит постоянно в сопровождении звукового
сигнала и сообщения об опасности
закупорки сажевого фильтра.
Сажевый фильтр начинает заполняться.
Как только условия на дороге позволят, выполните
регенерацию (прочистку) фильтра, разогнавшись

Страница: 14

12
Бортовые приборы
до скорости выше 60 км/ч и поддерживая ее до тех
пор, пока контрольная лампа не погаснет.
Горит постоянно в сопровождении звукового
сигнала и сообщения о низком уровне
присадки сажевого фильтра.
Достигнут минимальный уровень жидкости в баке
для присадки.
Как можно скорее долейти жидкость а бак:
выполните пункт (3)
Мало топлива в баке
Горит постоянно в сопровождении звукового
сигнала и сообщения.
С момента первого загорания в баке остается около
5 литров топлива (резерв).
Срочно заправьтесь, чтобы не остановиться с
пустым баком.
Никогда не допускайте полной выработки
топлива в баке. Это может вывести из строя
систему снижения токсичности отработавших газов
и систему впрыска топлива.
Вода в фильтре для дизельного топлива (в
зависимости от модификации)
Горит постоянно.
В дизельном фильтре присутствует вода.
Выполните (2) без задержки — риск повреждения
системы впрыска топлива!
Сигнал о пересечении дорожной разметки
Мигает, сопровождается звуковым сигналом.
Замечено пересечение линии слева или
справа.
Поверните рулевое колесо в противоположную
сторону, чтобы вернуться на правильную
траекторию.
Горит постоянно в сопровождении
сообщения.
Система неисправна.
Будьте внимательны, езжайте осторожно, а затем
выполните пункт (3).
Горит постоянно.
Система отключена.
Об отклонениях автомобиля от направления
движения система сообщать не будет.
AdBlue®
(BlueHDi)
Загорается примерно на 30 секунд при
включении зажигания в сопровождении
сообщения о запасе хода.
Запас хода от 800 до 2400 км.
Долейте AdBlue®
.
Горит постоянно с момента включения
зажигания в сопровождении звукового
сигнала и сообщения о запасе хода.
Запас хода от 100 до 800 км.
Быстро пополните запас AdBlue®
или выполните
пункт (3).
Мигает в сопровождении звукового сигнала и
сообщения о запасе хода.
Запас хода составляет менее 100 км.
Обязательно долейте AdBlue®
, чтобы не
допустить блокировки пуска двигателя, или
выполните пункт (3).
Мигает в сопровождении звукового сигнала и
сообщения о запрете пуска.
Бак AdBlue®
пуст: иммобилайзер двигателя
блокирует пуск двигателя.
Для повторного пуска двигателя долейте AdBlue®
или выполните пункт (2).
Обязательно добавьте как минимум 5
литров AdBlue®
в бак.
Система снижения токсичности
отработавших газов SCR(BlueHDi)
Горит постоянно с момента
включения зажигания в
сопровождении звукового сигнала и сообщения.
Обнаружен сбой в работе системы снижения
токсичности отработавших газов SCR.
С приведением выбросов в отработавших газах в
надлежащую норму это уведомление исчезает.
Контрольная лампа AdBlue®
мигает при включении
зажигания, а также горят постоянно контрольные
лампы обслуживания и самодиагностики двигателя
в сопровождении звукового сигнала и сообщения о
запасе хода.
В зависимости от отображаемого сообщения можно
продолжать движение еще до 1100 км, прежде чем
включится иммобилайзер двигателя.
Незамедлительно выполните пункт (3) чтобы не
допустить блокировки пуска двигателя.
Контрольная лампа AdBlue®
мигает при включении
зажигания, а также горят постоянно контрольные
лампы обслуживания и самодиагностики двигателя
в сопровождении звукового сигнала и сообщения о

Страница: 15

13
Бортовые приборы
1
запрете пуска.
Иммобилайзер двигателя блокирует пуск двигателя
(после превышения допустимого запаса хода после
подтверждения сбоев в работе системы снижения
токсичности).
Для запуска двигателя выполните (2).
Сервис
Загорается на короткое время в
сопровождении сообщения.
Обнаружена одна или несколько несущественных
неисправностей в системах, не имеющих
собственной контрольной лампы.
Определите причину неисправности по сообщению
на панели приборов.
Некоторые неисправности можно устранить
самостоятельно, например, заменить батарею
пульта дистанционного управления.
В остальных случаях, например при неисправности
системы контроля низкого давления в шинах,
выполните пункт (3).
Горит постоянно в сопровождении
сообщения.
Обнаружена одна или несколько несущественных
неисправностей в системах, не имеющих
собственной контрольной лампы.
Определите причину неисправности по сообщению
на панели приборов, а затем выполните пункт (3).
Горит контрольная лампа
обслуживания; мигает, а затем горит
пиктограмма технического обслуживания.
Техническое обслуживание пропущено.
При первой же возможности пройдите техническое
обслуживание.
Только на версиях с двигателями Diesel BlueHDi.
Предподогрев дизельного двигателя
Загорается на короткое время
(горит около 30 секунд в суровых зимних
условиях).
При включении зажигания, если требуется
в соответствии с погодными условиями и
температурой двигателя.
Прежде чем запускать двигатель, дождитесь
выключения этой контрольной лампы.
Двигатель запустится сразу, как только погаснет
лампа, при условии нажатия на:
– педаль сцепления на автомобиле с механической
коробкой передач,
– педаль тормоза на автомобиле с автоматической
коробкой передач.
Если двигатель не запускается, повторите попытку
запуска, удерживая ногу на педали тормоза.
Задний противотуманный фонарь
Горит постоянно.
Лампа горит.
Зеленые сигнализаторы
«Отслеживание «»слепой зоны»»»
Горит постоянно.
Функция активирована.
Hill Assist Descent
Горит постоянно.
Система активирована, но условия для
регулирования отсутствуют (уклон, слишком
высокая скорость, включенная передача).
Индикатор мигает.
Функция начинает управление.
Автомобиль притормаживается; при движении вниз
по склону включаются стоп-сигналы.
«Стоп-старт»
Горит постоянно.
При остановке автомобиля система «Стоп-
старт» переводит двигатель в режим STOP.
Мигает в течение некоторого времени.
Режим STOP в настоящий момент
недоступен, или автоматически включается режим
START.
Указатели поворотов
Мигает в сопровождении звукового сигнала.
Включены указатели поворотов.
Стояночные огни
Горит постоянно.
Огни включены.
Противотуманные фары
Горит постоянно.
Противотуманные фары включены.
Автоматический режим работы
стеклоочистителя
Горит постоянно.
Активирован автоматический режим работы
очистителя ветрового стекла.
Автоматическое переключение дальнего
света фар
Горит постоянно.
Функция включена с помощью
сенсорного экрана (меню Driving /Автомобиль).

Страница: 16

14
Бортовые приборы
Выключатель световых приборов переведен в
режим «AUTO».
Фары ближнего света
Горит постоянно.
Лампы горят.
Синие сигнализаторы
Фары дальнего света
Горит постоянно.
Фары включены.
Черные/белые контрольные лампы
Нога на педали тормоза
Горит постоянно.
Нулевое или недостаточное усилие нажатия
на педаль тормоза.
На автомобиле с автоматической коробкой передач
нажмите на педаль тормоза при работающем
двигателе, перед тем как отпустить стояночный
тормоз и выйти из режима P.
Автоматический режим работы
стеклоочистителя
Горит постоянно.
Активирован автоматический режим работы
очистителя ветрового стекла.
Индикаторы
Указатель температуры
охлаждающей жидкости
Если при работающем двигателе:
– в зоне A, значит температура в норме,
– стрелка в зоне B, означает, что температура
охлаждающей жидкости слишком высока; при
этом загорается центральная предупреждающая
лампа неисправности STOP на панели приборов,
отображается предупреждающее сообщение и
подается звуковой сигнал.
Необходимо срочно остановиться, соблюдая
меры безопасности.
Подождите несколько минут, прежде чем заглушить
двигатель.
Выключите зажигание, осторожно откройте
капот и проверьте уровень охлаждающей
жидкости.
Дополнительную информацию о проверке
уровней см. в соответствующем разделе.
Индикатор технического
обслуживания
Информация об обслуживании представлена в
виде расстояния (километры или мили) и времени
(месяцы или дни).
Уведомление отображается в зависимости от
того, какой из этих двух терминов будет достигнут
первым.
Информация об обслуживании отображается
на панели приборов. В зависимости от версии
автомобиля:
– на дисплее счетчика общего пробега указано
расстояние, оставшееся до даты следующего
планового обслуживания, или расстояние,
пройденное после даты предыдущего
обслуживания. Перед параметром стоит символ «-»;
– в уведомлении указывается расстояние, а также
срок до очередного технического обслуживания.
Отображаемое значение рассчитывается на
основании пройденного расстояния и
времени с момента последнего технического
обслуживания.
При необходимости скорого обслуживания
может быть отображено уведомление.

Страница: 17

15
Бортовые приборы
1
Пиктограмма технического обслуживания
Горит в течение некоторого времени с
момента включения зажигания.
До следующего технического обслуживания
осталось от 1000 км до 3000 км.
Горит непрерывно при включенном
зажигании.
Следующее техническое обслуживание необходимо
провести менее чем через 1000 км пробега.
Скоро потребуется провести техническое
обслуживание автомобиля.
Мигает пиктограмма технического
обслуживания
Мигает, затем горит постоянно при
включенном зажигании.
(Для дизельных двигателей BlueHDi, горит
одновременно с контрольной лампой
обслуживания).
Техническое обслуживание пропущено.
Необходимо срочно провести техническое
обслуживание.
Обнуление индикатора обслуживания
После прохождения очередного технического
обслуживания индикатор следует вновь установить
на ноль.
► Выключите зажигание.
CHECK
► Нажмите и удерживайте нажатой эту кнопку.
► Включите зажигание; счетчик пробега начнет
обратный отсчет.
► Когда на дисплее отобразится =0, отпустите
кнопку; символ гаечного ключа при этом погаснет.
Если после этой операции вам потребуется
отключить аккумуляторную батарею,
заприте автомобиль и выждите не менее
5 минут, чтобы зафиксировать обнуление.
Получение информации о
необходимости обслуживания
Доступ к информации о необходимости
обслуживания возможен в любое время.
► Нажмите на эту кнопку.
Информация о необходимости обслуживания будет
отображаться несколько секунд, а затем исчезнет.
Индикатор уровня масла в
двигателе
(в зависимости от варианта исполнения)
На автомобилях с электрическим датчиком уровень
масла в двигателе показывается на несколько
секунд на панели приборов сразу после включения
зажигания и информации о ТО.
Показания индикатора уровня масла будут
верны, только если автомобиль установлен
на горизонтальной площадке и после остановки
двигателя прошло более 30 минут.
Надлежащий уровень масла
Об этом свидетельствует сообщение «Надлежащий
уровень масла».
Недостаточный уровень масла
Если недостаточный уровень подтверждается
проверкой с использованием щупа, обязательно
доведите его до нормы во избежание повреждения
двигателя.
Дополнительную информацию о Проверке
уровней см. в соответствующем разделе.
Датчик уровня масла неисправен
О неисправности указателя уровня масла
свидетельствует сообщение на панели приборов
«Неверные результаты измерения уровня
масла».
Обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.

Страница: 18

16
Бортовые приборы
В случае неисправности электрического
указателя уровень масла в двигателе
больше не контролируется.
До тех пор, пока система будет оставаться
неисправной, уровень масла придется
контролировать при помощи щупа,
расположенного в моторном отсеке.
Дополнительную информацию о проверке
уровней см. в соответствующем разделе.
Индикаторы запаса хода по
AdBlue®
(BlueHDi)
Двигатели Diesel BlueHDi оснащены системой,
сочетающей селективный каталитический
нейтрализатор SCR и сажевый фильтр DPF для
очистки отработавших газов. Для работы этих
компонентов требуется присадка AdBlue®
.
Когда уровень присадки AdBlue®
упадет ниже
резервного минимума (2 400–0 км), при каждом
включении зажигания на панели приборов будет
отображаться расчетный запас хода автомобиля,
остающийся до срабатывания системы
автоматической блокировки пуска двигателя.
Система блокировки пуска двигателя
включится автоматически, как только бак
для AdBlue®
окажется пуст. После этого пуск
двигателя будет невозможен, пока присадка
AdBlue®
не будет долита до минимального
уровня.
Отображение запаса хода вручную
Когда запас хода больше 2400 км, он автоматически
не отображается.
CHECK
► Нажмите кнопку для временного отображения
запаса хода.
Для просмотра сведений о запасе хода
нажмите кнопку Диагностика после выбора
вкладки Быстрый доступ в меню Driving/
Автомобиль.
Необходимые действия при отсутствии
AdBlue®
Следующие контрольные лампы загораются,
когда количество AdBlue®
ниже резервного уровня,
который соответствует запасу хода в 2400 км.
Помимо контрольных ламп, также сообщения
регулярно напоминают о необходимости
пополнения жидкости, чтобы не допустить
блокировки пуска двигателя. Для получения
сведений об отображаемых сообщениях см. раздел
Световые индикаторы и сигнализаторы.
Дополнительную информацию об AdBlue®
(двигатели BlueHDi) и, в частности, о
дозаправке см. в соответствующем разделе.
Горят
контрольные
лампы
Действие Остаток
пробега
Требуется
долив
жидкости.
От 2 400 до
800 км
Требуется
срочный долив
жидкости.
От 800 до
100 км
Необходимо
долить
жидкость,
поскольку
двигатель
может не
завестись.
От 100 км до
0 км
Для повторного
пуска
двигателя
необходимо
залить в бак не
менее 5 литров
AdBlue®
.
0 км.

Страница: 19

17
Бортовые приборы
1
Неисправна система очистки
отработавших газов SCR
Появление сбоев в работе системы
При обнаружении неисправности
загораются эти контрольные
лампы в сопровождении
звукового сигнала и сообщения
«Неисправна система очистки
отработавших газов».
При первом обнаружении неисправности
предупреждающий сигнал сработает во время
движения автомобиля, а затем — каждый раз
при включении зажигания и будет срабатывать
до тех пор, пока причина неисправности не будет
устранена.
Если это кратковременный сбой, в
следующий раз после самодиагностики
системы очистки отработавших газов SCR
сигнал не сработает.
Сбой появился на протяжении допустимого
пробега (от 1 100 до 0 км)
Если после пробега 50 км индикатор неисправности
не погаснет, значит, система SCR неисправна.
Контрольная лампа AdBlue мигает, а также
отображается сообщение «Неисправна система
очистки отработавших газов: Пуск запрещен через
X мили» или «NO START IN X мили», указывающее
запас хода в километрах или милях.
Во время движения сообщение будет появляться
каждые 30 секунд. Уведомляющие сигналы будут
срабатывать в момент включения зажигания.
Можно продолжать движение еще до 1100 км,
прежде чем включится система иммобилайзера
двигателя.
При первой же возможности проверьте
систему в сервисной сети CITROËN или в
специализированном техцентре.
Пуск запрещен
При каждом включении зажигания отображается
сообщение «Неисправна система очистки
отработавших газов: Пуск запрещен» или «NO
START IN».
Теперь двигатель можно запустить, только
обратившись к дилеру CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.
Счетчики пробега
Информация об общем пробеге и пробеге за
поездку отображается в течение 30 секунд при
выключении зажигания, открывании двери водителя
и запирании/отпирании автомобиля.
В заграничной поездке может возникнуть
необходимость изменить единицу
измерения расстояния: скорость движения
должна измеряться в единицах, официально
принятых в стране (в км/ч или миль/ч).
Замена единиц осуществляется на неподвижном
автомобиле при помощи меню настроек систем
на дисплее.
Счетчик общего пробега
Этот счетчик измеряет расстояние, пройденное
автомобилем с момента начала его эксплуатации.
Счетчик пробега за поездку

Страница: 20

18
Бортовые приборы
Этот счетчик служит для измерения расстояния,
пройденного с момента его установки водителем
на ноль.
Обнуление счетчика
► При включенном зажигании нажать кнопку, пока
не появятся нули.
Настройки систем на
автомобилях без экрана
Если в вашем автомобиле нет аудиосистемы или
сенсорного экрана, часть оборудования можно
настраивать с помощью текстового ЖК-экрана на
приборной панели.
Кнопки управления
После длительного нажатия этой кнопки
отображается меню конфигурации,
подтверждение коротким нажатием.
Нажатием одной из этих кнопок
можно переходить по меню, списку,
менять значение.
Нажатием этой кнопки можно вернуться на
уровень назад или отменить текущую
операцию.
Меню экрана дисплея
– ОСВЕЩЕНИЕ :
• СОПРОВОЖД СВЕТ (Сопровождающее
освещение),
• АДАПТИВН ФАРЫ (Адаптивные фары для
виражей).
– ПОМОЩЬ ВОД-ЛЮ :
• РИСК АВАРИИ (Экстренное автоматическое
торможение),
• СИГН. ВНИМАНИЕ (Датчик потери внимания),
• РЕКОМЕН СК-СТЬ (Система распознавания
ограничения скорости),
– КОМФОРТ :
• СТЕКЛООЧ З Х (Включение очистителя заднего
стекла при движении задним ходом).
Дополнительную информацию об одной из этих
функций , см. в соответствующем разделе.
Монохромный дисплей C
Индикация на дисплее
На дисплей выводится следующая информация:
– время,
– дата,
– температура наружного воздуха (цифры мигают,
если существует риск гололеда),
– графическая система помощи при парковке,
– включенный источник аудиосигнала,
– информация с телефона или беспроводной
гарнитуры,
– предупреждающие сообщения,
– меню настроек дисплея и систем автомобиля.

Страница: 21

19
Бортовые приборы
1
Контрольно-измерительные
приборы
Используйте следующие кнопки панели управления
аудиосистемы:
MENU Доступ к главному меню
5 или 6 Прокрутка пунктов на экране
7 или 8 Изменить установленное значение
OK Подтвердить
Back Завершить текущее действие
Главное меню
► Нажмите на кнопку MENU, чтобы открыть
главное меню:
• «Мультимедийные средства»,
• «Телефон»,
• «Trip computer»,
• «Подключения»,
• «Персональные настройки — Конфигурация».
► Нажмите на кнопки «7» или «8», чтобы
выбрать нужное вам меню, а затем на OK, чтобы
подтвердить свой выбор.
Меню Мультимедийные
средства
При включенной аудиосистеме данное меню
позволяет включить или отключить функции радио
(RDS, Автоматический поиск DAB / FM, Радиотекст
(TXT)) или установить режим медиаплеера (Норма,
Случайный порядок, Случ для всех, Повтор).
Для получения дополнительной информации о
приложении Мультимедийные средства см. раздел
Аудиосистема и телематика.
Меню Телефон
При включенной аудиосистеме данное меню
позволяет принять звонок и просмотреть
телефонные справочники.
Для получения дополнительной информации о
приложении Телефон см. раздел Аудиосистема и
телематика.
Меню «Бортовой компьютер»
Выбрав это меню, можно просмотреть сообщения о
состоянии бортовых систем.
Журнал предупредительных сообщений
Хранит все уведомления о работе бортовых систем
с их просмотром на экране.
Меню Подключения
При включенной автомагнитоле данное меню
позволяет подключить или отключить внешнее
устройство через Bluetooth (телефон, медиаплеер) и
выбрать тип подключения (беспроводную гарнитуру,
проигрыватель аудиофайлов).
Для получения дополнительной информации о
приложении Подключения см. раздел Аудиосистема
и телематика.
Меню Персональные
настройки — Конфигурация
Этот пункт меню предоставляет доступ к
следующим функциям:
– Определить параметры автомобиля.
– Конфигурация дисплея.
Определить параметры автомобиля
Данное меню позволяют запустить/остановить
работу следующего оборудования (в зависимости
от модификации и страны реализации автомобиля):
«Освещение»
– «Управляемые фары»,
– «Освещение сопровождения»,

Страница: 22

20
Бортовые приборы
– «Освещение для встречи».
«Комфорт»
– «Задн стеклооч при вкл ЗХ».
«Помощь при вождении»
– Экстр. торм. в авторежиме,
– Датчик потери внимания,
– Рекоменд. скорость.
Дополнительную информацию о другом
оборудовании читайте в соответствующих разделах.
Настройка дисплея
В этом меню можно выбрать язык сообщений на
дисплее из представленного списка.
Выбрав это меню, можно настроить следующие
функции и параметры:
– Выбор единиц измерения.
– Установка даты и времени.
– Персональные настройки дисплея.
– Выбор языка.
По соображениям безопасности, настройки,
требующие особого внимания, следует
осуществлять только на неподвижном
автомобиле.
Сенсорный экран
Сенсорный экран предназначен для доступа:
– к органам управления системой отопления/
кондиционирования воздуха,
– для доступа к меню настроек бортовых систем и
оборудования автомобиля,
– для доступа к органам управления аудиосистемой
и телефоном и просмотра относящейся к ним
информации,
и, в зависимости от комплектации, он обеспечивает:
– отображение предупреждающих сообщений и
визуальной помощи при парковке,
– для постоянной индикации времени и
температуры окружающего воздуха (о возможном
гололеде предупреждает лампа синего цвета),
– доступ к сервисам Интернета, органам
управления навигатором и отображению
соответствующей информации.
По соображениям безопасности,
требующие особого внимания настройки
следует осуществлять только на
неподвижном автомобиле.
На движущемся автомобиле некоторые функции
находятся в недоступном режиме.
Рекомендации
Это экран емкостного типа.
Им можно пользоваться при любых температурах.
Не прикасайтесь острыми предметами к
сенсорному дисплею.
Не касайтесь сенсорного дисплея мокрыми руками.
Используйте чистую мягкую ткань для очистки
дисплея.
Принципы
Для открытия меню используйте кнопки,
расположенные по бокам сенсорного экрана, а
затем используйте кнопки, расположенные на
сенсорном экране.
Некоторые функции могут отображаться на 1 или 2
страницах.
Для облегчения последующего снятия рулевой
колонки с блокировки, перед выключением
двигателя рекомендуется поставить колеса прямо.
Для внесения изменений в настройки (длительность
освещения и т.п.) или получения дополнительной
информации, нажмите на пиктограмму системы.
Если на второй странице не выполняются
какие-либо действия, система
автоматически переключится на первую
страницу.
Эта кнопка предназначена для
подтверждения.
Используйте эту кнопку для возвращения на
предыдущую страницу.
Меню
Radio Media.
См. раздел «Аудиосистема и телематика».

Страница: 23

21
Бортовые приборы
1
Mirror Screen или подключенный
навигатор (в зависимости от комплектации).
См. раздел «Аудиосистема и телематика».
Кондиционер воздуха.
Служит для настройки различных
параметров температуры, подачи воздуха и т. д.
Дополнительную информацию о системе
отопления, системе кондиционирования
воздуха с ручным управлением и системе
кондиционирования воздуха с автоматическим
управлением смотрите в соответствующих
разделах.
Телефон.
См. раздел «Аудиосистема и телематика».
Connect-App.
Служит для отображения доступных
подключенных сервисов.
См. раздел «Аудиосистема и телематика».
Автомобиль или вождение (в зависимости
от комплектации).
Служит для активирования, отключения и настройки
некоторых функций.
Функции, доступные в данном меню, разделены на
две вкладки : Vehicle settings и Driving function.
Регулировка громкости/выключение звука.
См. раздел «Аудиосистема и телематика».
Для отображения карусельного меню
нажмите на сенсорный экран тремя
пальцами.
Верхняя панель дисплея
Часть информации отображается постоянно на
верхней панели сенсорного дисплея:
– Повторное отображение информации по
системе кондиционирования воздуха и доступ
к упрощенному меню (только для настройки
температуры и интенсивности потока воздуха).
– Повторное отображение информации меню
РадиоМедиаустройства и Телефони указания
навигатора (в зависимости от комплектации).
– Зона уведомления (SMS и сообщения на эл.
почту) (в зависимости от комплектации).
– Доступ к Настройки
Бортовой компьютер
Отображение информации о текущем пути
(расстояние, потреблением топлива, средняя
скорость и т. д.).
Информационный дисплей
Сведения отображаются последовательно.
– Вкладка с текущей информацией:
• пройденный путь автомобиля;
• запас хода;
• текущий расход топлива;
• счетчик времени «Стоп-старт»;
• информация системы распознавания
ограничения скорости (в зависимости от
модификации).
– Параметры пути 1 с информацией:
• средняя скорость;
• средний расход топлива;
• расстояние пройденное за первую поездку.
При наличии на автомобиле, можно получать
информацию и о 2ом
пути.
– Параметры пути 2 с информацией:
• средняя скорость.
• средний расход топлива.
• пройденное расстояние. для второго счетчика
пробега.
Счетчики пробега 1 и 2 не зависят один от другого и
идентичны по назначению.
Например, участок пути 1 можно использовать
для ежедневных расчетов, а участок пути 2 — для
ежемесячных.
► Нажмите торцевую кнопку выключателя
стеклоочистителя.

Страница: 24

22
Бортовые приборы
► Или при наличии в комплектации пользуйтесь
переключателем на рулевом колесе.
Обнуление счетчика пробега
На цифровой панели приборов с
текстом или матричной
► Выберите нужный счетчик пробега и нажмите
более двух секунд на кнопку, расположенную на
торце выключателя стеклоочистителя.
► Или, при наличии в комплектации, нажмите
более двух секунд на переключатель на рулевом
колесе.
С цифровой LCD-панелью приборов с
текстом
► Открыв на дисплее необходимый путь, нажмите
более двух секунд на кнопку обнуления панели
приборов.
Определение некоторых
понятий
Запас хода
(в км или в милях)
Это пробег в километрах, который еще
можно совершить с топливом, оставшимся в
баке (он зависит от среднего расхода,
подсчитанного системой за последние несколько
километров).
Данная величина может изменяться в
зависимости от стиля вождения или
дорожного рельефа, которые способны оказать
существенное влияние на текущий расход
топлива.
Как только запас хода окажется менее 30 км,
дисплей начнет показывать прочерки.
После заправки не менее 5 литров топлива система
вновь пересчитывает запас хода и выводит его на
дисплей, если он составляет более 100 км.
Если во время вождения вместо значений
отображаются прочерки, обратитесь в
сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.
Текущий расход топлива
(в л/100 км, или км/л, или миль/галлон)
Определяется по нескольким последним
секундам пробега.

Страница: 25

23
Бортовые приборы
1
Данный параметр показывается только при
движении со скоростью выше 30 км/ч.
Средний расход топлива
(в л/100 км, или км/л, или миль/галлон)
Определяется с момента последнего
обнуления бортового компьютера.
Средняя скорость
(в км/ч или в милях/ч)
Определяется с момента последнего
обнуления бортового компьютера.
Пройденный путь
(в км или в милях)
Определяется с момента последнего
обнуления бортового компьютера.
Счетчик времени системы «стоп-старт».
(минуты/секунды или часы/минуты)
Счетчик времени суммирует продолжительность
всех остановок в режиме STOP на всем протяжении
пути.
При каждом включении питания счетчик
автоматически обнуляется.
Регулятор яркости
подсветки
Позволяет выполнять ручную регулировку
яркости панели приборов и сенсорного экрана в
зависимости от внешнего освещения.
Работает только при включенных световых
приборах (за исключением дневных ходовых
приборов) и в ночном режиме.
Регулятор с двумя кнопками
Включив световые приборы, нажимайте на кнопку A
для увеличения яркости подсветки панели приборов
и салона, или на кнопку B для ее уменьшения.
По достижении желаемой яркости отпустите кнопку.
Сенсорный экран
► В меню Настройки выберите «Яркость».
► Настройте яркость подсветки, нажимая на
стрелки или при помощи курсора.
Яркость можно настраивать отдельно для
режима дня и ночи.
Настройка даты и времени
На версиях без аудиосистемы
Установите дату и время на дисплее панели
приборов.
► Нажмите и удерживайте нажатой эту
кнопку.
► Нажмите одну из этих кнопок, чтобы
выбрать и изменить настройку.
► Кратко нажмите эту кнопку, чтобы
подтвердить.
► Нажмите одну из этих кнопок, чтобы
изменить настройку, и еще раз подтвердите
значение.

Страница: 26

24
Бортовые приборы
На версиях с аудиосистемой
► Нажмите на клавишу MENU и откройте главное
меню.
► Нажмите на кнопки «7» или «8» чтобы выбрать
меню «Personalisation-configuration», затем на кнопку
OK.
► Нажмите на кнопки «5» или «6» чтобы выбрать
меню «Конфигурация дисплея», затем на кнопку OK.
► Нажмите на кнопки «5» или «6» чтобы выбрать
строку «Установка даты и времени», затем на кнопку
OK.
► Нажмите кнопку «7» или «8» для выбора
изменяемого параметра. Подтвердите нажатием на
клавишу OK.
► Настройте поочередно параметры и подтвердите
нажатием на OK.
► Нажмите на кнопки «5» или «6», затем на кнопку
OK чтобы выбрать ячейку OK и подтвердить, либо
на Back (Возврат), чтобы отменить.

Страница: 27

25
Доступ
2
Пульт дистанционного
управления
Общие сведения
Ключом можно отпирать и запирать центральный
замок, вставив его в замочную скважину.
С его помощью можно запускать и останавливать
двигатель.
В зависимости от комплектации пульт ДУ можно
использовать для управления следующими
функциями:
– запирание / отпирание / блокировка замков
автомобиля,
– запирание/отпирание багажника,
– запирание/отпирание люка горловины топливного
бака
– дистанционное включение систем освещения,
– складывание/разворачивание дверных зеркал
– включение/отключение охранной сигнализации,
– определение местонахождения автомобиля,
– включение иммобилайзера.
В нормальных условиях эксплуатации
рекомендуется пользоваться пультом ДУ.
В зависимости от комплектации ключ, встроенный
в пульт ДУ, можно использовать для управления
следующими функциями:
– запирание / отпирание / блокировка замков
автомобиля,
– включение/отключение «детской» блокировки
замков,
– включение/отключение передней подушки
безопасности пассажира,
– альтернативное запирание дверей,
– включение зажигания/выключение двигателя.
Аварийные процедуры служат для запирания или
отпирания автомобиля в случае выхода из строя
пульта дистанционного управления, центрального
замка или аккумуляторной батареи и т. д.
Для получения дополнительной информации
об аварийном отпирании замков обратитесь к
соответствующему разделу.
Извлечение ключа
Модели без дистанционного ключа-пульта
► Нажмите на эту кнопку; ключ извлекается из
корпуса.
Чтобы сложить его, сначала нажмите на эту кнопку
во избежание повреждения механизма.
Модели с дистанционным ключом-пультом
► Оттяните эту кнопку, чтобы извлечь ключ из
корпуса.
Чтобы вставить его в корпус, сначала оттяните эту
кнопку.

Страница: 28

26
Доступ
Отпирание автомобиля
► Еще раз нажмите на эту кнопку, чтобы
отпереть автомобиль.
При нажатии на кнопку отпирания мигание фонарей
указателей поворотов в течение нескольких секунд
означает:
– отпирание автомобиля в версии без охранной
сигнализации,
– отключение охранной сигнализации на остальных
версиях.
Запирание автомобиля
Простое запирание
► Нажмите на эту кнопку.
При первом нажатии на кнопку запирания
горение фонарей указателей поворотов в течение
нескольких секунд означает:
– запирание автомобиля на все замки на версиях
без охранной сигнализации,
– активирование охранной сигнализации на
остальных версиях.
Если одна из дверей или крышка багажника
не закрыты полностью, запирание не
осуществляется. Тем не менее, если автомобиль
оснащен охранной сигнализацией, все функции
данной системы будут активированы
приблизительно через 45 секунд.
Если автомобиль отпирается непреднамеренно
и в отсутствие какого-либо управляющего
действия на двери или крышке багажника,
автомобиль автоматически запирается
приблизительно через 30 секунд. Если
система охранной сигнализации была до
этого активирована, она также автоматически
активируется вновь.
Функция блокировки также включает блокировку
кнопки центрального замка, расположенной на
панели приборов.
Запирание с суперблокировкой
► Нажмите эту кнопку один раз, чтобы
запереть автомобиль.
► До истечения пяти секунд нажмите еще раз на
эту кнопку, чтобы включить суперблокировку замков
автомобиля.
На автомобилях в комплектации без охранной
сигнализации суперблокировка подтверждается
загоранием на несколько секунд фонарей
указателей поворотов при втором нажатии на
кнопку.
Суперблокировка не позволяет открывать
двери из салона.
При этом блокируется также и работа кнопки
центрального замка, расположенной на панели
приборов.
Нельзя никого оставлять в салоне автомобиля,
замки которого находятся в режиме
суперблокировки.
Определение
местонахождения автомобиля
Данная функция служит для облегчения
нахождения своего автомобиля на стоянке с
некоторого расстояния, особенно при слабом свете.
► Нажмите на эту кнопку.
При этом на 30 секунд загорятся стояночные огни и
фары ближнего света.
При повторном нажатии кнопки до истечения
данного промежутка времени световые приборы
немедленно гаснут.
Дистанционный ключ-пульт
Данная система позволяет отпирать, запирать
автомобиль и запускать двигатель при наличии
электронного ключа в области обнаружения
автомобиля.

Страница: 29

27
Доступ
2
Электронный ключ можно использовать и
как пульт дистанционного управления.
Дополнительную информацию о ключе с
пультом дистанционного управления читайте
в соответствующем разделе.
Отпирание автомобиля
► Имея при себе электронный ключ,
расположенный в зоне распознавания A, обхватите
ручку одной из передних дверей, чтобы отпереть
автомобиль, либо нажмите на привод замка двери
багажного отделения.
Мигание фонарей указателей поворотов в
течение нескольких секунд означает:
– отпирание автомобиля в версии без охранной
сигнализации,
– отключение охранной сигнализации на
остальных версиях.
В целях безопасности и во избежание
хищения не оставляйте электронный ключ в
автомобиле даже при нахождении рядом с ним.
Рекомендуется держать его всегда при себе.
Оседание влаги, пыли, грязи, соли и т. п. на
внутренней поверхности дверной ручки
может ухудшить работу датчика.
Если после очистки дверной ручки тканью
работа датчика не восстанавливается,
обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.
Резкий удар водяной струи (например, при
мойке под высоким давлением и т. п.) может
быть воспринят системой как попытка открыть
автомобиль.
Если одна из дверей/багажник все еще
открыт или электронный ключ системы
Дистанционный ключ-пульт остался внутри
автомобиля, центральный замок будет отключен.
Тем не менее при наличии охранной
сигнализации она активируется через 45 секунд.
Если автомобиль не заперт, но двери или
багажник впоследствии не
открываются, автомобиль автоматически снова
заблокируется через 30 секунд. Если автомобиль
оборудован сигнализацией, она также будет
автоматически активирована.
Для обеспечения безопасного вождения
никогда не оставляйте автомобиль даже на
короткое время, не взяв с собой электронный
ключ системы Дистанционный ключ-пульт.
Помните о риске угона автомобиля, если ключ
находится в одной из указанных областей, когда
автомобиль не заперт.
Для сохранения заряда элемента питания
электронного ключа и аккумуляторной
батареи автомобиля функция «без рук»
переводится в режим гибернации через 21 день
в случе неиспользования. Для восстановления
этой функции нажмите на любую кнопку пульта
ДУ или запустите двигатель, вставив
электронный ключ в устройство считывания.
Дополнительную информацию о запуске с
системой Дистанционный ключ-пульт см. в
соответствующем разделе.
Электромагнитные помехи
Работа электронного ключа может
оказаться нарушенной, если он окажется в поле
какого-либо электронного прибора: телефон
(включенный или в режиме ожидания), ноутбук,
мощное магнитное поле и т. п.

Страница: 30

28
Доступ
Запирание автомобиля
Простое запирание
► На электронном ключе, который должен
находиться в зоне распознавания A, нажмите
пальцем на любую дверную ручку (в зоне меток),
чтобы запереть автомобиль.
Передачу заднего хода следует включать только
на остановленном автомобиле в режиме холостого
хода двигателя.
Включение указателей поворотов на
несколько секунд указывает на следующее:
– отпирание на автомобилях в версии без
охранной сигнализации;
– отключение охранной сигнализации на
автомобилях в любой другой комплектации.
Запирание с суперблокировкой
Суперблокировка не позволяет открывать
двери из салона. При этом блокируется
работа кнопки центрального замка.
Звуковой сигнал остается в рабочем состоянии.
Нельзя никого оставлять в салоне автомобиля,
замки которого находятся в режиме
суперблокировки.
► Имея при себе электронный ключ, который
должен располагаться в зоне распознавания A,
нажмите пальцем на любую ручку передней двери
(в зоне меток), чтобы запереть автомобиль.
► До истечения пяти секунд нажмите еще
раз на ручку передней двери, чтобы включить
суперблокировку замков автомобиля.
рекомендации
Пульт дистанционного управления
Пульт дистанционного управления
является быстрореагирующим высокочастотным
устройством; не кладите его в карман, так
как существует риск непреднамеренной
разблокировки автомобиля.
Не нажимайте кнопки пульта ДУ, находясь
вне зоны досягаемости автомобиля, так
как существует риск перевода пульта ДУ
в нерабочее состояние. В таком случае
потребуется его сброс.
Пульт ДУ не работает, когда ключ находится
в замке зажигания, даже если зажигание
выключено.
Противоугонная защита
Не модифицируйте электронный
иммобилайзер автомобиля, так как это может
привести к неисправности.
Если автомобиль оснащен замком зажигания,
не забывайте извлечь ключ и повернуть рулевое
колесо, чтобы заблокировать рулевую колонку.
Запирание автомобиля
Вождение автомобиля с запертыми
замками может затруднить доступ в автомобиль
службам спасения в случае аварии.
Уходя даже ненадолго, в целях безопасности
выньте ключ из замка зажигания или заберите
электронный ключ с собой.
При покупке подержанного автомобиля
Обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN,
чтобы сохранить коды ключей. В этом случае
обеспечивается гарантия того, что только
с помощью этих ключей можно запустить
двигатель автомобиля.
Поддержка заряда элемента питания
электронного ключа и аккумуляторной
батареи автомобиля.
– Все функции «без рук» переходят в
расширенный режим ожидания после 21
дня неиспользования. Для восстановления
работы данных функций отоприте автомобиль
с помощью пульта ДУ, а затем запустите
двигатель.

Страница: 31

29
Доступ
2
Электромагнитные помехи
Работа электронного ключа может
оказаться нарушенной, если он окажется в поле
какого-либо электронного прибора: телефон
(включенный или в режиме ожидания), ноутбук,
мощное магнитное поле и т. п.
Запрещается выбрасывать разряженные
элементы питания пульта дистанционного
управления, так как в них содержатся металлы,
загрязняющие окружающую среду. Их следует
сдавать на специализированные пункты сбора
таких отходов.
Срочная процедура
Если ключи, пульт ДУ или
электронная карта потеряны
Обратитесь в сервисную сеть CITROËN, имея при
себе свидетельство о регистрации автомобиля,
документ, удостоверяющий личность, и, по
возможности, бирку с кодом ключа.
Сотрудник сети CITROËN сможет отыскать код
ключа и код приемопередатчика, чтобы заказать
новый ключ.
Полное отпирание/запирание
автомобиля ключом
Данными способами следует пользоваться в
следующих случаях:
– израсходован элемент питания пульта ДУ,
– неисправность пульта ДУ,
– автомобиль подвергается воздействию мощного
электромагнитного излучения.
В первом случае можно также заменить элемент
питания пульта ДУ.
См. соответствующую рубрику.
Во втором случае можно также выполнить
инициализацию пульта ДУ.
См. соответствующую рубрику.
► Вставьте ключ в цилиндр дверного замка.
► Поверните ключ по направлению к передней
части автомобиля, чтобы отпереть или по
направлению к задней части, чтобы запереть.
► До истечения 5 секунд еще раз поверните ключ
назад, чтобы включить суперблокировку замков
автомобиля.
На автомобилях без охранной сигнализации об
успешном завершении процедуры свидетельствует
мигание указателей поворота в течение нескольких
секунд.
Если охранная сигнализация активирована,
сирена подаст звуковой сигнал при
открывании двери. Чтобы прекратить подачу
звукового сигнала, включите зажигание.
Если автомобиль оснащен охранной
сигнализацией, данная функция не
активируется при запирании автомобиля при
помощи ключа.
Без включения центрального
замка
Данными способами следует пользоваться в
следующих случаях:
– неисправность центрального замка,
– аккумуляторная батарея отключена или
разряжена.
В случае выхода из строя центрального
электрического замка необходимо
отключить аккумуляторную батарею — это
позволит запереть багажник и замки всего
автомобиля.
Дверь водителя
► Поверните ключ по направлению к задней части
автомобиля, чтобы запереть дверь водителя или по
направлению к передней части автомобиля, чтобы
отпереть ее.
Двери пассажиров
Отпирание двери
► Потяните внутреннюю ручку двери на себя.
Запирание
► Откройте двери.

Страница: 32

30
Доступ
► Убедитесь, что на задних дверях не
активирована «детская» блокировка замков.
См. соответствующую рубрику.
► Снимите ключом черную заглушку,
расположенную на торце двери.
► Не прилагая усилия, вставьте ключ в отверстие
и, не поворачивая ключ, переведите защелку в
сторону внутренней части двери.
► Извлеките ключ и установите черную заглушку
на место.
► Закройте двери и, находясь снаружи, убедитесь,
что автомобиль заперт.
Замена элемента питания
Об истощенном элементе питания сообщается на
дисплее панели приборов.
Без Дистанционный ключ-пульт — тип
элемента питания: CR2032/3 В.
С Дистанционный ключ-пульт — тип
элемента питания: CR2032/3 В.
► Вставив в паз небольшую отвертку, поднимите и
отцепите крышку.
► Извлеките разряженный элемент питания из
корпуса.
► Вставьте новый элемент питания, соблюдая
полярность, и зафиксируйте крышку на корпусе.
► Проведите инициализацию пульта ДУ.
Дополнительную информацию об инициализации
пульта ДУ см. в соответствующем разделе.
Инициализация пульта
дистанционного управления
После замены элемента питания или в случае
неисправности системы дистанционного
управления может потребоваться инициализация
пульта ДУ.
Без Дистанционный ключ-пульт
► Выключите зажигание.
► Поверните ключ в положение 2 («Зажигание
включено»).
► Сразу же нажмите и удерживайте нажатой в
течение нескольких секунд кнопку с изображением
закрытого замка.

Страница: 33

31
Доступ
2
► Выключите зажигание и извлеките ключ из замка
зажигания.
Работоспособность пульта дистанционного
управления полностью восстановлена.
С Дистанционный ключ-пульт
► Вставьте ключ (встроенный в пульт ДУ) в
замочную щель, чтобы отпереть автомобиль.
► Приложите электронный ключ к
вспомогательному устройству считывания на
рулевой колонке и удерживайте его до включения
зажигания.
► Включите зажигание, нажав кнопку START/STOP.
► На автомобиле с механической коробкой
передач включите нейтральную передачу и
полностью выжмите педаль сцепления.
► На автомобиле с автоматической коробкой
передач в режиме P выжмите педаль тормоза.
Если после инициализации неисправность не
исчезла, незамедлительно обратитесь в сервисную
сеть CITROËN или в специализированный техцентр.
Двери
Открывание
Снаружи
► После отпирания автомобиля, или имея при
себе электронный ключ Дистанционный ключ-пульт,
который находится в зоне распознавания, потяните
за ручку двери.
Из салона
► Потяните за внутреннюю ручку любой двери,
чтобы открыть ее; при этом отпираются замки всех
дверей.
Закрывание
Если какая-либо дверь закрыта неплотно:
– при работающем двигателе или на
движущемся автомобиле (со скоростью
ниже 10 км/ч), эта контрольная лампа загорается на
несколько секунд в сопровождении уведомляющего
сообщения.
– во время движения автомобиля (со скоростью
ниже 10 км/ч), помимо включения контрольной
лампы и отображения уведомляющего сообщения,
в течение нескольких секунд подается звуковой
сигнал.
Багажное отделение
Открывание

Страница: 34

32
Доступ
► Отперев автомобиль либо войдя с
дистанционным ключом-пультом в зону
распознавания, нажмите на центральную кнопку
двери багажника.
► Поднимите крышку.
В случае неисправности или трудностей,
возникающих при открывании или
закрывании крышки, как можно скорее проверьте
ее в сервисном центре CITROËN или в
специализированном техцентре для устранения
данной неисправности, так как она может
привести к падению крышки и серьезным
травмам.
Закрывание
► Опустите крышку багажника, потянув ее за одну
из ручек, расположенных с внутренней стороны.
Если крышка багажника закрыта неплотно:
– при работающем двигателе, загорается
эта контрольная лампа и на несколько
секунд появляется уведомляющее сообщение,
– во время движения автомобиля (со скоростью
более 10 км/ч), загорается эта контрольная лампа,
раздается звуковой сигнал и на несколько секунд
появляется уведомляющее сообщение.
Аварийное отпирание замка
багажного отделения
Служит для отпирания замка багажника
механическим способом в случае выхода из строя
аккумуляторной батареи или центрального замка.
Отпирание
► Сложите заднее сиденье, чтобы получить доступ
к замку изнутри багажного отделения.
► Вставьте небольшую отвертку в отверстие A
замка, чтобы отпереть крышку багажного отделения.
► Переместите защелку влево.
Запирание после закрывания
Если неисправность не устраняется даже после
повторного закрывания, багажник вновь будет
заперт.
Центральный замок
Ручной режим
► Нажмите данную кнопку для запирания/
отпирания автомобиля (двери и багажное
отделение) изнутри.
Загорится контрольная лампа, подтверждающая
запирание центрального замка автомобиля.
Если какая-либо дверь открыта,
центральный замок не сработает.
Запирание/суперблокировка замков
снаружи автомобиля
Если запирание или суперблокировка замков
автомобиля осуществляется снаружи,
контрольная лампа мигает, а кнопка не работает.
► В случае обычного запирания замков,
для отпирания автомобиля потяните на себя
внутреннюю ручку любой двери.
► В случае суперблокировки замков,
отпирание автомобиля осуществляется пультом
ДУ, дистанционным ключом-пультом или
механическим ключом.

Страница: 35

33
Доступ
2
Автоматический режим
(защита от проникновения)
Замки дверей и багажника могут автоматически
запираться на движущемся автомобиле (если его
скорость превысила 10 км/ч).
Чтобы отключить или повторно активировать эту
функцию (активную по умолчанию):
► Нажмите эту кнопку и дождитесь звукового
предупреждения и отображения подтверждающего
сообщения.
Перевозка длинномерных и громоздких
предметов
Нажмите кнопку центрального замка, чтобы
продолжать движение с открытым багажным
отделением и запертыми дверьми. Иначе на
скорости выше 10 км/ч будет срабатывать
автоматическое запирание замков с «щелчком»
и появлением уведомления.
При нажатии на кнопку центрального замка
происходит отпирание автомобиля.
По достижении скорости выше 10 км/ч отпирание
будет временным.
Охранная сигнализация
Система охранной сигнализации срабатывает при
попытке хищения или взлома.
Контроль внешнего периметра
Система отслеживает открывание автомобиля.
При попытке несанкционированного открывания
двери, багажника или капота, включается охранная
сигнализация.
Контроль пространства салона
Система отслеживает любые изменения
пространства в салоне.
Охранная сигнализация срабатывает в случае
разбивания стекла, проникновения в салон или при
каких-либо перемещениях по нему.
Контроль наклона кузова
Система контролирует все изменения положения
кузова.
Охранная сигнализация срабатывает в случае
подъема или перемещения автомобиля.
На припаркованном автомобиле охранная
сигнализация не сработает в случае удара
по нему.
Функция самозащиты
Система отслеживает попытки вывести ее
компоненты из строя.
Сигнализация срабатывает при любой попытке
отключить или вывести из строя аккумуляторную
батарею, повредить блок управления или проводку
сирены.
Все работы с системой охранной
сигнализации следует осуществлять в
сервисной сети CITROËN или в
специализированном техцентре.
Запирание автомобиля с
включением всех функций
охранной сигнализации
Включение
– Выключите зажигание и выйдите из автомобиля.
► Заприте автомобиль просто на замок или
с суперблокировкой с помощью пульта ДУ
или системы Дистанционный ключ-пульт.
Если система охранной сигнализации активирована,
контрольная лампа кнопки будет ежесекундно
мигать, а указатели поворотов загорятся на 2
секунды.

Страница: 36

34
Доступ
Контроль периметра кузова активируется спустя 5
секунд, а контроль пространства салона и наклона
кузова — спустя 45 секунд.
Если какой-либо из открывающихся
элементов кузова (дверь, капот, багажное
отделение и т. п.) неплотно закрыт, запирание
замков не происходит, но контроль периметра
кузова станет активным спустя 45 секунд
одновременно с контролем пространства салона
и контролем наклона.
Отключение
► Нажмите на кнопку отпирания замков на
пульте дистанционного управления.
или
► Отоприте автомобиль с помощью системы
«Дистанционный ключ-пульт».
Система охранной сигнализации отключена:
контрольная лампа кнопки гаснет, а
указатели поворотов мигают около 2 секунд.
В случае автоматического запирания
замков (если в течение 30 секунд после их
отпирания ни одна из дверей и багажник не
открывались) система охранной сигнализации
автоматически активируется.
Запирание автомобиля с
включением только функции
контроля периметра
Выключите функцию контроля пространства
во избежание нежелательного срабатывания
сигнализации в определенных случаях.
– Небольшое открытие окна.
– Мойка автомобиля.
– Замена колеса.
– Буксировка вашего автомобиля.
– Транспортировка на корабле или пароме.
Отключение контроля пространства
салона и наклона кузова
► Выключите зажигание и не позднее чем в
течение 10 секунд нажмите на кнопку, при
этом контрольная лампа должна загореться и гореть
постоянно.
► Выйдите из автомобиля.
► Сразу заприте автомобиль просто на замок с
помощью пульта ДУ или системы Дистанционный
ключ-пульт.
Активным остается только контроль периметра
кузова, при этом ежесекундно мигает контрольная
лампа.
Отключение этой функции следует проделывать
всякий раз, когда понадобится, выключив
зажигание.
Возобновление функций контроля
изменения объема салона и наклона
кузова автомобиля
► Отключите контроль внешнего периметра
автомобиля, отперев его пультом ДУ или
дистанционным ключом-пультом.
При этом контрольная лампа кнопки погаснет.
► Включите охранную сигнализацию, заперев
автомобиль пультом дистанционного управления
или дистанционным ключом-пультом.
Контрольная лампа будет снова мигать
ежесекундно.
Срабатывание охранной
сигнализации
При срабатывании охранной сигнализации
раздается звук сирены и в течение тридцати секунд
мигают указатели поворота.
Функции контроля объема и положения кузова
остаются активными до десятого последовательного
срабатывания охранной сигнализации.
Если при отпирании автомобиля пультом ДУ или
дистанционным ключом-пультом контрольная
лампа кнопки мигает с ускоренной частотой,
значит охранная сигнализация сработала в ваше
отсутствие. При включении зажигания мигание
мгновенно прекратится.
Если пульт дистанционного
управления неисправен
Чтобы отключить функции контроля:

Страница: 37

35
Доступ
2
► отоприте автомобиль поворотом ключа
(встроенного в пульт ДУ) в дверном замке со
стороны водителя,
► откройте дверь, при этом сработает охранная
сигнализация,
► Включите зажигание и сирена отключится.
Контрольная лампа в кнопке погаснет.
Запирание автомобиля без
включения системы охранной
сигнализации
► Поворотом ключа (встроенного в пульт ДУ)
в замке двери водителя заприте автомобиль с
блокировкой или суперблокировкой замков.
Неисправность системы
Если при включении зажигания контрольная
лампа кнопки горит постоянно, это указывает на
неисправность системы.
Для проверки обратитесь в сервисную сеть
CITROËN или в специализированный техцентр.
Панорамная крыша
Панорамный потолочный люк состоит из подвижной
стеклянной панели, перемещающейся поверх
крыши, и солнцезащитной шторки, которую можно
открывать независимо от люка. При открывании
люка автоматически открывается шторка.
► Для управления панорамным потолочным люком
и соответствующей шторкой используйте кнопки на
потолочной консоли.
A. Управление шторкой потолочного люка
B. Управление потолочным люком
Включать потолочный люк или шторку можно при
включенном зажигании (при условии достаточного
заряда аккумуляторной батареи), при работающем
двигателе, в режиме STOP системы «Стоп-старт»
и до 45 секунд после выключения зажигания или
после запирания замков автомобиля.
Меры предосторожности
Не высовывайте голову или руки в проем
панорамного люка во время движения. Это
представляет риск серьезного травмирования!
Убедитесь, что багаж или вспомогательное
оборудование, установленное на багажных
дугах на крыше, не мешают движению
панорамного люка.
Не кладите тяжелые предметы на подвижную
стеклянную панель люка.
Перед тем как открыть мокрый (после
дождя или мойки автомобиля) панорамный
люк, дайте ему полностью высохнуть.
Не пользуйтесь люком, покрытым снегом или
льдом. Это может вывести его из строя!
Для удаления снега и наледи с люка пользуйтесь
только пластмассовым скребком.
Регулярно проверяйте состояние
уплотнительных прокладок люка (на
наличие пыли, опавших листьев и т. д.).
Перед мойкой автомобиля убедитесь, что
потолочный люк закрыт, при этом наконечник
моечного пистолета должен находиться на
расстоянии не менее 30 см от уплотнительных
прокладок.
Никогда не покидайте автомобиль с
открытым панорамным люком.
Работа системы
При полном открытии панорамного люка
подвижное стекло приподнимается в частично
открытое положение и затем скользит над крышей.
Допускаются любые промежуточные положения.
В зависимости от скорости автомобиля
степень открытия люка может меняться,
чтобы улучшить акустику в салоне.

Страница: 38

36
Доступ
Перед включением люка или шторки
убедитесь, что на их пути нет помех,
мешающих их движению.
При включении панорамного люка и шторки не
выпускайте из внимания детей.
При защемлении какого-либо предмета во
время закрывания панорамного люка или
шторки, необходимо немедленно изменить их
направление движения, нажав соответствующую
кнопку управления.
Водитель обязан следить за тем, чтобы
пассажиры правильно пользовались
панорамным люком и шторкой.
Система защиты от защемления
Если при закрывании потолочный люк или шторка
встретит препятствие, он автоматически повернет
обратно.
Система защиты от защемления срабатывает при
движении автомобиля со скоростью до 120 км/ч.
Открывание/закрывание
► Чтобы открыть панорамный люк или шторку,
используйте заднюю часть кнопки.
► Чтобы закрыть панорамный люк или шторку,
используйте переднюю часть кнопки.
Работа кнопок
► Нажатие на клавишу с преодолением точки
сопротивления напрямую полностью открывает или
закрывает потолочный люк.
► При повторном нажатии кнопки перемещение
останавливается.
► Если нажать и удерживать кнопку (без
преодоления точки сопротивления), перемещение
панорамного люка и шторки будет остановлено при
отпускании данной кнопки.
► Если панорамный люк закрыт: однократное
нажатие без преодоления точки сопротивления
приведет к его частичному открытию.
► Если панорамный люк частично открыт:
однократное нажатие без преодоления точки
сопротивления приведет к его полному открытию
или закрытию.
Крышу и окна, а затем шторку можно
закрыть, удерживая нажатой кнопку
дверного замка. Работа остановится, как только
вы отпустите клавишу.
Закрывание шторки ограничивается
положением открытого потолочного люка:
шторка не может перемещаться с выходом за
пределы открытого подвижного стекла. При
одновременном перемещении шторки и
панорамного люка шторка автоматически
останавливается или возобновляет
перемещение в зависимости от положения
панорамного люка.
Инициализация
После подсоединения АКБ в случае неисправности
или при прерывистом движении люка или шторки
необходимао провести инициализацию:
► Убедитесь, что ничто не мешает перемещению
люка или шторки и что уплотнители чистые.
► Включив зажигание, полностью закройте люк
или шторку.
► Нажмите на передний край кнопки B и
удерживайте ее, пока люк и шторка не начнут
плавно перемещаться, затем удерживайте кнопку
не менее 1 секунды.
► Подождите 2 секунды, а затем нажмите на
передний край кнопки B и удерживайте ее. Люк
и шторка откроются и закроются по очереди.
Когда люк и шторка снова полностью закроются,
задержите нажатие примерно еще на 2 секунды,
затем отпустите кнопку.
В случае неисправности повторите всю
процедуру.

Страница: 39

37
Доступ
2
Электрические
стеклоподъемники
1. Передний левый
2. Передний правый
3. Задний правый (в зависимости от модификации)
4. Левый левый (в зависимости от модификации)
5. Отключение выключателей электрических
стеклоподъемников, расположенных на задних
сиденьях (в зависимости от комплектации)
Ручной режим работы
Чтобы открыть или закрыть окно, нажмите на
клавишу или потяните ее, не преодолевая точку
сопротивления. Стекло остановится, как только Вы
отпустите клавишу.
Автоматический режим
работы передних
электрических
стеклоподъемников
Для открывания или закрывания окна полностью
нажмите или потяните вверх переключатель,
преодолев точку сопротивления: окно
полностью открывается или закрывается при
отпускании переключателя. При повторном
нажатии переключателя перемещение стекла
останавливается.
Клавишами стеклоподъемников можно
пользоваться еще около одной минуты
после изъятия ключа.
По истечении данного промежутка
времени электрические стеклоподъемники
перестанут работать. Их работоспособность
восстанавливается при повторном включении
зажигания.
Функция защиты от
защемления передних стекол
Если во время подъема стекло наталкивается
на препятствие, оно останавливается и сразу же
частично опускается.
При самопроизвольном опускании стекла во
время его автоматического подъема нажмите и
удерживайте клавишу выключателя до тех пор,
пока стекло полностью не опустится, а затем вновь
потяните ее до полного закрытия окна. После
закрытия не отпускайте клавишу еще примерно в
течение одной секунды.
Во время выполнения этой операции функция
защиты от защемления не работает.
Блокировка выключателей
стеклоподъемников задних
дверей (в зависимости от
модификации)
Для обеспечения безопасности Ваших детей
нажмите на кнопку 5, чтобы отключить выключатели
стеклоподъемников на задних дверях при любом
положении стекол.
При горящей контрольной лампе выключатели
отключены. При погашенной контрольной лампе
выключатели работают.
Инициализация электрических
стеклоподъемников
После повторного подключения аккумуляторной
батареи или в случае ненадлежащего
движения окна должна быть включена функция
автоматической защиты от защемления стеклом.

Страница: 40

38
Доступ
Функция автоматической защиты от защемления
стеклом отключается во время следующей
последовательности операций.
Выполните следующие действия для каждого окна.
► Полностью опустите окно, а затем поднимите
его — оно будет подниматься на несколько
сантиметров при каждом нажатии клавиши
выключателя. Повторите эту операцию до полного
закрытия окна.
► Продолжайте тянуть переключатель вверх не
менее одной секунды после закрытия окна.
Если электрический стеклоподъемник
функционирует с препятствием, движение
стеклоподъемника должно выполняться в
обратном порядке. Для этого нажмите
соответствующий выключатель.
Если водитель включает
электростеклоподъемник со стороны пассажира,
ему следует проследить за тем, чтобы ничто не
препятствовало свободному движению стекла
вниз.
Важно, чтобы пассажиры использовали
электрические стеклоподъемники надлежащим
образом.
При открытии/закрытии стеклоподъемников
обращайте особое внимание на детей.
Будьте внимательны к пассажирам и/или другим
лицам при закрытии окон с помощью ключа или
системы Дистанционный ключ-пульт.

Страница: 41

39
Эргономика и комфорт
3
Правильная посадка при
вождении
В целях безопасности регулировку следует
осуществлять только на неподвижном
автомобиле.
Перед отправлением в поездку выполните
следующие регулировки, чтобы обеспечить
максимально эргономичное положение:
– высота подголовника;
– наклон спинки сиденья;
– высота подушки сиденья;
– продольное положение сиденья;
– высота и вылет рулевого колеса;
– наружные и внутреннее зеркала заднего вида.
Отрегулировав все это, убедитесь, что с
сиденья водителя хорошо просматривается
приборная панель.
Передние подголовники
Регулировка по высоте
Чтобы поднять:
► поднимите подголовник на желаемую высоту;
при этом явно прослушивается звук его постановки
на фиксатор.
Чтобы опустить:
► нажмите на выступ фиксатора A и опустите
подголовник на желаемую высоту.
При правильной регулировке верхний край
подголовника должен находиться на уровне
макушки головы.
Снятие подголовника
► Поднимите подголовник до упора.
► Нажмите на выступ фиксатора A, чтобы
освободить подголовник и полностью его снять.
► Храните подголовник в безопасном месте.
Установка подголовника на
место
► Вставьте стержни подголовника в
соответствующие направляющие отверстия на
спинке сиденья.
► Опустите подголовник до упора.
► Нажмите на выступ фиксатора A, чтобы
освободить подголовник и надавите на него.
► Отрегулируйте подголовник по высоте.
Движение на автомобиле со снятыми
подголовниками запрещено. Они должны
быть установлены и правильно отрегулированы
по высоте под пассажира сиденья.
Передние сиденья
По соображениям безопасности, сиденья
следует регулировать только на
неподвижном автомобиле.

Страница: 42

40
Эргономика и комфорт
Настройки
Продольное положение
► Приподнимите рычаг управления и сдвиньте
сиденье вперед или назад.
► Отпустите рычаг управления, чтобы
зафиксировать сиденье в одном из пазов.
Перед тем как отодвинуть сиденье назад,
убедитесь, что этому никто и ничто не
мешает.
Иначе находящиеся сзади пассажиры могут
оказаться зажаты, или сиденье невозможно
будет отодвинуть из-за сложенных за ним на
полу громоздких предметов.
По высоте
(только для водителя)
► Потяните за рукоятку вверх или нажмите вниз
столько раз, сколько понадобится, чтобы поднять
или опустить сиденья и привести их в удобное
положение.
Наклон спинки сиденья
(водитель)
► Вращая ручку регулятора, отрегулируйте
положение спинки.
(сиденье пассажира)
► Поверните ручку B или потяните переключатель
B вверх для регулировки спинки.
► Достигнув нужного наклона, отпустите ручку.
Чтобы не дать спинке внезапно сложиться
вперед и ударить по вам, удерживайте ее
спиной или рукой при регулировке.
Положение столика спинки
сиденья пассажира
Убедитесь, что перемещению сиденья
ничто не мешает — ни сверху, ни снизу.
► Установите подголовники в нижнее положение.
► Потяните задний переключатель B вперед и
наклоните спинку вперед.
Чтобы установить в исходное положение
направляйте спинку сиденья назад, пока оно не
щелкнет на своем месте.

Страница: 43

41
Эргономика и комфорт
3
Это положение в сочетании с аналогичным
положением задних сидений позволяет вам
перевозить длинные предметы внутри автомобиля.
Перед тем как отодвинуть кресло назад,
убедитесь, что на всем пути перемещения
сиденья отсутствуют препятствия.
Когда спинка сиденья переднего пассажира
полностью сложена, перевозка пассажира
может осуществляться только в боковом заднем
сиденье позади водителя.
Не кладите твердые, тяжелые и острые
предметы на центральную часть спинки,
чтобы не повредить обивку за спинкой.
В случае резкого торможения, слетевшие со
сложенной спинки предметы могут превратиться
в стремительно летящие «снаряды».
Сиденья с подогревом
► Запустив двигатель, используйте ручку
регулировки для включения и выбора необходимо
уровня подогрева:
0 :выкл.
1 : Малая.
2 : Средняя.
3 : Выс.
Передние сиденья подогреваются раздельно.
Продолжительный подогрев сиденья не
рекомендуется для людей с чувствительной
кожей.
Люди с нарушенным восприятием тепла
могут получить ожог (в связи с болезненным
состоянием, приемом медикаментов и т. д.).
Для поддержания нагревательного элемента в
рабочем состоянии и во избежание замыкания:
– не кладите тяжелые или острые предметы на
сиденье;
– не нажимайте на сиденье коленом и не
становитесь на него;
– не проливайте жидкости на сиденье;
– никогда не включайте подогрев, если сиденье
мокрое.
Задние сиденья
Задний диван с неподвижными сиденьями или
на рельсовых направляющих (в зависимости от
модификации) и складными спинками (2/3-1/3),
позволяющими трансформировать погрузочное
пространство багажника.
Задние подголовники
Устанавливаются в два положения:
– верхнее, рабочее:
► поднимите подголовник до упора.
– нижнее, сложенное, если сиденья не заняты:
► нажмите на кнопку A, чтобы освободить
подголовник от фиксатора и опустить его до
конца.
Задние подголовники можно снимать.
Чтобы снять подголовник:
► снимите спинку с фиксатора при помощи ручки 1,
► немного наклоните спинку сиденья вперед,
► поднимите подголовник до упора,

Страница: 44

42
Эргономика и комфорт
► нажмите на кнопку A, чтобы освободить
подголовник от фиксатора и, потянув кверху,
извлеките его,
► уберите подголовник.
Чтобы вернуть подголовник на место:
► вставьте стержни подголовника в
соответствующие направляющие отверстия на
спинке сиденья,
► нажмите на подголовник и опустите его до упора,
► Нажмите на выступ фиксатора A, чтобы
освободить подголовник и надавите на него.
Не ездите со снятыми подголовниками, они
должны быть установлены в верхнее
положение, если на задних сиденьях находятся
пассажиры.
Подголовник среднего сиденья не предназначен
для боковых сидений, и наоборот.
Продольная регулировка
сиденья (в зависимости от
модификации)
Действия с сиденьями допустимо
выполнять только на неподвижном
автомобиле.
Части 2/3 и 1/3 регулируются отдельно.
► Поднимите рычаг блокировки и сдвиньте диван
вперед или назад.
Регулировка угла наклона
спинки (в зависимости от
модификации)
Доступно несколько положений регулировки.
► Переместите сиденье вперед.
► Потяните лямку вперед, а затем наклоните
спинку сиденья в необходимое положение.
Выполняя регулировку, расположитесь на
сиденье.
Складывание спинок
Перемещать спинки сидений следует
выполнять только на неподвижном
автомобиле.
Складывание спинок:
► Опустите подголовники на спинках.
► При необходимости сдвиньте передние сиденья
вперед.
► Переместите сиденья полностью назад (в
зависимости от модификации).
► Убедитесь, что складыванию спинок не мешают
люди или какие-либо объекты (одежда, багаж и
т. д.).

Страница: 45

43
Эргономика и комфорт
3
► Убедитесь, что боковые ремни безопасности
натянуты вдоль стержней надлежащим образом,
центральный ремень сложен, а язычки трех ремней
находятся в правильном положении для хранения.
В зависимости от модификации автомобиля спинки
сидений оборудованы ручками (сиденье диванного
типа с закрепленными подушками) или лямками
(сиденье диванного типа на рельсах).
► Управляйте ручкой разблокировки спинки 1 или
или потяните за лямку 2.
► Придерживая, опустите спинку 3 в
горизонтальное положение.
Если спинка оборудована лямкой, ее нет
необходимости опускать.
Если спинка оснащена ручкой, становится
виден красный индикатор данной ручки.
Установка спинок на место
Сначала убедитесь, что боковые ремни
безопасности расположены вертикально по
бокам рядом с кольцами блокировки спинок.
► Переведите спинку сиденья 3 в вертикальное
положение и нажмите на нее для фиксации в
исходном положении.
► Убедитесь, что ручка 1 вернулась в исходное
положение, а красный индикатор больше не виден
(в зависимости от модификации).
► Убедитесь, что боковые ремни безопасности при
этом не оказались зажатыми.
При установке заднего сиденья на место
примите меры предосторожности, чтобы не
зажать ремни безопасности и не спутать лямки.
Находящиеся в багажнике предметы могут резко
вылететь вперед – это очень опасно!
Регулировка положения
рулевого колеса
► На неподвижном автомобиле потяните рычаг,
чтобы разблокировать механизм регулировки
рулевого колеса.
► Установите рулевое колесо в удобное для вас
положение по высоте и вылету.
► Отведите рычаг от себя, чтобы зафиксировать
регулировку.
По соображениям безопасности все эти
настройки следует осуществлять на
неподвижном автомобиле.

Страница: 46

44
Эргономика и комфорт
Зеркала заднего вида
Наружные зеркала заднего
вида
Удаление конденсата и инея
Обогрев наружных зеркал заднего вида
включается при работающем двигателе
нажатием на выключатель обогрева заднего стекла.
Дополнительную информацию об удалении
инея и конденсата с заднего стекла читайте в
соответствующем разделе.
Настройка
► Переместите переключатель А или поверните
переключатель C (в зависимости от модификации)
влево или вправо, чтобы выбрать соответствующее
зеркало.
► Перемещая переключатель В или C (в
зависимости от модификации) в четырех
направлениях, отрегулируйте положение.
► Верните переключатель A или C (в зависимости
от модификации) в центральное положение.
Для обеспечения безопасного вождения
боковые зеркала заднего вида следует
отрегулировать так, чтобы уменьшить
непросматриваемую «слепую зону».
Объекты, наблюдаемые в зеркалах заднего
вида водителя и пассажира, кажутся более
отдаленными, чем они есть на самом деле.
Необходимо это учитывать для правильной
оценки расстояния до движущихся сзади
автомобилей.
Ручное складывание
Зеркала заднего вида можно сложить вручную
(напр., на тесной стоянке, в узком гараже и т. п.).
► Прижмите зеркало к корпусу автомобиля.
Электроприводное складывание зеркал
В зависимости от комплектации зеркала могут
складываться автоматически при парковке
автомобиля.
► Из салона включите зажигание
и потяните переключатель A в
среднее положение.
► Потяните переключатель A
назад.
► Заприте автомобиль снаружи.
Раскрывание при помощи
электрического привода
Зеркала раскрываются при помощи пульта
дистанционного управления или системой
«Дистанционный ключ-пульт» при отпирании
автомобиля. Если они не были сложены нажатием
на кнопку A, потяните ручку назад в центральное
положение.
Функцию складывания/раскрывания зеркал
при запирании/отпирании автомобиля
можно отключить. Для этого следует обратиться
в сервисную сеть CITROËN или в
специализированный техцентр.
В случае необходимости зеркала можно сложить
вручную.

Страница: 47

45
Эргономика и комфорт
3
Салонное зеркало заднего
вида
Его антибликовая конструкция автоматически
затемняет отражение, позволяя водителю избежать
ослепления лучами солнца, фарами идущего сзади
автомобиля и т. п.
Зеркало с ручной регулировкой
Положение «день»/«ночь»
► Потяните рычаг, чтобы перевести зеркало в
антибликовый режим «ночь».
► Нажмите на рычаг, чтобы перевести зеркало в
нормальный режим «день».
Регулировка
► Отрегулируйте положение зеркала на
нормальный режим «день».
Антибликовое зеркало заднего вида
Система плавно регулирует зеркало в режиме
день/ночь по сигналу датчика освещенности,
определяющего яркость расположенного за
автомобилем источника света.
Для лучшей видимости при
маневрировании зеркало автоматически
осветляется при включении передачи заднего
хода.
Вентиляция салона
Подача воздуха в салон
Воздух, поступающий в салон, фильтруется и
подается в него снаружи через расположенный
под ветровым стеклом воздухозаборник, либо
прогоняется по замкнутому кругу через систему
рециркуляции.
Кнопки управления
В зависимости от комплектации автомобиля
управление системой можно осуществлять через
меню «Микроклимат» на сенсорном экране или с
панели управления центральной консоли.
Выключатель обогрева заднего стекла расположен
под сенсорным экраном или на центральной панели
под аудиосистемой.
Распределение воздуха
1. Дефлекторы обдува ветрового стекла для
удаления инея и конденсата
2. Дефлекторы обдува и обогрева передних
боковых стекол
3. Регулируемые и закрываемые боковые
вентиляционные дефлекторы
4. Регулируемые и закрываемые центральные
вентиляционные дефлекторы
5. Подводы воздуха к ногам передних пассажиров
6. Подводы воздуха к ногам задних пассажиров
Рекомендации
Система кондиционирования воздуха с
ручным управлением
► Чтобы воздушные потоки распределялись
по салону равномерно, следите за чистотой
наружных воздухозаборных решеток под
ветровым стеклом, сопел, вентиляционных

Страница: 48

46
Эргономика и комфорт
решеток и воздуховодов, а также вытяжных
каналов, расположенных в багажном отделении.
► Не закрывайте от света датчик освещенности,
расположенный на панели приборов;
он работает в системе автоматического
кондиционирования воздуха.
► Чтобы обеспечить долгую и безотказную
работу кондиционера воздуха, включайте его
хотя бы на 5–10 минут не реже одного-двух раз
в месяц.
► Если кондиционер перестал охлаждать
воздух, выключите его и обратитесь в сервисную
сеть CITROËN или в специализированный
техцентр.
В случае буксировки прицепа с максимальной
массой в гору при высокой температуре
окружающего воздуха отключение кондиционера
воздуха позволяет облегчить нагрузку на
двигатель и, таким образом, сохранить его
тяговые возможности.
Старайтесь не выключать вентиляцию и не
использовать рециркуляцию воздуха
надолго во время движения — это может
вызвать запотевание стекол и ухудшить
атмосферу в салоне.
Если после длительного пребывания на
солнце температура внутри салона
окажется слишком высокой, необходимо
проветрить его в течение нескольких минут.
Установите регулятор подачи воздуха в режим,
достаточный для обеспечения эффективного
проветривания салона.
При работе кондиционера на стоянке
происходит естественное выделение
водяного конденсата, стекающего под
автомобиль.
Обслуживание системы вентиляции и
кондиционирования воздуха
► Следите за чистотой салонного фильтра и
систематически заменяйте все фильтрующие
элементы.
Рекомендуется использовать салонный фильтр
комбинированного типа. В нем содержатся
компоненты, предназначенные для очистки
воздуха и поддержания чистоты в салоне
(удаляются аллергены, устраняются неприятные
запахи и предотвращается оседание жирных
пятен).
► Для обеспечения правильной работы
системы кондиционирования проверяйте ее в
соответствии с рекомендациями, приведенными
в сервисной книжке технического обслуживания
и гарантийного ремонта.
Система «стоп-старт»
Система подогрева и система
кондиционирования воздуха работают только
при запущенном двигателе.
Временно отключите систему «стоп-старт» для
поддержания комфортной температуры в салоне
автомобиля.
Дополнительную информацию о системе «стоп-
старт» см. в соответствующем разделе.
Система отопления и
кондиционирования с
ручными настройками
Система подогрева работает только при
работающем двигателе.
Ручной кондиционер воздуха работает при
запущенном двигателе.
1. Рециркуляция воздуха в салоне
2. Настройка температуры

Страница: 49

47
Эргономика и комфорт
3
3. Регулировка распределения воздуха
4. Регулировка подачи воздуха
5. Включение / Выключение кондиционера
Регулировка температуры
► Поворачивая ручку из синей зоны («холодной»)
в красную («теплую»), отрегулируйте температуру
воздуха по своему усмотрению.
Регулировка подачи воздуха
► Вращая ручку 4, установите комфортную подачу
воздуха в салон.
Регулировка распределения
воздушных потоков
К центральным и боковым дефлекторам.
В зону расположения ног.
На ветровое стекло и боковые окна.
Распределение воздушных потоков можно
изменить, нажимая на соответствующие
кнопки.
Вкл./выкл. кондиционера
Система кондиционирования воздуха
предназначена для работы в любое время года, при
этом окна салона должны быть закрыты.
С ним можно:
– в летнее время понизить температуру воздуха в
салоне,
– зимой, при температуре выше 3°C, ускорить
удаление конденсата со стекол.
► Нажмите эту кнопку для включения и
выключения кондиционера воздуха.
Кондиционер не работает, если регулятор
подачи воздуха выключен.
Автоматический
кондиционер воздуха
Кондиционер воздуха работает при запущенном
двигателе, но вентиляцией и соответствующими
органами управления можно пользоваться и при
включенном зажигании.
Работа кондиционера, температура, подача и
распределение воздуха в салоне регулируются в
автоматическом режиме.
Нажмите кнопку меню Climate для доступа к
органам управления системы.
1. Настройка температуры
2. Регулировка подачи воздуха
3. Регулировка распределения воздуха
4. Включение / Выключение кондиционера
5. Вкл./выкл. автоматической программы
обеспечения комфорта
6. Рециркуляция воздуха в салоне
7. Доступ к странице второго уровня
Настройка температуры
► Нажмите на одну из кнопок 1, чтобы понизить
(синяя зона) или повысить (красная зона)
температуру.
Величина на дисплее показывает уровень
комфортности микроклимата, а не температуру
воздуха.
Для максимального охлаждения или
прогрева салона пользуйтесь кнопками
регулятора температуры для выбора положения
LO (низк.) или HI (выс.).
Автоматическое поддержание
комфортного микроклимата
Активирование/отключение
► Нажмите кнопку 5, чтобы включить или
выключить автоматический режим работы системы
кондиционирования воздуха.
Система кондиционирования воздуха
функционирует автоматически: система

Страница: 50

48
Эргономика и комфорт
оптимизирует температуру, поток воздуха и
распределение воздуха в салоне в зависимости от
выбранного уровня комфорта.
► Нажатием кнопки 7 перейдите на вложенную
страницу, чтобы настроить автоматическую
программу обеспечения комфорта, выбрав один из
доступных режимов.
Мягкий: обеспечивает спокойную и тихую работу,
ограничивая при этом подачу воздуха.
Обычный: наилучший компромисс между
комфортной температурой и тихой работой
(настройка по умолчанию).
Быстрый: обеспечивает сильный и эффективный
приток воздуха.
Mode AUTO
► Для изменения данных параметров
нажмите несколько раз кнопку.
Эта настройка относится только к работе в режиме
AUTO. Однако при отключении режима AUTO
сохраняется предыдущий выбор.
Смена настройки не ведет к автоматическому
включению режима «AUTO», если он был выключен.
В холодную погоду и когда двигатель не
прогрет, чтобы достичь комфортного
климата, подача воздуха будет нарастать
постепенно вплоть до достижения заданного
уровня микроклимата.
Если при посадке в автомобиль окажется, что
температура воздуха в его салоне намного ниже
или выше комфортной, не пытайтесь изменить
ее регулятором для достижения желаемой
температуры. Система сама автоматически
настроится и в кратчайшее время доведет
температуру до комфортного уровня.
Регулировка подачи воздуха
► Нажмите одну из кнопок 2 (- или+), чтобы
ускорить или замедлить подачу воздуха.
Символ подачи воздуха (вентилятор) будет
изменяться в зависимости от этих действий.
Когда подача воздуха снизится до минимума,
вентиляция остановится.
При этом символ ВЫКЛ отобразится рядом с
вентилятором.
Регулировка распределения
воздушных потоков
► Нажмите кнопку 3, чтобы отрегулировать
распределение воздуха в салоне.
К ветровому стеклу.
К центральным и боковым дефлекторам.
В зону расположения ног.
Каждое нажатие на кнопку включает или отключает
систему.
Все три кнопки можно включить
одновременно. В этом случае приоритет
отдается подаче воздуха из центральных и
боковых дефлекторов, а также из дефлекторов,
которые расположены в зоне расположения ног
пассажира.
Выключатель кондиционера
Кондиционер воздуха предназначен для работы в
любое время года, при этом окна салона должны
быть закрыты.
Он позволяет:
– в летнее время понизить температуру воздуха в
салоне,
– зимой, при температуре выше 3°C, ускорить
удаление конденсата со стекол.
► Нажатием кнопку 4 кондиционер включается/
выключается.
Если контрольная лампа горит, значит включена
система кондиционирования.
Кондиционер воздуха не работает при
выключенном регуляторе подачи воздуха.
Работа вентиляции при
включенном зажигании
Включив зажигание, можно воспользоваться
системой вентиляции, регулировать подачу
воздуха в салон и распределение воздуха в
зависимости от заряда АКБ.
В этом режиме система кондиционирования воздуха
не работает.

Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook PDF

Summary of Content for Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook PDF

Access to the Handbook

ONLINE View or download the handbook at the following address: http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/

Scan this QR Code for direct access.

This symbol indicates the latest information available.

Select: the language, the vehicle and body style, the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the date of 1st registration of the vehicle.

MOBILE APPLICATIONS Install the Scan MyCitron application (content available offline). Also available in the MyCitron App application.

Welcome

Thank you for choosing a Citron C3 Aircross. This document contains the key information and recommendations you will need to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly recommend familiarising yourself with it, as well as the Maintenance and Warranty Guide. Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it was sold. The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only. Automobiles CITRON reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this document. If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is passed on to the new owner.

Key

Safety warning

Additional information

Environmental protection feature

Left-hand drive vehicle

Right-hand drive vehicle

Location of equipment/button indicated using a black area

For any work on your vehicle, contact a member of the Manufacturers dealer network, hereinafter referred to as a dealer, or a qualified workshop.

2

Contents

Overview

Eco-driving

1Instruments Instrument panels 8 Warning and indicator lamps 9 Indicators 14 Distance recorders 17 Equipment configuration for vehicles without screen 17 Monochrome screen C 18 Touch screen 19 Trip computer 20 Setting the date and time 23

2Access Remote control / Key 24 Keyless Entry and Start 25 Back-up procedures 27 Doors 29 Boot 30 Central locking 30 Alarm 31 Panoramic sunroof 32 Electric windows 34

3Ease of use and comfort Front seats 36 Rear seats 38 Steering wheel adjustment 41 Mirrors 41

Ventilation 42 Heating/Manual air conditioning 44 Automatic air conditioning 44 Front demist — defrost 46 Heated windscreen 46 Rear screen demist — defrost 47 Front fittings 47 Rear fittings 50 Boot fittings 51 Courtesy lamps 53 Interior ambient lighting 54

4Lighting and visibility Lighting control stalk 55 Direction indicators 56 Automatic illumination of headlamps 57 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 57 Automatic lighting systems — General recommendations 58 Automatic headlamp dipping 58 Headlamp beam height adjustment 59 Cornering lighting 59 Wiper control stalk 60 Changing a wiper blade 62 Automatic wipers 62

5Safety General safety recommendations 64 Hazard warning lamps 64 Horn 65 Emergency or assistance 65 Electronic stability control (ESC) 67 Grip control 68 Hill Assist Descent Control 69

Seat belts 70 Airbags 73 Child seats 75 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 77 ISOFIX child seats 78 i-Size child seats 80 Installing child seats 80 Child lock 83

6Driving Driving recommendations 84 Starting / Switching off the engine with the key 86 Starting/Switching off the engine with Keyless Entry and Start 87 Parking brake 89 5-speed manual gearbox 89 6-speed manual gearbox 90 Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 90 Gear shift indicator 92 Hill start assist 93 Stop & Start 93 Tyre under-inflation detection 95 Driving and manoeuvring aids — General recommendations 97 Head-up display 98 Memorising speeds 99 Road signs recognition 100 Speed limiter 102 Cruise control — Specific recommendations 104 Cruise control 104 Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Intelligent emergency braking assistance 106 Distraction detection 109 Lane departure warning system 110 Blind spot monitoring 111

3

Contents

bit.ly/helpPSA

Access to additional videos

Parking sensors 112 Top Rear Vision 113 Park Assist 116

7Practical information Compatibility of fuels 121 Refuelling 121 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 122 Snow chains 123 Towing device with quickly detachable towball 123 Towing device 126 Energy economy mode 127 Roof bars 127 Bonnet 128 Engine compartment 129 Checking levels 130 Checks 132 AdBlue (BlueHDi) 133 Advice on care and maintenance 135

8In the event of a breakdown Running out of fuel (Diesel) 137 Tool kit 137 Temporary puncture repair kit 138 Spare wheel 141 Changing a bulb 144 Fuses 147 12 V battery 147 Towing 150

9Technical data Engine technical data and towed loads 153

Petrol engines 154 Diesel engines 156 Dimensions 157 Identification markings 157

10Bluetooth audio system First steps 159 Steering mounted controls 160 Menus 160 Radio 161 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 162 Media 163 Telephone 165 Frequently asked questions 168

11CITRON Connect Radio First steps 171 Steering mounted controls 172 Menus 173 Applications 174 Radio 174 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 176 Media 176 Telephone 178 Settings 181 Frequently asked questions 182

12CITRON Connect Nav First steps 184 Steering mounted controls 185 Menus 185 Voice commands 187 Navigation 190

Connected navigation 193 Applications 195 Radio 198 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 199 Media 199 Telephone 201 Settings 203 Frequently asked questions 205

13Event data recorders

Alphabetical index

4

Overview

Instruments and controls These illustrations and descriptions are intended as a guide. The presence and location of some elements vary depending on the version or trim level.

1. Bonnet release 2. Dashboard fuses

3. Courtesy lamp Warning lamps display for seat belts and front passenger airbag Panoramic opening sunroof controls Interior rear view mirror Emergency and assistance call buttons

4. Monochrome screen with audio system Touch screen with CITRON Connect Radio or CITRON Connect Nav Automatic air conditioning (depending on version)

5. START/STOP/Grip control/Hill Assist Descent Control controls Ventilation (depending on version) Heating (depending on version) Manual air conditioning (depending on version) Front demisting/defrosting Rear screen demisting/defrosting

6. Gearbox controls 7. Parking brake 8. USB socket

12 V socket 9. Horn 10. Instrument panel

Steering-mounted controls

1. Exterior lighting/Direction indicators control stalk

2. Wipers/Screenwash/Trip computer control stalk

3. Horn 4. Cruise control/speed limiter controls 5. Audio system controls A. Select the instrument panel display mode B. Voice commands C. Decrease/Increase volume D. Select previous/next media

Confirm a selection E. Access the Telephone menu

Manage calls

5

Overview

F. Select an audio source G. Display the list of radio stations/audio tracks

Side control bar

1. Tyre under-inflation detection 2. Stop & Start 3. Heated windscreen 4. Lane departure warning system 5. Electric child lock 6. Alarm 7. Parking sensors 8. Head-up display 9. Manual headlamp beam height adjustment

Central control bar

1. Hazard warning lamps 2. Central locking 3. Grip control 4. Hill Assist Descent Control 5. Climate touch screen menu (depending on

version) 6. Touch screen home page (depending on

version) 7. Front demisting de-icing 8. Rear screen demisting de-icing

Labels «Ease of use and comfort — Front fittings — Wireless smartphone charger» section:

«Safety — Child seats — Child seat at the front» section:

«Safety — Child seats — Deactivating the front passenger airbag» section:

«Safety — ISOFIX mountings» section:

i-Size TOP TETHER

«Safety — Manual child lock» section:

«Driving — Stop & Start», «Practical information — Bonnet» and «In the event of a breakdown — Changing a bulb» sections:

«Practical information — Compatibility of fuels» section:

«In the event of a breakdown — Temporary puncture repair kit» section:

6

Overview

«In the event of a breakdown — Spare wheel» section:

«In the event of a breakdown — 12 V battery» section:

24v 12v

7

Eco-driving

Eco-driving Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise the vehicle’s energy consumption (fuel and/or electricity) and CO2 emissions. Optimise your use of the gearbox With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up promptly. While accelerating, change up early. With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic mode. Do not depress the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. The gear shift indicator prompts you to engage the most suitable gear. Whenever this indication is displayed on the instrument panel, follow it straight away. With an automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode. Drive smoothly Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal and press the accelerator gradually. These practices help to save on energy consumption, reduce CO2 emissions and decrease general traffic noise. When the traffic is flowing smoothly, select the cruise control.

Control the use of electrical equipment Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open. Consider using equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (e.g. sunroof blind, window blinds). Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air conditioning as soon as the desired temperature has been reached. Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, if they are not managed automatically. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. Adapt your use of the headlamps and/or foglamps to the level of visibility, in accordance with current legislation in the country in which you are driving. Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter (other than in severe wintry conditions: temperature below -23C). The vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. As a passenger, avoid connecting your multimedia devices (e.g. film, music, video game) to help reduce the consumption of energy. Disconnect all portable devices before leaving the vehicle. Limit the causes of excess consumption Spread loads throughout the vehicle. Place the heaviest items in the boot as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a roof box. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit summer tyres. Comply with the servicing instructions Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on the driver’s side. Carry out this check in particular: before a long journey. at each change of season. after a long period out of use. Do not forget the spare wheel and, where applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. Have your vehicle serviced regularly (e.g. engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, etc.). Observe the schedule of operations in the manufacturer’s service schedule. With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system has a fault, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible to restore your vehicle’s nitrogen oxide emissions to legal levels. When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid overflow. You will only see the fuel consumption of your new vehicle settle down to a consistent average after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).

8

Instruments

LCD text instrument panel

Dials 1. Speedometer (mph or km/h) 2. Fuel gauge 3. Display screen 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 5. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm)

Control buttons A. Resetting the service indicator.

Reminder of servicing information or the remaining range with the SCR system and the AdBlue. Depending on version: go back up a level, cancel the current operation.

B. General lighting dimmer. Depending on version: movements in a menu, a list; changing a value.

C. Resetting the trip distance recorder. Depending on version: enter the configuration menu (long press), confirm a choice (short press).

Display screen

1. Outside temperature 2. Cruise control or speed limiter settings

Speed suggested by the Road signs recognition

3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) 4. Gear shift indicator and/or selector position,

gear and Sport and Snow modes with an automatic gearbox

5. Trip computer and Stop & Start time counter. 6. Display area: trip distance recorder (miles or

km), service indicator or range associated with the AdBlue and the SCR system (miles or km), total distance recorder, alert messages or state of functions

If the vehicle is not equipped with an audio system or touch screen, this display screen allows you to configure certain equipment. For more information on Configuring equipment for vehicles without a screen, refer to the corresponding section.

Matrix instrument panel

Dials 1. Speedometer (mph or km/h) 2. Fuel gauge 3. Display screen 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 5. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm)

Control buttons A. Resetting the service indicator

Alert log display Reminder of servicing information or the remaining range associated with AdBlue and the SCR system (miles or km) Tyre pressure status information display

B. General lighting dimmer C. Resetting the trip distance recorder

Display

1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings Speed suggested by the Road signs recognition

2. Gear shift indicator and/or selector position, gear and Sport mode indicator with an automatic gearbox

9

Instruments

1Control buttons A. Resetting the service indicator

Alert log display Reminder of servicing information or the remaining range associated with AdBlue and the SCR system (miles or km) Tyre pressure status information display

B. General lighting dimmer C. Resetting the trip distance recorder

Display

1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings Speed suggested by the Road signs recognition

2. Gear shift indicator and/or selector position, gear and Sport mode indicator with an automatic gearbox

3. Display area: alert messages or state of functions, trip computer, digital speedometer (mph or km/h), range associated with the AdBlue and the SCR system (miles or km), etc.

4. Service indicator, then total distance recorder (miles or km) These functions are displayed in turn when the ignition is switched on

5. Trip distance recorder (miles or km)

Warning and indicator lamps Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating status of a system (operation or deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. Associated warnings The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message displayed in a screen. Relating the type of alert to the operating status of the vehicle allows you to determine whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has occurred: refer to the description of each lamp for further information.

When the ignition is switched on Certain red or orange warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. These warning lamps should go off as soon as the engine is started. For more information on a system or a function, refer to the corresponding section.

Persistent warning lamp If a red or orange warning lamp comes on, there may be fault which needs further investigation. If a lamp remains lit The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning and indicator lamp description indicate whether you should contact a qualified professional in addition to the immediate recommended actions. (1): You must stop the vehicle. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. (2): Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. (3): Visit a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

10

Instruments

List of warning and indicator lamps Red warning/indicator lamps

STOP Fixed, associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by the display of a

message and an audible signal. A serious fault with the engine, braking system or power steering or a major electrical fault has been detected. Carry out (1) and then (2). Parking brake

Fixed. The parking brake is applied or not

properly released. Braking

Fixed. The brake fluid level in the braking circuit

has dropped significantly. Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If the problem persists, carry out (2).

Fixed. The electronic brake force

distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. Carry out (1) and then (2).

Door(s) open Fixed, associated with a message identifying the access.

A door or the tailgate is not properly closed (speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)).

Fixed, associated with a message identifying the access, accompanied by

an audible signal. A door or the tailgate is not properly closed (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Seat belts not fastened/unfastened

Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an increasing audible signal.

A seat belt has not been fastened or has been unfastened. 12 V battery charge

Fixed. The battery charging circuit is faulty

(e.g. dirty terminals, loose or severed alternator belt). Carry out (1). Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning lamp does not go off when the engine is started, carry out (2). Engine oil pressure

Fixed. There is a fault with the engine lubrication

system. Carry out (1) and then (2).

Maximum engine coolant temperature Fixed. The temperature of the cooling system is

too high. Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2). Engine self-diagnostic system

Fixed. A major engine fault has been

detected. Carry out (1) and then (2). Orange warning/indicator lamps

Engine self-diagnostics system Fixed. A minor engine fault has been

detected. Carry out (3).

Flashing. The engine management system has a

fault. There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed. You must carry out (2).

Fixed. The emissions control system has a fault.

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. Carry out (3) without delay.

11

Instruments

1Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake Flashing. The system activates and brakes the

vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle in front. For more information, refer to the Driving section.

Fixed, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.

The system has a fault. Carry out (3).

Fixed, accompanied by the display of a message.

The system has been deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

Fixed. The system is deactivated

temporarily because the driver and/or front passenger (depending on version) has been detected as present but the corresponding seat belt has not been fastened. Anti-lock braking system (ABS)

Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a fault.

The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry out (3). Under-inflation

Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

The pressure in one or more tyres is too low.

Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the pressure.

Under-inflation warning lamp flashing then fixed and Service

warning lamp fixed. The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible and carry out (3). Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip regulation (ASR)

Fixed. The system is deactivated.

The DSC/ASR system is reactivated automatically when the vehicle is restarted, and at speeds above approximately 31 mph (50 km/h). At speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be reactivated manually.

Flashing. DSC/ASR system regulation is activated

in the event of a loss of grip or trajectory. Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault.

Carry out (3). Airbags

Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt

pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty. Carry out (3).

Front passenger airbag (ON) Fixed. The front passenger airbag is activated.

The control is set to the «ON» position. In this case, do not install a «rearward facing» child seat on the front passenger seat — risk of serious injury! Front passenger airbag (OFF)

Fixed. The front passenger airbag is deactivated.

The control is set to the OFF position. A «rearward facing» child seat can be installed, unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp on). Particle filter (Diesel)

Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message about the risk of particle

filter blockage. The particle filter is nearing saturation. As soon as traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that the

additive level in the particle filter is too low. The low level in the additive tank has been reached. Top up without delay: carry out (3).

12

Instruments

Low fuel level Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

When it first comes on, there is approximately 5 litres of fuel remaining in the tank (reserve). Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. Never drive until completely empty, as this could damage the emissions control and injection systems. Water in Diesel fuel filter (depending on version)

Fixed. The Diesel fuel filter contains water.

Carry out (2) without delay. Risk of damaging the fuel injection system! Lane departure warning system

Flashing, accompanied by an audible signal.

A lane marking has been crossed on the left or right. Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to return to the correct trajectory. For more information, refer to the Driving section.

Fixed, accompanied by an onscreen message.

The system has a fault. Stay alert and drive carefully, then carry out (3).

Fixed. The system has been deactivated.

If there is an unexpected change of direction, you will no longer be warned by the system.

AdBlue (BlueHDi) On for around 30 seconds when starting the vehicle, accompanied by a message

indicating the driving range. The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 miles (2,400 and 800 km). Top up the AdBlue.

Fixed, on switching on the ignition, accompanied by an audible signal and a

message indicating the driving range. The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles (800 and 100 km). Promptly top up the AdBlue, or carry out (3).

Flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the

driving range. The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). You must top up the AdBlue to avoid engine starting being prevented, or carry out (3).

Flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that

starting is prevented. The AdBlue tank is empty: the legally required engine immobiliser system prevents the engine from starting. To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue or carry out (2). It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue to the tank.

SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) Fixed when the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible

signal and a message. A malfunction of the SCR emissions control system has been detected. This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions return to normal levels.

Flashing AdBlue warning lamp on switching on the ignition, with the

Engine self-diagnostics warning lamp on fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the driving range. Depending on the message displayed, it is possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before the engine immobiliser is triggered. Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting being prevented.

Flashing AdBlue warning lamp on switching on the ignition, with the

Engine self-diagnostics warning lamp on fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented. The engine immobiliser prevents the engine from restarting (the permitted driving limit has been exceeded after confirmation of a malfunction of the emissions control system). To start the engine, carry out (2). Service

Temporarily on, accompanied by the display of a message.

One or more minor faults, for which there is/are no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected.

13

Instruments

1Identify the cause of the fault using the message displayed on the instrument panel. You may be able to deal with some faults yourself, such as changing the battery in the remote control. For other faults, such as with the tyre under- inflation detection system, carry out (3).

Fixed, accompanied by the display of a message.

One or more major faults, for which there is/are no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. Identify the cause of the fault using the message displayed on the instrument panel, then carry out (3).

Service warning lamp fixed and service spanner flashing then

fixed. The servicing interval has been exceeded. The vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines. Engine pre-heating (Diesel)

Temporarily on (up to approximately 30 seconds in

severe weather conditions). When switching on the ignition, if the weather conditions and the engine temperature make it necessary. Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. When the warning lamp goes off, starting will occur immediately if you press and hold: the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox.

the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. If the engine does not start, make the engine starting request again, while keeping your foot on the pedal. Rear foglamp

Fixed. The lamp is on.

Green warning/indicator lamps

Blind spot monitoring Fixed. The function has been activated.

Hill Assist Descent Control Fixed. The system has been activated, but the

conditions for regulation are not met (gradient, speed too high, gear engaged).

Flashing. The function is regulating the speed of

the vehicle. The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps come on during the descent. Stop & Start

Fixed. When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start

puts the engine into STOP mode. Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable

or START mode is automatically triggered. For more information, refer to the Driving section.

Direction indicators Flashing with audible signal. The direction indicators are on.

Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are lit.

Automatic wiping Fixed. Automatic windscreen wiping is activated.

Automatic headlamp dipping Fixed. The function has been activated

via the touch screen (Driving/Vehicle menu). The lighting control stalk is in the «AUTO» position. For more information, refer to the Lighting and visibility section. Dipped beam headlamps

Fixed. The lamps are on.

Blue warning/indicator lamps

Main beam headlamps Fixed. The lamps are on.

14

Instruments

Black/white warning lamps

Foot on the brake Fixed. Insufficient or no pressure on the brake

pedal. With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running, before releasing the parking brake, to move out of position P. Automatic wiping

Fixed. Automatic front wiping is activated.

Indicators Coolant temperature indicator

With the engine running: In zone A, the temperature is correct.

In zone B, the temperature is too high. The associated warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp light up in red on the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine.

After switching off the ignition, carefully open the bonnet and check the coolant

level.

For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding

section.

Service indicator The servicing information is expressed in terms of distance (miles or kilometres) and time (months or days). The alert is given at whichever of these two terms is reached first. The servicing information is displayed in the instrument panel. Depending on the version of the vehicle: The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due, or the distance travelled since it was due preceded by the «-» sign.

An alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next service is due or how long it is overdue.

The value indicated is calculated according to the distance covered and

the time elapsed since the last service. The alert may also be triggered close to a due date.

Service spanner On temporarily when the ignition is switched on.

Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 km) remain before the next service is due.

Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. The next service is due in less than 620

miles (1,000 km). Have your vehicle serviced very soon. Service spanner flashing

Flashing then fixed, when the ignition is switched on.

(With BlueHDi Diesel engines, associated with the Service warning lamp.) The servicing interval has been exceeded. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Resetting the service indicator The service indicator must be reset after each service. Switch the ignition off.

CHECK

Press and hold this button. Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown. Release the button when =0 is displayed; the spanner disappears.

If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle

and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered.

Reminder of the servicing information You can access the servicing information at any time. Press the trip distance recorder reset button. The servicing information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

Engine oil level indicator (Depending on version) On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the engine oil level status is displayed on the instrument panel for a few seconds when

15

Instruments

1

CHECK

Press and hold this button. Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown. Release the button when =0 is displayed; the spanner disappears.

If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle

and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered.

Reminder of the servicing information You can access the servicing information at any time. Press the trip distance recorder reset button. The servicing information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

Engine oil level indicator (Depending on version) On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the engine oil level status is displayed on the instrument panel for a few seconds when

the ignition is switched on, after the servicing information.

The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine

has been off for more than 30 minutes.

Oil level correct This is indicated by the message «Oil level correct«. Low oil level This is indicated by the message «Oil level incorrect» on the instrument panel, accompanied by the lighting of the Service warning lamp and an audible signal. If a low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section. Oil gauge malfunction This is indicated by the message «Oil level measurement invalid» on the instrument panel. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the event of a malfunction of the electric gauge, the oil level is no longer

monitored. If the system is faulty, you must check the engine oil level using the manual dipstick located in the engine compartment.

For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section.

AdBlue range indicators (BlueHDi) The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with a system that associates the SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot function without AdBlue fluid. When the level of AdBlue falls below the reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and an estimate of the distance that can be travelled before engine starting is prevented is displayed in the instrument panel.

The engine starting prevention system required by regulations is activated

automatically once the AdBlue tank is empty. It is then no longer possible to start the engine until the minimum level of AdBlue has been topped up.

Manual display of driving range While the driving range is greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed automatically.

16

Instruments

CHECK

Press this button to temporarily display the driving range.

You can view the range information by pressing the «Diagnostic» button after

selecting the «Driving functions» tab in the Driving/Vehicle menu.

Actions required related to a lack of AdBlue

The following warning lamps light up when the quantity of AdBlue is below the reserve level: driving range of 1,500 miles (2,400 km). Together with the warning lamps, messages regularly remind you of the need to top up to avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to the Warning and indicator lamps section for details of the messages displayed.

For more information on AdBlue (BlueHDi) and in particular on topping

up, refer to the corresponding section.

Warning/ indicator lamps on

Action Remaining range

Top up. Between 1,500 miles and 500 miles (2,400 km and 800 km)

Top up as soon as possible.

Between 500 miles and 62 miles (800 km and 100 km)

A top-up is vital, there is a risk that the engine will be prevented from starting.

Between 62 miles and 0 miles (100 km and 0 km)

To be able to restart the engine, add at least 5 litres of AdBlue to the tank.

0 miles (km)

Malfunction of the SCR emissions control system Malfunction detection

If a malfunction is detected, these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of an «Emissions control fault» message.

The alert is triggered while driving when the fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter when switching on the ignition for subsequent journeys, for as long as the cause of the fault persists.

If the fault is temporary, the alert disappears during the next journey, after

self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions control system.

Malfunction confirmed during the permitted driving phase (between 685 miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) If the fault indication is still displayed permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the fault in the SCR system is confirmed. The AdBlue warning lamp flashes and a message is displayed («Emissions control fault: starting prevented in X miles (kms)» or «NO START IN X miles (kms)«),

indicating the driving range in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You can continue driving for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before the engine starting prevention system is triggered.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Starting prevented Every time the ignition is switched on, the message «Emissions control fault: Starting prevented» or «NO START IN» is displayed.

To restart the engine Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Distance recorders With the ignition on, the distances are permanently indicated. They are deactivated about 30 seconds after switching the ignition off. They are displayed when the driver’s door is opened, and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

When travelling abroad, you may have to change the distance units (km or miles):

17

Instruments

1indicating the driving range in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You can continue driving for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before the engine starting prevention system is triggered.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Starting prevented Every time the ignition is switched on, the message «Emissions control fault: Starting prevented» or «NO START IN» is displayed.

To restart the engine Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Distance recorders With the ignition on, the distances are permanently indicated. They are deactivated about 30 seconds after switching the ignition off. They are displayed when the driver’s door is opened, and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

When travelling abroad, you may have to change the distance units (km or miles):

the road speed must be displayed in the local countrys official unit (km/h or mph). The unit is changed via the screen configuration menu, with the vehicle stationary.

Total distance recorder

This recorder measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial registration.

Trip distance recorder

It measures the distance travelled since it was reset by the driver. Resetting the trip recorder

With the ignition on, press the button until dashes appear.

Equipment configuration for vehicles without screen If your vehicle does not have an audio system or a touch screen, you can still configure some equipment by using the LCD text instrument panel display.

Control buttons

A long press of this button takes you to the configuration menu, a short press

confirms. Pressing one of these buttons lets you move in a menu, a list; change

a value.

18

Instruments

Pressing this button takes you back up a level or cancels the current operation.

Display screen menus LIGHTING :

GUIDE LAMPS (Guide-me-home lighting), DIR HEADLAMPS (Directional headlamps).

DRIVE ASSIST : COLLISION ALT (Automatic emergency

braking), VIGILANCE ALT (Fatigue Detection System), ADVISED SPEED (Speed limit recognition).

COMFORT : REAR WIPE REV (Automatic windscreen

wiper when reversing). For more information on one of these functions, refer to the corresponding section.

Monochrome screen C Displays in the screen

This displays the following information:

the time, the date, the exterior temperature (this flashes if there is a risk of ice), visual parking sensor information, the audio source being listened to, telephone or hands-free kit information, alert messages, settings menus for the screen and the vehicle equipment.

Controls

On the audio system control panel, use the following buttons: MENU Access the main menu 5 or 6Scroll through the items on the screen 7 or 8Change a setting value OK Validate Back Abandon the current operation

Main menu

Press the MENU button for access to the main menu:

«Multimedia», «Telephone», «Trip computer», «Connections», «Personalisation-configuration».

Press the «7» or «8» button to select the menu required, then confirm by pressing the OK button.

Multimedia» menu

With the audio system on, this menu allows you to activate or deactivate radio functions (RDS, DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display) or set the media play mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat). For more information about the «Multimedia application, refer to the «Audio equipment and telematics section.

Telephone» menu

With the audio system on, this menu allows you to make a call or view the various telephone directories. For more information about the «Telephone application, refer to the «Audio equipment and telematics section.

Trip computer» menu

This menu allows you to consult information concerning the status of the vehicle.

Warning log It summarises the alert messages of the functions, displaying them on the screen.

Connections» menu

With the audio system on, this menu allows a Bluetooth device (telephone, media player) to be paired and the connection mode to be defined (hands-free kit, playing of audio files). For more information about the «Connections application, refer to the «Audio equipment and telematics section.

Personalisation- configuration» menu

This menu gives access to the following functions: Define the vehicle parameters». Display configuration».

19

Instruments

1Trip computer» menu

This menu allows you to consult information concerning the status of the vehicle.

Warning log It summarises the alert messages of the functions, displaying them on the screen.

Connections» menu

With the audio system on, this menu allows a Bluetooth device (telephone, media player) to be paired and the connection mode to be defined (hands-free kit, playing of audio files). For more information about the «Connections application, refer to the «Audio equipment and telematics section.

Personalisation- configuration» menu

This menu gives access to the following functions: Define the vehicle parameters». Display configuration».

Define the vehicle parameters This menu allows the following equipment to be activated / deactivated, depending on the version and/or country of sale: «Lighting» «Directional headlamps», «Follow-me-home headlamps», «Welcome lighting». «Comfort» «Rear wipe in reverse gear». «Driving assistance» Auto. emergency braking, Fatigue Detection System, Speed recommendation. For more information on the different equipment, refer to the corresponding sections. Display configuration This menu allows you to change the language used by the display from a defined list. This menu gives access to the following settings: Choice of units». Date and time adjustment». Display personalisation». Choice of language».

As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations that require

sustained attention when stationary.

Touch screen The touch screen gives access to:

the heating / air conditioning controls, menus for adjusting settings for vehicle functions and systems, audio system and telephone controls and the display of associated information, and, depending on equipment, allows: the display of alert messages and the visual parking sensors information, the permanent display of the time and the exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp appears when there is a risk of ice), access to the internet services and navigation system controls and the display of associated information.

As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations that require

sustained attention with the vehicle stationary. Some functions are not accessible when driving.

Recommendations This screen is of the capacitive type. Use is possible in all temperatures. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Use a soft clean cloth to clean the touch screen.

20

Instruments

Workflow Use the buttons on each side of the touch screen to access the menus, then use the buttons that appear on the touch screen. Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or 2 pages. To deactivate / activate a function, press OFF/ ON. To modify a setting (lighting duration, etc.) or access additional information, press the symbol for the function.

After a few moments with no action on the secondary page, the primary page is

displayed automatically.

Use this button to confirm.

Use this button to return to the previous page.

Menus

7-inch touch screen

9-inch touch screen Home page. Allows access to the menu carousel on

the 9-inch touch screen. Radio Media. Refer to the «Audio equipment and

telematics» section. Mirror Screen or Connected navigation (depending on equipment).

Refer to the «Audio equipment and telematics» section.

Air conditioning. Allows adjustment of the various settings

for temperature, air flow, etc. For more information on Heating, Manual air conditioning and Automatic air conditioning, refer to the corresponding sections.

Telephone. Refer to the «Audio equipment and

telematics» section. Applications. Allows the display of the connected

services available. See Audio equipment and telematics section.

Vehicle or Driving (depending on equipment).

Allows the activation, deactivation and adjustment of settings for certain functions. The functions accessible from this menu are arranged under two tabs: «Vehicle settings» and «Driving functions«.

Volume control/mute. Refer to the «Audio equipment and

telematics» section.

Press with three fingers on the touch screen to access the menu carousel.

Upper bar Certain information is displayed permanently in the upper bar of the touch screen: Reminder of the air conditioning information, and access to a simplified menu (temperature and air flow adjustment only). Reminder of information from the RadioMedia and Telephone menus and navigation instructions (depending on equipment). Notification zone (SMS and Email) (depending on equipment).

Access to the Settings.

Trip computer Displays information related to the current trip (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).

Information display Details are displayed successively. The current information tab with:

trip mileage. range. current fuel consumption. the Stop & Start time counter. information on the speed limit recognition

system (depending on version). Trip 1 with:

average speed. average fuel consumption. distance travelled for the first trip.

Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, a 2nd trip is available. Trip 2 with:

average speed. average fuel consumption. distance travelled. for the second trip.

Trips 1 and 2 are independent and are used identically. For example, trip 1 can be used for daily figures and trip 2 for monthly figures.

21

Instruments

1Information display Details are displayed successively. The current information tab with:

trip mileage. range. current fuel consumption. the Stop & Start time counter. information on the speed limit recognition

system (depending on version). Trip 1 with:

average speed. average fuel consumption. distance travelled for the first trip.

Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, a 2nd trip is available. Trip 2 with:

average speed. average fuel consumption. distance travelled. for the second trip.

Trips 1 and 2 are independent and are used identically. For example, trip 1 can be used for daily figures and trip 2 for monthly figures.

Press the button located on the end of the wiper control stalk.

Or, depending on equipment, press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel.

Trip reset With LCD text or matrix instrument panel

When the trip is displayed, press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk for more than two seconds.

Or, depending on equipment, press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel for more than two seconds.

With LCD text instrument panel

When the trip is displayed, press the reset button in the instrument panel for more than two seconds.

A few definitions Range (miles or km)

22

Instruments

Distance that can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank (based on the

average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled). This value may vary following a change in driving style or terrain, leading to a significant change in current fuel consumption. When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 miles (100 km). Dashes appearing permanently in place of numbers while driving indicates a malfunction. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Current consumption (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

Calculated during the last few seconds.

This function is only displayed at speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h).

Average consumption (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

Average speed (mph or km/h)

Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

Distance travelled (miles or km)

Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

Stop & Start time counter (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)

If your vehicle is fitted with the Stop & Start function, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. The time counter is reset each time the ignition is switched on.

Lighting dimmer This control lets you manually adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and touch screen according to the exterior light level. It only works when the vehicles lamps (other than daytime running lamps) are on, and in night mode.

Two buttons

With the lamps on, press button A to increase the brightness of the lighting, or button B to decrease it. Release the button when the desired brightness is reached.

Touch screen

In the Settings menu, select «Brightness«. Adjust the brightness by pressing the arrows or moving the slider.

The brightness can be set differently for day mode and night mode.

Setting the date and time Without audio system

Set the date and time via the instrument panel display.

Press and hold this button.

Press one of these buttons to select the setting to be changed. Briefly press this button to confirm.

Press one of these buttons to change the setting and confirm again to record

the change.

23

Instruments

1Setting the date and time Without audio system

Set the date and time via the instrument panel display.

Press and hold this button.

Press one of these buttons to select the setting to be changed. Briefly press this button to confirm.

Press one of these buttons to change the setting and confirm again to record

the change.

With audio system

Press the MENU button to access the main menu. Press the «7» or «8» buttons to select the «Personalisation-configuration» menu, then press the OK button. Press the «5» or «6» buttons to select the «Display configuration» menu, then press the OK button. Press the «5» or «6» buttons to select the «Date and time adjustment» item, then press the OK button. Press the «7» or «8» buttons to select the setting to modify. Confirm it by pressing the OK button. Adjust the settings one by one, confirming with the OK button. Press the «5» or «6» buttons, then the OK button to select the OK box and confirm or press the Back button to cancel.

24

Access

Remote control / Key Remote control function

Depending on version, the remote control can be used to perform the following remote functions: Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. Unlocking/Locking the boot. Unlocking/Locking the fuel filler flap. Remote operation of lighting. Folding/Unfolding the door mirrors. Activating/Deactivating the alarm. Locating the vehicle. Activating the vehicles electronic immobiliser. The remote control includes a conventional key that allows the central unlocking/locking of the vehicle using the door lock, as well as starting and switching off the engine. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of the remote control, the central locking, the battery,

etc. For more information on the Back-up procedures, refer to the corresponding section.

Built-in key Depending on version, using the remote control built-in key, you can perform the following operations: Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. Activation/Deactivation of the manual child lock. Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger airbag. Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors. Switching on the ignition and starting/switching off the engine. Without Keyless Entry and Start

To unfold or fold the key, press the button. With Keyless Entry and Start

To eject the key or put it back in place, pull and hold the button.

Unlocking the vehicle Press this button to unlock the vehicle.

When the unlocking button is pressed, the flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: The unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm. The deactivation of the alarm for other versions.

Locking the vehicle Normal locking

Press this button.

When the locking button is pressed, the lighting of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals: The locking of the vehicle for versions without alarm.

The activation of the alarm for other versions.

If one of the doors or the boot is not fully closed, the locking does not take place.

However, if the vehicle is equipped with the alarm, it is fully activated after about 45 seconds. If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and there is then no action on the doors or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock itself again after about 30 seconds. If the alarm was activated beforehand, the alarm is reactivated automatically. Locking also deactivates the central locking button, located on the dashboard.

Deadlocking

Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also disables the

central locking button. The horn remains operational. Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Press the locking button again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting of the direction indicators for versions without alarm).

25

Access

2 The activation of the alarm for other versions.

If one of the doors or the boot is not fully closed, the locking does not take place.

However, if the vehicle is equipped with the alarm, it is fully activated after about 45 seconds. If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and there is then no action on the doors or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock itself again after about 30 seconds. If the alarm was activated beforehand, the alarm is reactivated automatically. Locking also deactivates the central locking button, located on the dashboard.

Deadlocking

Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also disables the

central locking button. The horn remains operational. Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Press the locking button again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting of the direction indicators for versions without alarm).

Locating the vehicle This function helps you to spot your vehicle from a distance, with the vehicle locked: The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come on for 30 seconds.

Press this button.

Pressing again before the end of the timed period switches off the lamps immediately.

Advice Remote control The remote control is a sensitive, high-

frequency device; avoid handling it in your pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally unlocking the vehicle. Avoid pressing the remote control buttons while out of range of the vehicle, due to the risk of rendering the remote control inoperative. It would then be necessary to reset it. The remote control does not work when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off.

Anti-theft protection Do not modify the electronic vehicle

immobiliser, as this might result in malfunctions. For vehicles with a key ignition switch, remember to remove the key and turn the steering wheel to engage the steering lock.

Locking the vehicle Driving with the doors locked could make

it more difficult for the emergency services to enter the passenger compartment in an emergency. As a safety precaution, remove the key from the ignition or take the electronic key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

Purchasing a second-hand vehicle Have the key codes memorised by a

CITRON dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones able to start the vehicle.

Keyless Entry and Start

This system allows the unlocking, locking and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the

26

Access

electronic key on your person in the recognition zone A.

Unlocking the vehicle

With the electronic key on your person in recognition zone A, pass your hand behind the door handle of one of the front doors, or press the tailgate opening control.

The flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds signals:

the unlocking of the vehicle for versions without alarm. deactivation of the alarm for other versions.

Locking the vehicle Normal locking

With the electronic key in recognition zone A, press your finger or thumb on the handle of one of the front doors (at the markings) to lock the vehicle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the keys is left inside the vehicle.

For safety and theft protection reasons, never leave the electronic key in the

vehicle, even when you are close to it. It is recommended that you keep it on your person.

Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, etc.) on the inner surface of the door

handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.

Deadlocking

Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative. It also disables the

central locking button. The horn remains operational. Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

With the electronic key in recognition zone A, press your finger or thumb on the handle of one of the front doors (at the markings) to lock the vehicle. Within five seconds, press the front door handle again to deadlock the vehicle.

If one of the doors or the boot is still open or if the electronic key for the Keyless

Entry and Start system has been left inside the vehicle, central locking will not take place. However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds.

If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot are not subsequently opened, the

vehicle will automatically lock itself again after

about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically.

As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle, even for a short time, without

taking the Keyless Entry and Start systems electronic key with you. Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if the key is present in one of the defined areas while the vehicle is unlocked.

To preserve the battery charge in the electronic key and the vehicle’s battery,

the «hands-free» functions are set to hibernation mode after 21 days without use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the electronic key in the reader. For more information on starting with the Keyless Entry and Start system, refer to the corresponding section.

Electrical interference The electronic key may not operate if

close to certain electronic devices such as telephones (switched on or on standby) or laptop computers, strong magnetic fields, etc.

27

Access

2about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically.

As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle, even for a short time, without

taking the Keyless Entry and Start systems electronic key with you. Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if the key is present in one of the defined areas while the vehicle is unlocked.

To preserve the battery charge in the electronic key and the vehicle’s battery,

the «hands-free» functions are set to hibernation mode after 21 days without use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the electronic key in the reader. For more information on starting with the Keyless Entry and Start system, refer to the corresponding section.

Electrical interference The electronic key may not operate if

close to certain electronic devices such as telephones (switched on or on standby) or laptop computers, strong magnetic fields, etc.

Back-up procedures Lost keys, remote control, electronic key Go to a CITRON dealer with the vehicle’s registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label bearing the key code. The CITRON dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code, enabling a new key to be ordered.

Complete unlocking/locking of the vehicle with the key Use this procedure in the following situations: Remote control battery discharged. Remote control malfunction. Vehicle battery discharged. Vehicle in an area subject to strong electromagnetic interference. In the first case, change the remote control battery. In the second case, reinitialise the remote control. Refer to the corresponding sections.

Insert the key into the door lock. Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ lock the vehicle. Turn the key towards the rear again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will not be activated when locking with the

key. If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds when the door is opened; switch on the ignition to stop it.

Central locking not functioning Use these procedures in the following cases: Central locking malfunction. Battery disconnected or discharged.

In the event of a malfunction of the central locking system, the battery must

be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.

Front left-hand door Insert the key into the lock and turn it towards the front or rear of the vehicle to lock or unlock the door.

28

Access

Other doors Unlocking Pull the interior door opening control. Locking Open the doors. For the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on. Refer to the corresponding section.

Remove the black cap, located on the edge of the door, using the key. Insert the key into the socket without forcing it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the door. Remove the key and refit the black cap. Close the doors and check from the outside that the vehicle is locked.

Changing the battery A message is displayed on the instrument panel when the battery needs changing.

Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.

Without Keyless Entry and Start

With Keyless Entry and Start

Unclip the cover by inserting a small screwdriver in the slot and lift the cover. Remove the flat battery from its housing. Put the new battery in place, respecting the polarity. Start by inserting it into the contacts

located in the corner, then clip the cover onto the unit. Reinitialise the remote control. For more information on Reinitialising the remote control, refer to the corresponding section.

Do not throw remote control batteries away, as they contain metals that are

harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved disposal point.

This equipment contains a button type battery.

Do not swallow the battery. Risk of chemical burns! Swallowing the battery can cause serious internal burning in only 2 hours and can be fatal. If batteries have been swallowed or inserted into a part of the body, seek immediate medical advice. Keep new and used batteries out of the reach of children. If the battery compartment does not close properly, stop using the product and keep it out of the reach of children.

Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with an incorrect type!

Replace the battery with the same type.

Risk of explosion or leaking of inflammable liquid or gas!

Do not use in/store in/place in an environment where the temperature is extremely high or where the pressure is extremely low due to very high altitude. Do not try to burn, crush or cut a used battery.

Reinitialising the remote control Following replacement of the battery or in the event of a fault, it may be necessary to reinitialise the remote control.

Without Keyless Entry and Start

Switch the ignition off. Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). Immediately press the closed padlock button for a few seconds.

29

Access

2Risk of explosion or leaking of inflammable liquid or gas!

Do not use in/store in/place in an environment where the temperature is extremely high or where the pressure is extremely low due to very high altitude. Do not try to burn, crush or cut a used battery.

Reinitialising the remote control Following replacement of the battery or in the event of a fault, it may be necessary to reinitialise the remote control.

Without Keyless Entry and Start

Switch the ignition off. Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). Immediately press the closed padlock button for a few seconds.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch. The remote control is now fully operational again.

With Keyless Entry and Start

Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into the remote control) into the lock to open the vehicle.

Place the electronic key against the back-up reader on the steering column and hold it there until the ignition is switched on. With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, while in mode P, depress the brake pedal.

Switch on the ignition by pressing the «START/STOP» button. If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Doors Opening From outside After unlocking the vehicle or with the «Keyless Entry and Start» system electronic key in the recognition zone, pull the door handle.

From inside Pull the interior opening control of a door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.

30

Access

Boot Opening

With the vehicle unlocked or with the Keyless Entry and Start electronic key in the recognition zone, press the central tailgate control. Lift the tailgate. For more information on the Remote control or on the Keyless Entry and Start, please refer to the corresponding section.

If there is a fault or if it is difficult to move the tailgate when opening or closing it,

have it checked as soon as possible by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to prevent the problem becoming worse, and potentially causing the tailgate to drop and thereby inflicting serious injuries.

Closing Lower the tailgate using one of the interior grab handles.

In the event of a malfunction or if you experience difficulty opening or closing

the tailgate, have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially causing serious injury.

Back-up release To manually unlock the boot in the event of a battery or central locking failure.

Unlocking Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.

Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the boot. Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.

Central locking

Manual Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle (doors and boot) from inside the passenger compartment. The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the central locking of the vehicle.

Central locking does not take place if any of the doors are open.

When locking/deadlocking from the outside

When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes and the button is deactivated. After normal locking, pull one of the interior door controls to unlock the vehicle.

After deadlocking, you must use the remote control, the «Keyless Entry and Start» system or the built-in key to unlock the vehicle.

Automatic (anti-intrusion security) The doors and boot lock automatically while driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated by default): Press the button until an audible signal is triggered and a confirmation message appears.

Transporting long or voluminous objects

Press the central locking control to drive with the boot open and the doors locked. Otherwise, every time the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the sound of the locks rebounding will be heard and an alert will be displayed. Pressing the central locking button unlocks the vehicle. Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is temporary.

31

Access

2 After deadlocking, you must use the remote control, the «Keyless Entry and Start» system or the built-in key to unlock the vehicle.

Automatic (anti-intrusion security) The doors and boot lock automatically while driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated by default): Press the button until an audible signal is triggered and a confirmation message appears.

Transporting long or voluminous objects

Press the central locking control to drive with the boot open and the doors locked. Otherwise, every time the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the sound of the locks rebounding will be heard and an alert will be displayed. Pressing the central locking button unlocks the vehicle. Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is temporary.

Alarm

System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. Exterior perimeter monitoring The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. Interior volumetric monitoring The system checks for any variation in volume in the passenger compartment. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle. Anti-tilt monitoring The system checks for any change in the attitude of the vehicle. The alarm goes off if the vehicle is lifted or moved.

When the vehicle is parked, the alarm will not be triggered if the vehicle is

knocked.

Self-protection function The system checks whether any of its components are out of service. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring is put out of service or damaged.

Work on the alarm system Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Locking the vehicle with full alarm system Activation/Deactivation Lock or deadlock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control or the «Keyless Entry and Start» system (confirmed by the button’s red indicator lamp coming on/going out and the direction indicators coming on). The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.

If the vehicle automatically locks itself again (as happens if a door or the boot is

not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), the monitoring system is automatically reactivated.

If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not properly closed, the vehicle is not locked,

32

Access

but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after 45 seconds, at the same time as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.

Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid the unwanted triggering of the alarm, in certain cases such as: Slightly open window. Washing the vehicle. Changing a wheel. Towing the vehicle. Transport on a ship or ferry.

Deactivating the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds press the alarm button until its red indicator lamp is on fixed. Get out of the vehicle. Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Start system. Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated; the button’s red indicator lamp flashes once every second.

To take effect, this deactivation must be carried out after each time the ignition is

switched off.

Reactivating the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Start system. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. Reactivate all monitoring by locking the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Start system. The red indicator lamp in the button once again flashes every second.

Triggering of the alarm This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 seconds. The interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered ten times in succession. When the vehicle is unlocked, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button indicates that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.

Failure of the remote control To deactivate the monitoring functions: Unlock the vehicle using the key in the driver’s door lock. Open the door; the alarm is triggered. Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key (built-in the remote control) in the driver’s door lock.

Malfunction When the ignition is switched on, the fixed lighting of the red indicator lamp in the button indicates a system malfunction. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Panoramic sunroof The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind that can be opened independently. Opening the sunroof automatically opens the blind. To operate the panoramic sunroof or the blind, use the buttons in the roof console.

A. Sunroof blind control

B. Sunroof control

The sunroof or blind can be operated when the ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged enough), with the engine running, in STOP mode of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds after turning off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. Precautions

Do not put your head or arms through the sunroof while the vehicle is moving — risk

of serious injury!

Ensure that any luggage or accessories carried on the roof bars do not interfere

with the movement of the sunroof. Do not place heavy loads on the movable glass panel of the sunroof.

If the sunroof is wet, following a rain shower or washing the vehicle, wait until

it is completely dry before operating it. Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by snow or ice — risk of damage! Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or ice from the sunroof.

33

Access

2B. Sunroof control

The sunroof or blind can be operated when the ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged enough), with the engine running, in STOP mode of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds after turning off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. Precautions

Do not put your head or arms through the sunroof while the vehicle is moving — risk

of serious injury!

Ensure that any luggage or accessories carried on the roof bars do not interfere

with the movement of the sunroof. Do not place heavy loads on the movable glass panel of the sunroof.

If the sunroof is wet, following a rain shower or washing the vehicle, wait until

it is completely dry before operating it. Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by snow or ice — risk of damage! Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or ice from the sunroof.

Regularly check the condition of the sunroof seals (e.g. presence of dust,

dead leaves). If using a car wash, check first that the roof is correctly closed and keep the high-pressure jet at least 30 centimetres from the seals.

Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof open.

Operation When opening the sunroof fully, the movable glass moves to a partially open position, then slides over the roof. Any intermediate position is possible.

Depending on the speed of the vehicle, the partially open position may vary to

improve the acoustics.

Before operating the sunroof or blind control buttons, ensure that no object or

person might prevent the movement. Be particularly aware of children when operating the sunroof or blind. If something is trapped when operating the sunroof or blind, you should reverse the movement of the sunroof or blind by pressing the control in question. The driver must ensure that passengers use the sunroof and blind correctly.

Anti-pinch system If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle when closing, the movement is automatically reversed. The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h). Opening/Closing To open the sunroof or the blind, use the part of the button located towards the rear of the vehicle. To close the sunroof or the blind, use the part of the button located towards the front of the vehicle. Operation of buttons Pressing a button beyond its point of resistance directly opens or closes the sunroof or blind fully. Pressing the button again stops the current movement. When holding a button (without going beyond the point of resistance), the movement of the sunroof or blind stops when this button is released. When the sunroof is closed: pressing once without passing the point of resistance moves it to a partially open position. When the sunroof is partially open: pressing once without passing the point of resistance opens or closes it fully.

The sunroof and windows, then the blind, can be closed by holding down the door

34

Access

locking control. The manoeuvre stops as soon as the locking control is released.

Closing of the blind is limited by the position of the sunroof: the blind cannot

go further than the front of the movable glass. During simultaneous movements of the sunroof and blind, the blind automatically stops or resumes movement depending on the position of the sunroof.

Reinitialisation Following reconnection of the battery or in the event of a fault or jerky movement of the sunroof or blind, reinitialisation is required. Check that nothing is interfering with the sunroof or blind and that the seals are clean. With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof and blind. Press and hold the front part of button B, until the sunroof and blind move slightly, then hold for a further 1 second before releasing. Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold the front part of button B. The blind and the sunroof will open and close, one after the other. When both are completely closed again, hold for a further 2 seconds and release.

If there is an operating fault, restart the whole procedure.

Electric windows

1. Left-hand front 2. Right-hand front 3. Right-hand rear (depending on version) 4. Left-hand rear (depending on version) 5. Deactivation of electric window controls

located by rear seats (depending on version)

Manual operation To open or close the window, press or pull the switch, without going past the point of resistance. The window stops as soon as the switch is released.

Automatic operation of the front electric windows To open or close the window, press or pull the switch fully, beyond the resistance point: the window opens or closes completely when the

switch is released. Pressing the switch again stops the movement of the window.

The electric window switches remain operational for approximately one minute

after the key has been removed. Once this time has elapsed, the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them, switch the ignition on again.

Anti-pinch function of the front electric windows When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and immediately partially lowers again. In the event of unwanted opening of the window when closing automatically, press the switch until the window opens completely, then pull the switch immediately until the window closes. Continue to hold the switch for approximately one second after the window has closed. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during this operation.

Deactivating the rear window controls (depending on version)

For the safety of your children, press switch 5 to prevent operation of the windows of the rear doors, irrespective of their position. When the indicator is on, the rear controls are inhibited. When the indicator is off, the rear controls are active.

Reinitialising the electric windows After reconnecting the battery, or in the event of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The anti-pinch function is disabled during the following sequence of operations. For each window: Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window is fully closed. Continue to pull the control for at least one second after the window reaches the closed position.

35

Access

2Deactivating the rear window controls (depending on version)

For the safety of your children, press switch 5 to prevent operation of the windows of the rear doors, irrespective of their position. When the indicator is on, the rear controls are inhibited. When the indicator is off, the rear controls are active.

Reinitialising the electric windows After reconnecting the battery, or in the event of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The anti-pinch function is disabled during the following sequence of operations. For each window: Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window is fully closed. Continue to pull the control for at least one second after the window reaches the closed position.

If an electric window meets an obstacle during operation, the movement of the

window must be reversed. To do this, press the relevant control. When the driver operates the passengers electric window controls, it is important to ensure that nothing can prevent the window from closing properly. It is important to ensure that passengers use the electric windows correctly. Pay particular attention to children when operating the windows. Be aware of passengers and/or other persons present when closing windows remotely using the electronic key. Do not put your head or arms through the open windows when the vehicle is moving — risk of serious injury!

36

Ease of use and comfort

Correct driving position For safety reasons, adjustments must only be made when the vehicle is

stationary.

Before taking to the road and to make the most of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and controls, carry out these adjustments in the following order: head restraint height. seat backrest angle. seat cushion height. longitudinal seat position. steering wheel height and reach. rear view mirror and door mirrors.

Once these adjustments have been made, check that the instrument panel

can be viewed correctly from your driving position.

Front head restraints Adjusting the height

Upwards: Pull the head restraint up to the desired position; you can feel the head restraint clicking into position. Downwards: Press lug A to lower the head restraint.

The head restraint is correctly adjusted when its upper edge is level with the top

of the occupant’s head.

Removing a head restraint Pull the head restraint fully up.

Press lug A to release the head restraint and raise it fully. Stow the head restraint securely.

Refitting a head restraint Insert the head restraint rods into the guides in the corresponding seat backrest. Push the head restraint fully down. Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down. Adjust the height of the head restraint.

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they should be in place and

adjusted for the occupant of the seat.

Front seats For safety reasons, seat adjustments must only be made when the vehicle is

stationary.

Adjustments Longitudinal

Raise the control bar and slide the seat forwards or backwards. Release the control bar to lock the seat in position on one of the notches.

Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is no person or object

that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or of jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat.

Height (driver only)

Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, until you obtain the position required.

37

Ease of use and comfort

3 Raise the control bar and slide the seat forwards or backwards. Release the control bar to lock the seat in position on one of the notches.

Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is no person or object

that might prevent the full travel of the seat. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or of jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat.

Height (driver only)

Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, until you obtain the position required.

Backrest angle (driver)

Turn the knob to obtain the desired angle. (passenger seat)

Turn knob B or pull control B upwards to obtain the desired angle. When the backrest is correctly angled, release the control to lock it.

To prevent the backrest from suddenly folding forwards and hitting you, hold the

backrest with your back or hand while adjusting.

Passenger seat backrest table position

Check that no object, either on or underneath the seat, could hinder its

movement.

Place the head rests in the low position. Pull control B at the back to the front and tilt the backrest forward. To return to the normal position, guide the backrest backwards until it locks into place. This position, together with that of the rear seats, allows you to transport long objects inside the vehicle.

38

Ease of use and comfort

Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might

prevent the full travel of the seat. When the front passenger seat is fully folded, only the outer rear seat behind the driver can be occupied by a passenger.

Do not place hard, heavy or sharp objects in the centre of the backrest to

ensure that you don’t damage rear lining behind the backrest. When sharp deceleration occurs, objects placed on the folded backrest can turn into dangerous projectiles.

Heated seats

The function is active only with the engine running and when the outside temperature is below 20C.

Use the adjustment knob to switch on and select the level of heating required: 0 : Off. 1 : Low. 2 : Medium. 3 : High.

The front seats can be heated individually.

Do not use the function when the seat is not occupied.

Reduce the heating intensity as soon as possible. When the seat and passenger compartment have reached a satisfactory temperature, switch the function off; reducing electrical consumption in turn decreases energy consumption.

Prolonged use of heated seats is not recommended for people with sensitive

skin. There is a risk of burns for people whose perception of heat is impaired (e.g. illness, taking medication). To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent a short circuit: Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the seat. Do not kneel or stand on the seat. Do not spill liquids onto the seat. Never use the heating function if the seat is damp.

Rear seats Bench seat with a fixed cushion or on rails (depending on version) and split folding backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot loading space.

Rear head restraints

They have two positions: A high position, for when the seat is in use:

Pull the head restraint fully up. A low position, for stowing, when the seat is not in use:

Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down.

The rear head restraints can be removed.

39

Ease of use and comfort

3Removing a head restraint

Release the backrest using control 1. Tilt the backrest slightly forwards. Pull the head restraint fully up. Press the lug A to release the head restraint and remove it completely. Refitting a head restraint Insert the head restraint rods into the guides in the corresponding backrest. Push the head restraint fully down. Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down.

Never drive with passengers seated at the rear when the head restraints are

removed; the head restraints should be in place and in the high position. The head restraint for the centre seat and those for the outer seats are not interchangeable.

Longitudinal seat adjustment (depending on version)

Folding or unfolding the seats must only be done with the vehicle stationary.

Each 2/3 — 1/3 part can be adjusted individually.

Raise the control and slide the bench seat forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the backrest angle (depending on version) Several adjustment positions are possible.

Move the seat forward. Pull the strap forward, then tilt the backrest to the desired position.

Sit in the seat to perform the adjustments.

Folding the backrests Manoeuvring the seat backrests must only be done with the vehicle stationary.

First steps:

40

Ease of use and comfort

Lower the head restraints. If necessary, move the front seats forward. Pull the seats fully back (depending on version). Check that no person or object will interfere with folding down the backrests (clothing, luggage, etc.). Check that the outer seat belts are properly tensioned along the pillars, that the central belt is stowed and that the tongues of the three belts are correctly in the storage position. Depending on version, the seat backrests are equipped with a handle (bench seat with fixed cushions) or a strap (bench seat on rails).

Operate backrest release handle 1 or pull strap 2. Guide backrest 3 down to the horizontal position.

If the backrest is equipped with a strap, it it not necessary to guide it down.

If the backrest is equipped with a handle, its red indicator is visible when it is

released.

Repositioning the backrests First check that the outer seat belts are lying vertically flat alongside the backrest

latching rings.

Put backrest 3 in the upright position and push it firmly to latch it home. Check that the release handle 1 has properly returned to its position and that the red indicator is no longer visible (depending on version). Ensure that the outer seat belts are not trapped during the operation.

Please note: an incorrectly latched backrest compromises the safety of

passengers in the event of sudden braking or an impact. The contents of the boot may be thrown forward — risk of severe injury!

Steering wheel adjustment

When stationary, pull the control to release the steering wheel. Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position. Push the control to lock the steering wheel.

For safety reasons, these adjustments must only be carried out with the vehicle

stationary.

41

Ease of use and comfort

3Steering wheel adjustment

When stationary, pull the control to release the steering wheel. Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position. Push the control to lock the steering wheel.

For safety reasons, these adjustments must only be carried out with the vehicle

stationary.

Mirrors Door mirrors

Demisting/De-icing The demisting/de-icing of the door mirrors works with the demisting/de-icing of the

rear screen. For more information on Rear screen demisting/de-icing, refer to the corresponding section.

Adjustment

Move control A or turn control C (depending on the version you have) to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror. Move control B or C (depending on the version you have) in any of the four directions to adjust. Return control A or C (depending on the version you have) to its centre position.

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account when assessing the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

Manual folding The mirrors can be folded manually (parking obstruction, narrow garage, etc.). Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.

42

Ease of use and comfort

Electric folding Depending on equipment, the door mirrors can be folded electrically.

From the inside, with the ignition on, place control A in the central position. Pull control A backwards.

Lock the vehicle from the outside.

If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is

unlocked.

Electric unfolding The door mirrors are unfolded electrically when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or the «Keyless Entry and Start» system. Unless folding was selected with control A, pull the control in the central position towards the rear again.

Folding/unfolding when locking/unlocking the vehicle can be deactivated. Contact a

CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. If necessary, the mirrors can be folded manually.

Rear view mirror Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the

nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlights of other vehicles, etc.

Manual model Day/night position

Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle «night» position. Push the lever to change to the normal «day» position. Adjustment Adjust the mirror to the normal «day» position.

Automatic «electrochrome» model

The electrochrome system uses a sensor that detects the level of exterior brightness and that coming from the rear of the vehicle, in order to automatically and gradually switch between day and night usage.

To ensure optimum visibility while manoeuvring, the mirror automatically

brightens when reverse gear is engaged. The system is deactivated if the load in the boot exceeds the height of the load space cover or if the load space cover has items placed on it.

Ventilation Air intake The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the exterior, via the grille located at the base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation mode. Controls Depending on version, the controls are accessible in the Climate touch screen menu or are grouped together on the centre console panel. The demisting/de-icing controls for the windscreen and the rear screen are located below the touch screen, or on the centre console panel located below the audio system.

Air distribution

1. Windscreen demisting/de-icing vents 2. Front side window demisting/de-icing vents 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents 5. Air outlets to the front footwells 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells

Advice Using the ventilation and air conditioning system

To ensure that air is distributed evenly, keep the external air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and the air extractor in the boot free from obstructions. Do not cover the sunshine sensor located on the dashboard; this sensor is used to regulate the automatic air conditioning system.

43

Ease of use and comfort

3Air distribution

1. Windscreen demisting/de-icing vents 2. Front side window demisting/de-icing vents 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents 5. Air outlets to the front footwells 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells

Advice Using the ventilation and air conditioning system

To ensure that air is distributed evenly, keep the external air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and the air extractor in the boot free from obstructions. Do not cover the sunshine sensor located on the dashboard; this sensor is used to regulate the automatic air conditioning system.

Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to keep it in good working order. If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. When towing a large load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power, enhancing the towing capacity.

Avoid driving for too long with the ventilation off or with prolonged operation

of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and deterioration of the air quality!

If the interior temperature is very high after the vehicle has stood for a long

time in the sunshine, air the passenger compartment for a few moments. Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment.

Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of

water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly normal.

Servicing the ventilation and air conditioning system

Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly. We recommend using a composite passenger compartment filter. Its specific active additive helps protect against polluting gases and bad smells. To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, have it checked according to the recommendations in the Manufacturers service schedule.

Stop & Start The heating and air conditioning systems

only operate when the engine is running. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment. For more information on the Stop & Start system, refer to the corresponding section.

44

Ease of use and comfort

Heating/Manual air conditioning

The heating only operates when the engine is running.

The manual air conditioning operates when the engine is running. 1. Recirculation of interior air 2. Temperature adjustment 3. Air distribution adjustment 4. Air flow adjustment 5. Air conditioning on/off

Adjusting the temperature Turn the control from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your liking.

Adjusting the air flow Turn the knob 4 to obtain a comfortable air flow.

Adjusting the air distribution Central and side air vents.

Footwells.

Windscreen and side windows.

The air distribution can be adapted by combining the corresponding buttons.

Air conditioning ON / OFF The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. It enables you to: lower the temperature, in summer, increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3C.

Press this button to switch the air conditioning on/off.

The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off.

Automatic air conditioning The air conditioning operates with the engine running, but the ventilation and its controls can be accessed with the ignition on.

Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment are automatic.

Press the Climate menu button located on the touch screen or on the central

control bar (depending on version) to access the system controls.

1. Temperature adjustment 2. Air flow adjustment 3. Air distribution adjustment 4. Air conditioning on/off 5. Automatic Comfort programme on/off 6. Interior air recirculation 7. Access to the secondary page

Temperature adjustment Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) or decrease (blue) the value. The value displayed corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a precise temperature.

For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, press the

temperature setting button up or down until LO or HI is displayed.

Automatic comfort programme Activation/Deactivation Press button 5 to activate or deactivate the air conditioning systems automatic mode. The air conditioning system operates automatically: the system optimises the temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment based on the comfort level selected. Go to the secondary page by pressing button 7 to adjust the automatic comfort programme by choosing one of the available settings. Soft: provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow. Normal: offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation (default setting). Fast: provides strong and effective air flow.

Mode AUTO

To change the settings, press the button several times.

The setting is associated with AUTO mode only. However, when AUTO mode is deactivated, the previous selection is retained. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO mode if this was deactivated.

45

Ease of use and comfort

3For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, press the

temperature setting button up or down until LO or HI is displayed.

Automatic comfort programme Activation/Deactivation Press button 5 to activate or deactivate the air conditioning systems automatic mode. The air conditioning system operates automatically: the system optimises the temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment based on the comfort level selected. Go to the secondary page by pressing button 7 to adjust the automatic comfort programme by choosing one of the available settings. Soft: provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow. Normal: offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation (default setting). Fast: provides strong and effective air flow.

Mode AUTO

To change the settings, press the button several times.

The setting is associated with AUTO mode only. However, when AUTO mode is deactivated, the previous selection is retained. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO mode if this was deactivated.

In cold weather with the engine cold, the air flow is increased gradually until the

comfort setting has been reached, in order to limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger compartment. On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort setting requested, there is no need to alter the value displayed to reach the required level of comfort more quickly. The system automatically corrects the temperature difference as quickly as possible.

Adjusting the air flow Press one of the buttons 2 ( or +) to increase or decrease air flow. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in according to the request. When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, ventilation stops. «OFF» is displayed alongside the fan.

Adjusting the air distribution Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow distribution inside the passenger compartment.

Windscreen.

Central and side air vents.

Footwells.

Each press on a button activates or deactivates the function.

All three buttons can be activated simultaneously. In this case, priority is

given to the air flows from the central and side air vents, and from those in the passenger footwells.

Air conditioning on / off The air conditioning system is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. It is used to: lower the temperature in summer, increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3C. Press button 4 to turn the air conditioning on/ off. When the indicator lamp is on, the air conditioning function is activated.

The air conditioning cannot operate when the air flow adjustment is set to OFF.

Ventilation function with the ignition on When the ignition is switched on, you can use the ventilation system to adjust the air flow settings and the air distribution in the passenger compartment for a duration which depends on the battery charge.

46

Ease of use and comfort

This function does not operate the air conditioning.

Recirculation of interior air The intake of exterior air helps avoid and eliminate misting of the windscreen and side windows. The recirculation of interior air allows the passenger compartment to be isolated from polluted air in areas of heavy traffic and inside tunnels.

When required, this function also allows faster heating or cooling of the air in the

passenger compartment.

Press button 6 to recirculate the interior air or allow the intake of exterior air.

Avoid the prolonged recirculation of interior air in order to ensure a good

supply of fresh air and reduce the risk of misting (especially when several passengers are on board or when the air is cold/damp, etc.).

Front demist — defrost These markings on the control panels indicate the control positions for rapid

demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.

During the winter period, direct the side air vents towards the side windows to optimise their demisting and defrosting.

With control panel on the centre console On/Off To switch the system on, set the temperature and air flow controls to the corresponding marked position. To switch the system off, set the air flow control to position 0.

Press this button to direct air towards the «Windscreen» position. Its indicator

lamp comes on. Check that interior air recirculation is deactivated: its indicator lamp must be off.

With touch screen On/Off

To switch the system on, press this button.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows. Press this button again to switch it off. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

With Stop & Start, when demisting — defrosting has been activated, STOP

mode is not available.

Heated windscreen

In cold weather, this system heats the whole of the windscreen, as well as the area alongside the windscreen pillars. Without changing the settings for the air conditioning system, it allows faster release of the windscreen wiper blades when they are frozen to the windscreen and helps to prevent the accumulation of snow resulting from the operation of the windscreen wipers.

Switching on/off

With the engine running, press this button to activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an indicator lamp). The function is activated when the outside temperature drops below 0C. It is deactivated automatically when the engine is switched off.

Rear screen demist — defrost

Switching on/off To switch the system on, press this button to defrost the rear screen and, depending on

47

Ease of use and comfort

3Switching on/off

With the engine running, press this button to activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an indicator lamp). The function is activated when the outside temperature drops below 0C. It is deactivated automatically when the engine is switched off.

Rear screen demist — defrost

Switching on/off To switch the system on, press this button to defrost the rear screen and, depending on

version, the door mirrors. The indicator lamp in the button comes on. Defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current. To stop the defrosting operation before it automatically turns off, press this button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Switch off the defrosting of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as it is

no longer needed, as lower current consumption results in reduced fuel consumption.

Rear screen demisting — defrosting can only be operated when the engine is

running.

Front fittings

1. Sun visor 2. Glove box 3. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W). 4. USB socket 5. Open storage compartment 6. Front armrest

(depending on version) 7. Storage trays 8. Open or closed storage compartment

(depending on version)

Make sure you do not leave any item in the passenger compartment which could

act like a magnifying glass under the effect of the sun’s rays and cause a fire — risk of fire or damage to interior surfaces!

48

Ease of use and comfort

Sun visor

The sun visors are fitted with a vanity mirror with concealing flap and a card holder (or ticket holder).

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle towards you.

It contains the front passenger airbag deactivation switch.

Never drive with the glove box open when a passenger is at the front. It may

cause injury during sharp deceleration!

12 V accessory sockets

Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter.

Observe the maximum power rating to avoid damaging the accessory.

The connection of an electrical device not approved by CITRON, such as a

USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.

Wireless smartphone charger

This system allows wireless charging of a portable device such as a smartphone, using the magnetic induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1 standard. The portable device to be charged must be compatible with the Qi standard, either by design or by using a compatible holder or shell. A mat can also be used provided that it is approved by the Manufacturer. The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol. The charger works with the engine running and with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. Charging is managed by the smartphone. With the Keyless Entry and Start system, the chargers operation may be briefly disrupted when a door is opened or the ignition is switched off.

Charging With the charging area clear, place a device in its centre.

When the portable device is detected, the chargers indicator lamp lights up green. It remains lit for the whole time that the battery is being charged.

The system is not designed to charge multiple devices simultaneously.

Do not leave metal objects (e.g. coins, keys, vehicle remote control) in the

charging area while a device is being charged — risk of overheating or interrupting the charging!

Checking operation The state of the indicator lamp allows the operation of the charger to be monitored.

State of the indicator lamp

Meaning

Off Engine switched off. No compatible devices detected. Charging complete.

Fixed green Compatible portable device detected. Charging.

49

Ease of use and comfort

3

When the portable device is detected, the chargers indicator lamp lights up green. It remains lit for the whole time that the battery is being charged.

The system is not designed to charge multiple devices simultaneously.

Do not leave metal objects (e.g. coins, keys, vehicle remote control) in the

charging area while a device is being charged — risk of overheating or interrupting the charging!

Checking operation The state of the indicator lamp allows the operation of the charger to be monitored.

State of the indicator lamp

Meaning

Off Engine switched off. No compatible devices detected. Charging complete.

Fixed green Compatible portable device detected. Charging.

State of the indicator lamp

Meaning

Flashing orange Foreign object detected in the charging zone. Portable device not well centred in the charging zone.

Fixed orange Malfunction of the portable device’s battery meter. Device battery temperature too high. Charger malfunction.

If the indicator lamp is fixed orange: remove the device, then place it back in the centre of the charging zone. or remove the device and try again in a quarter of an hour. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

USB socket

The USB socket is located in the central storage compartment. The USB socket allows the connection of a portable device or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio files that are sent to your audio system and played via the vehicle’s speakers. These files can be managed using the steering- mounted controls or those on the touch screen.

When the USB socket is used, the portable device charges automatically.

While charging, a message is displayed if the power drawn by the portable device exceeds the current supplied by the vehicle. For more information about how to use this equipment, refer to the sections describing the audio and telematics systems.

50

Ease of use and comfort

Front armrest Height adjustment

Lower the armrest completely. Lift it again to the desired position (low, intermediate or high). Once it is in the high position, lift it to unlock it and bring it to the low position.

Card holder

This allows the storage of a toll ticket or a parking card for example.

Mats Fitting

When fitting it on the driver’s side, only use the mountings present on the carpet (a «click» indicates proper locking). The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.

Removing/refitting To remove it on the driver’s side, move the seat backwards and unclip the fasteners. To refit it, position the mat and secure it by pressing down. Check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Only use mats which are suited to the

fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used. Never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by CITRON may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control/ speed limiter. The approved mats have two fasteners located underneath the seat.

Rear fittings Seat backrest pockets They are arranged behind the front seats.

Side blinds Fitted to the windows in the second row, they protect the passenger compartment from the sun’s rays.

Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the hook B.

Always guide the blind slowly using the tab, both up and down.

Clothes hooks

They are located above each rear door.

Rear armrest and ski flap It gives direct access to the boot for transporting long objects.

51

Ease of use and comfort

3

Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the hook B.

Always guide the blind slowly using the tab, both up and down.

Clothes hooks

They are located above each rear door.

Rear armrest and ski flap It gives direct access to the boot for transporting long objects.

Folding from the passenger compartment

Pull strap 1 towards you to unlock the armrest. Guide armrest 3 down to the horizontal position. Folding from the boot

Pull strap 2 towards you to unlock the armrest.

Push armrest 3 down to the horizontal position.

Please note: when putting the armrest back in place, ensure that it is correctly

locked and that the red indicator of each strap is no longer visible. Otherwise, it could compromise the safety of passengers in the event of sudden braking or impact. The contents of the boot may be thrown forwards — risk of serious injury!

Boot fittings

1. Rear shelf 2. Hooks 3. Closed side storage compartments 4. 2-position boot floor 5. Stowing rings

52

Ease of use and comfort

6. Storage compartment beneath the boot carpet

Rear shelf

To remove the shelf: unhook the two cords, raise the shelf slightly to unclip it, then remove it. There are several ways of storing it: either upright behind the front seats,

or upright against the rear seats in the boot. To refit the shelf: position the shelf so that the notches are exactly on the fixing pins,

push the shelf down towards to pins to clip it, hook the two cords.

Hooks

They are used to hang shopping bags.

Take care to only hang lightweight bags.

Closed storage compartments

Pull upwards to unclip and open the removable grill. Depending on the version you have, the storage compartment on the right may contain the vehicle tools.

2-position boot floor This two-position floor allows the boot volume to be optimised using the lateral stops located on the sides: High position (100 kg max.): to obtain a flat floor up to the front seats, when the rear seats are folded down and fully back (depending on version). Low position: maximum boot volume.

To change the height: Lift and pull the floor towards you using its central handle, then use the lateral stops to move it. Push the floor fully forwards to place it in the desired position.

Ensure that the boot is empty before moving the boot floor.

Storage well

53

Ease of use and comfort

3

To change the height: Lift and pull the floor towards you using its central handle, then use the lateral stops to move it. Push the floor fully forwards to place it in the desired position.

Ensure that the boot is empty before moving the boot floor.

Storage well

Raise the boot floor as much as possible to access the storage well. Depending on version, it includes: a temporary puncture repair kit with the tool kit, a spare wheel alone or with the tool kit.

Courtesy lamps

1. Front courtesy lamp 2. Front reading lamps

3. Rear courtesy lamp 4. Rear reading lamps

Front and rear courtesy lamps

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

when the vehicle is unlocked. when the key is removed from the ignition switch. when a door is opened. when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate the vehicle. It switches off gradually: when the vehicle is locked. when the ignition is switched on. 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

In «Permanent lighting» mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes. In energy saving mode, approximately 30 seconds. With the engine running, unlimited.

When the front courtesy lamp is in the «Permanent lighting» position, the rear

courtesy lamp also comes on, unless it is in the «Permanently off» position. To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it in the «Permanently off» position.

54

Ease of use and comfort

Front and rear map reading lamps

With the ignition on, operate the corresponding switch.

Take care not to put anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

Interior ambient lighting Soft passenger compartment lighting improves visibility inside the vehicle in low-light conditions.

Boot lamp It comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed. The lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

When the ignition is off, approximately 10 minutes. In energy saving mode, approximately 30 seconds. With the engine running, unlimited.

55

Lighting and visibility

4Lighting control stalk Never look too closely at the light beam of LED technology lamps — risk of serious

eye injury!

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), misting on the

internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

Travelling abroad Vehicles equipped with manual

headlamp beam height adjustment: If planning to use your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the dipped beam headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

If one or more lamps fails, a message asks you to check the lamp or lamps

concerned.

Main lighting

Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime running lamps Sidelamps only

Dipped or main beam headlamps

Headlamp dipping

Pull the lighting control stalk to switch between dipped and main beam headlamps. In «AUTO» and sidelamps mode, pull the lighting control stalk to switch the main beam headlamps on directly («headlamp flash»).

Display Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp on the instrument panel confirms that the selected lighting is on.

Foglamps Rear foglamp

It only works if the sidelamps or dipped beam headlamps are on.

Rotate the ring forwards/backwards to turn it on/off. When the lighting is switched off automatically («AUTO» position) the foglamp and the sidelamps remain on.

56

Lighting and visibility

upwards or downwards, depending on the side of the traffic (e.g. when parking on the right, push the lighting control stalk down to light up on the left). This is confirmed by an audible signal and the lighting of the corresponding direction indicator lamp on the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the central position.

Automatic illumination of lamps With the lighting control stalk in the AUTO position and if a low level of exterior brightness is detected by the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They may also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ sunshine sensor, the vehicles lamps

come on and this warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and/or the display of a message.

Front foglamps and rear foglamp

They operate with the sidelamps or dipped beam headlamps on, in manual or

auto mode. Press and rotate the ring: forwards a 1st time to switch on the front foglamps. forwards a 2nd time to switch on the rear foglamp. backwards a 1st time to switch off the rear foglamp. backwards a 2nd time to switch off the front foglamps. When the lamps are switched off automatically (with AUTO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on. Rotate the ring backwards to switch the foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off.

Switching on the foglamps is prohibited in clear weather or in rain, both day and

night. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They must

only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may vary depending on country). Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when they are no longer necessary.

Switching off of the lighting when the ignition is switched off

When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps turn off immediately, except for the dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide- me-home lighting is activated.

Switching on the lamps after switching off the ignition

To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the ring to the «AUTO» position, then to the desired position. If the driver’s door is opened, a temporary audible signal warns the driver that the lamps are on. They will go off automatically after a period of time that depends on the level of charge in the battery (entering energy economy mode).

Direction indicators

Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control stalk, beyond the point of resistance.

If you keep the direction indicators on for more than 20 seconds, the volume of the

audible signal will increase if the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h).

Three flashes Press briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash 3 times.

Parking lamps (Depending on version) Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps on the traffic side only. Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the lighting control stalk

57

Lighting and visibility

4upwards or downwards, depending on the side of the traffic (e.g. when parking on the right, push the lighting control stalk down to light up on the left). This is confirmed by an audible signal and the lighting of the corresponding direction indicator lamp on the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the central position.

Automatic illumination of lamps With the lighting control stalk in the AUTO position and if a low level of exterior brightness is detected by the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They may also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ sunshine sensor, the vehicles lamps

come on and this warning lamp is displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and/or the display of a message.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor located at the top centre of the

windscreen behind the interior rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. For this

reason, the lighting will not come on automatically.

The inner surface of the windscreen may become misted up and affect the proper

operation of the rain/sunshine sensor. In humid and cold weather, demist the windscreen regularly.

Daytime running lamps/ Sidelamps These LED lamps at the front and rear of the vehicle light up automatically when the engine starts. They perform the following functions: Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk at position «AUTO» with adequate ambient light). Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position «AUTO» with low ambient light or «Sidelamps only» or «Dipped/main beam headlamps»).

In daytime running lamps mode, the diodes are brighter.

Guide-me-home and welcome lighting Guide-me-home lighting Automatic With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the «AUTO» position and when the light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off. You can activate/deactivate this function and adjust the guide-me-home lighting duration in the vehicle configuration menu. Manual

58

Lighting and visibility

The state of the system stays in the memory when switching off the ignition.

Operation If the ambient light level is very low and traffic conditions permit:

The main beam headlamps come on automatically. These

indicator lamps light up on the instrument panel. If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the traffic conditions do not allow the main beam headlamps to be lit:

The dipped beam headlamps remain lit. These indicator lamps

light up on the instrument panel. The function is deactivated if the foglamps are switched on or if the system detects poor visibility conditions (e.g. fog, heavy rain, snowfall). When the foglamps are switched off or when the visibility conditions become favourable again, the function is automatically reactivated.

This indicator lamp goes out when the function is deactivated.

Pause If the situation requires a change of headlamp beam, the driver can take over at any time. Switch the headlamps manually between dipped and main beam to pause the function. If the «AUTO» and «Dipped beam» indicator lamps were on, the system changes to main beam.

With the ignition off, pull the lighting control stalk toward you («headlamp flash») to activate/ deactivate the function. Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off automatically after a period of time.

Welcome lighting With the «Automatic headlamp illumination» function activated, in poor light, the sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked. Activation, deactivation and the duration of the exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle configuration menu.

Automatic lighting systems — General recommendations The automatic lighting systems use a detection camera, located at the top of the windscreen.

Operating limits The system may be disrupted or not work

correctly: When visibility conditions are poor (e.g. snowfall, heavy rain). If the windscreen is dirty, misted-up or masked (e.g. sticker) in front of the camera. If the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs or safety barrier reflectors. The system is not able to detect:

Road users that do not have their own lighting, such as pedestrians. Vehicles with hidden lighting (e.g. travelling behind a safety barrier on the motorway). Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on winding roads, on crossroads.

Maintenance Clean the windscreen regularly,

particularly the area in front of the camera. The internal surface of the windscreen can also become misted around the camera. In humid and cold weather, demist the windscreen regularly. Do not allow snow to accumulate on the bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could obstruct the camera.

Automatic headlamp dipping

For more information, refer to the General recommendations for

automatic lighting systems.

With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the «AUTO» position and the function activated on the touch screen, this system automatically switches between dipped and main beam headlamps, according to lighting and traffic

conditions, using a camera located at the top of the windscreen.

This system is a driving aid. The driver remains responsible for

the vehicle’s lighting, its correct use in the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions, and for compliance with driving and vehicle regulations.

The system becomes operational when the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h).

When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), the function is no longer operational.

Activation/Deactivation It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.

When deactivated, the lighting system changes to «automatic illumination of headlamps» mode.

59

Lighting and visibility

4The state of the system stays in the memory when switching off the ignition.

Operation If the ambient light level is very low and traffic conditions permit:

The main beam headlamps come on automatically. These

indicator lamps light up on the instrument panel. If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the traffic conditions do not allow the main beam headlamps to be lit:

The dipped beam headlamps remain lit. These indicator lamps

light up on the instrument panel. The function is deactivated if the foglamps are switched on or if the system detects poor visibility conditions (e.g. fog, heavy rain, snowfall). When the foglamps are switched off or when the visibility conditions become favourable again, the function is automatically reactivated.

This indicator lamp goes out when the function is deactivated.

Pause If the situation requires a change of headlamp beam, the driver can take over at any time. Switch the headlamps manually between dipped and main beam to pause the function. If the «AUTO» and «Dipped beam» indicator lamps were on, the system changes to main beam.

If the «AUTO» and «Main beam» indicator lamps were on, the system changes to dipped beam. To reactivate the function, once again switch the headlamps manually between dipped and main beam.

Headlamp beam height adjustment

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the height of the headlamp beams should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0. (Initial adjustment)

Driver only or driver + front passenger 1. Driver + front passenger + rear passengers +

maximum authorised load 2. Driver only + maximum authorised load

Cornering lighting

This system makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the main or dipped beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, junctions, parking manoeuvres).

Without/With cornering lighting

Switching on/off This system starts: when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on.

60

Lighting and visibility

The height of the front screenwash jets can be adjusted. To change the factory

setting, insert a needle into each of the jets, then direct them.

To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do not operate the screenwash if the

screenwash reservoir is empty. Only operate the screenwash if there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. During the winter period, use «very cold climate» rated products. Never top up with water.

Rear wiper Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with the marking.

Off

Intermittent wiping

Screenwash-wipe

Reverse gear When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the front windscreen wipers are operating.

Activation/Deactivation The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

or from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. It becomes inactive: below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel. above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). when reverse gear is engaged.

Programming The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu. This system is activated by default.

Without audio system In the «LIGHTING» menu on the instrument panel display, activate/deactivate «DIR HEADLAMPS» (directional headlamps).

With audio system In the «Personalisation- configuration» menu, activate/deactivate

«Directional headlamps«.

With touch screen In the Driving / Vehicle menu, select the «Vehicle settings» tab, then

«Lighting» and activate/deactivate «Directional headlamps«.

Wiper control stalk Before operating the wipers in wintry conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost

from the windscreen and around the wiper arms and blades.

Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. In extremely hot or cold

weather, check that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen before operating the wipers.

After using an automatic car wash, you may temporarily notice abnormal noises

and poorer wiping performance. You do not need to replace the wiper blades.

Without AUTO wiping

With AUTO wiping

Windscreen wipers To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position.

Fast wiping (heavy rain)

Normal wiping (moderate rain)

Intermittent wiping (proportional to the vehicles speed) Switching off

Single wipe (press down and release).

or Automatic wiping

Refer to the corresponding section.

Windscreen wash Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and hold. The screenwash then the windscreen wipers operate for a pre-determined time.

61

Lighting and visibility

4The height of the front screenwash jets can be adjusted. To change the factory

setting, insert a needle into each of the jets, then direct them.

To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do not operate the screenwash if the

screenwash reservoir is empty. Only operate the screenwash if there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen and hindering visibility. During the winter period, use «very cold climate» rated products. Never top up with water.

Rear wiper Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with the marking.

Off

Intermittent wiping

Screenwash-wipe

Reverse gear When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the front windscreen wipers are operating.

Activation/Deactivation The system is activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu.

This function is activated by default.

Without audio system

In the «COMFORT» menu on the instrument panel display, activate/deactivate «REAR WIPE REV«. (automatic wiping in reverse).

With audio system

In the «Personalisation-configuration» menu, activate/deactivate «Rear wipe in

reverse gear«.

With touch screen

In the Driving / Vehicle menu, select the «Vehicle settings» tab, then

«Comfort» and activate/deactivate «Rear wiper in reverse«.

In the event of accumulation of snow or hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to

a towing device, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the touch screen’s Driving/ Vehicle menu.

Rear screenwash Turn the ring as far as it will go and hold it in position. The screenwash and the wiper operate for as long as the ring remains turned. A final wiping cycle is performed when screen washing ends.

Special position of the windscreen wipers This maintenance position is used while cleaning or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to release the wiper blades from the windscreen.

To maintain the effectiveness of the flat wiper blades, it is advisable to:

handle them with care. clean them regularly using soapy water. avoid using them to hold cardboard on the windscreen. replace them at the first signs of wear.

Before removing a windscreen wiper blade

Operating the wiper control stalk immediately after switching off the ignition will place the wiper blades in a vertical position. Proceed with the desired operation or the replacement of the wiper blades.

62

Lighting and visibility

Switching off Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).

Depending on version, this indicator lamp disappears from the display or goes off in

the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.

If the ignition has been off for more than one minute, the automatic wipers must

be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards.

Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

After refitting a windscreen wiper blade To return the wiper blades to their initial position after the operation, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper control stalk.

Changing a wiper blade Removing/Refitting at the front

Carry out these wiper blade replacement operations from the driver’s side. Starting with the wiper blade farthest from you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible.

Take care not to hold the arms at the jet locations.

Do not touch the wiper blades — risk of irreparable deformation.

Do not release them while moving them. Risk of damaging the windscreen!

Clean the windscreen using screenwash fluid.

Do not apply «Rain X» type water- repellent products.

Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you and remove it. Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the arm. Repeat the procedure for the other wiper blade. Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, once again hold each arm by the rigid section, then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.

Removing/refitting at the rear Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. Clean the rear screen using screenwash fluid. Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the arm. Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, then guide it carefully onto the rear screen.

Automatic windscreen wipers In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate automatically and adapt to the intensity of the rainfall. Detection is via a rain/brightness sensor, located at the top centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. When using an automatic car wash,

switch off the automatic wipers and the ignition. In winter, wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wipers.

Switching on

Give a short downwards push to the control stalk. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted.

Depending on version, this indicator lamp appears on the display or on the

instrument panel, accompanied by a message.

63

Lighting and visibility

4Switching off Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).

Depending on version, this indicator lamp disappears from the display or goes off in

the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.

If the ignition has been off for more than one minute, the automatic wipers must

be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards.

Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

64

Safety

General safety recommendations

Do not remove the labels attached in different places on your vehicle. They

include safety warnings as well as identification information for the vehicle.

For all work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical

information, skills and equipment required, all of which a CITRON dealer is able to provide.

Depending on country regulations, certain safety equipment may be

mandatory: high visibility safety vests, warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.

Installing electrical accessories: The fitting of electrical equipment or

accessories not approved by CITRON may cause excessive current consumption and faults and failures with the electrical system of your vehicle. Contact a CITRON dealer for information on the range of approved accessories. As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle’s electronic systems, is reserved strictly for

CITRON dealers or qualified workshops, equipped with the special tools required (risk of malfunctions of the vehicle’s electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed. Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by CITRON or carried out without meeting the technical requirements defined by the Manufacturer will result in the suspension of the commercial warranty.

Installation of accessory radio communication transmitters

Before installing a radio communication transmitter with an external aerial, you must without fail contact a CITRON dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).

Declarations of conformity for radio equipment

The relevant certificates are available on the http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/ website.

Hazard warning lamps

Pressing this red button causes all the direction indicators to flash. They can work with the ignition switched off.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps When braking in an emergency, depending on the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically when you next accelerate. They can be switched off by pressing the button.

Horn

Press the central part of the steering wheel.

Emergency or assistance call

1. Localised Emergency Call

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** Depending on the geographic coverage of «Localised Emergency Call» and «Localised Assistance Call». The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

65

Safety

5Horn

Press the central part of the steering wheel.

Emergency or assistance call

1. Localised Emergency Call

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** Depending on the geographic coverage of «Localised Emergency Call» and «Localised Assistance Call». The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

2. Localised Assistance Call

Localised Emergency Call (PE112) In an emergency, press button 1 for more than 2 seconds. The lit indicator lamp and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the emergency services*. «Localised Emergency Call» immediately locates your vehicle and puts you in contact with the appropriate emergency services**. Pressing again immediately cancels the request. The indicator lamp flashes while the vehicle data is being sent, and then remains lit when communication is established.

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, an emergency call is made

automatically, irrespective of the deployment of any airbags.

This service is available free of charge.

Operation of the system Upon switching on the ignition, the indicator lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes out: the system is operating correctly. The indicator lamp is fixed red: system malfunction. The indicator lamp flashes red: replace the back-up battery. In the latter 2 cases, the emergency and assistance call services may not work. Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon as possible.

A system fault does not prevent the vehicle from being driven.

Data processing All processing of personal information

by the «Localised Emergency Call» system (PE112) complies with the framework for protection of personal information established by Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and the Council, and in particular, seeks to protect the vital interests of the data subject, in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of Regulation 2016/679. Personal information processing is strictly limited to the management of the «Localised

66

Safety

Emergency Call» system used with the 112 European single emergency call number. The «Localised Emergency Call» system is able to collect and process only the following data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, type (passenger vehicle or light commercial vehicle), fuel type or power source, most recent three locations and direction of travel, and a timestamped log file recording the automatic activation of the system. The recipients of the processed data are the emergency call handling centres designated by the relevant national authorities in the territory in which they are located, enabling priority reception and handling of calls to the 112 emergency number.

Data storage Data contained in the systems memory

is not accessible from outside the system until a call is made. The system is not traceable and is not continuously monitored in its normal operating mode. The data in the system’s internal memory is automatically and continuously erased. Only the vehicles three most recent locations are stored. When an emergency call is triggered, the data log is stored for no more than 13 hours.

* According to the geographic coverage of Localised Emergency Call, Localised Assistance Call and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

Access to data You have the right to access the data

and, if necessary, submit a request to rectify, erase or restrict the processing of any personal information not processed in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data has been communicated shall be notified of any rectification, erasure or restriction carried out in accordance with the aforementioned Directive, unless doing so would be impossible or require a disproportionate effort. You also have the right to lodge a complaint with the relevant data protection authority.

Localised Assistance Call If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 for more than 2 seconds to request assistance (confirmed by a voice message*). Pressing again immediately cancels the request.

Privacy mode allows you to manage the level of sharing (data and/or location)

between your vehicle and CITRON. It can be configured in the Settings menu on the touch screen.

By default, depending on equipment, deactivate/reactivate geolocation by simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then press the «Localised Assistance Call» button to confirm.

If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITRON dealer network, we invite you

to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modify them to suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.

For technical reasons, in particular to improve the quality of telematic services

for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle’s on-board telematic system at any time.

If you benefit from the Citron Connect Box offer with the SOS and Assistance

Pack included, there are additional services available to you in your personal space, via the website for your country. For information about the SOS and Assistance Pack, please refer to the general conditions for these services.

Electronic stability control (ESC) The electronic stability control programme includes the following systems: Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD). Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Anti-slip regulation (ASR). Dynamic stability control (DSC).

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)/Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) These systems enhance the vehicles stability and handling during braking, and enable greater control while cornering, particularly on poor or slippery road surfaces. ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of emergency braking. Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) manages overall braking pressure on each individual wheel. When braking in an emergency, depress the pedal very firmly and maintain this pressure.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake

pedal.

The fixed illumination of this warning lamp signals that there is a fault with the ABS.

67

Safety

5Electronic stability control (ESC) The electronic stability control programme includes the following systems: Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD). Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Anti-slip regulation (ASR). Dynamic stability control (DSC).

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)/Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) These systems enhance the vehicles stability and handling during braking, and enable greater control while cornering, particularly on poor or slippery road surfaces. ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of emergency braking. Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) manages overall braking pressure on each individual wheel. When braking in an emergency, depress the pedal very firmly and maintain this pressure.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake

pedal.

The fixed illumination of this warning lamp signals that there is a fault with the ABS.

The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at a moderate speed. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

This warning lamp, when lit together with the STOP and ABS warning lamps,

accompanied by a message and an audible signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. You must stop the vehicle. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

When changing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that these are approved for your

vehicle.

After an impact Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or

a qualified workshop.

Emergency braking assistance (EBA) In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in braking efficiency.

Anti-slip regulation (ASR) / Dynamic stability control (DSC) Anti-slip regulation (or traction control) optimises traction by using engine braking and by applying the brakes on the driving wheels to avoid one or more wheels spinning. It also enhances the vehicle’s directional stability. If there is a difference between the vehicles trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the dynamic stability control system automatically uses engine braking and the brakes on one or more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired path, within the limits of the laws of physics. These systems are activated automatically every time the vehicle is started.

These systems are activated in the event of a problem with grip or trajectory

(confirmed by this warning lamp flashing on the instrument panel).

Deactivation/Reactivation In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn freely and regain grip. Reactivate the system as soon as the level of grip permits.

The settings are changed via the Driving/ Vehicle touch screen menu.

68

Safety

Or, depending on version, turn the «Grip control» knob to this position. Deactivation is confirmed by the lighting of this indicator lamp on the instrument

panel and the display of a message. The ASR system is reactivated automatically every time the ignition is switched on or at speeds over 31 mph (50 km/h). Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h).

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel,

accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

ASR/DSC These systems enhance safety during

normal driving, but should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It is therefore important for your safety to keep these systems activated in all conditions, and particularly in difficult conditions. Correct operation of these systems depends on compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations relating to the wheels (tyres and rims), braking and electronic components, as well as the assembly and

repair procedures provided by CITRON dealers. In order to ensure that these systems remain effective in wintry conditions, the use of snow or all-season tyres is recommended. All four wheels must be fitted with tyres approved for your vehicle. All tyre specifications are listed on the tyre/paint label. For more information on Identification markings, refer to the corresponding section.

Grip control (Depending on version) A special, patented traction control system, which improves driveability on snow, mud and sand. This system, optimised for operation in a range of conditions, enables you to manoeuvre in most slippery conditions (encountered during normal passenger car use). When combined with all-season Peak Mountain Snow Flake tyres, this system offers a compromise between safety, grip and driveability. The accelerator pedal should be pressed sufficiently to allow the system to harness the power of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds is completely normal. A five-position selector knob allows you to choose the setting best suited to the driving conditions encountered.

An indicator lamp associated with each mode comes on, accompanied by the display of a message to confirm your choice.

Operating modes

Standard (ESC) This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel spin, based on the different levels

of grip normally encountered on the road.

Whenever the ignition is switched off, the system automatically resets to this mode.

Snow This mode adapts its strategy to the conditions of grip encountered for each of

the two front wheels on moving off. (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))

All terrain (mud, damp grass, etc.)

This mode, when moving off, allows considerable spin on the wheel with the

least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most grip is controlled in such a way as to transmit as much torque as possible. When moving, the system optimises wheel spin to respond to the driver’s requirements as fully as possible. (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))

Sand This mode allows little spin on the two driving wheels at the same time to allow

the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck in the sand. (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))

Do not use the other modes on sand as the vehicle may become stuck.

You can deactivate the ASR and DSC systems by turning the knob to the «OFF«

position.

The ASR and DSC systems will no longer act on the operation of the engine

69

Safety

5All terrain (mud, damp grass, etc.)

This mode, when moving off, allows considerable spin on the wheel with the

least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the most grip is controlled in such a way as to transmit as much torque as possible. When moving, the system optimises wheel spin to respond to the driver’s requirements as fully as possible. (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))

Sand This mode allows little spin on the two driving wheels at the same time to allow

the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck in the sand. (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h))

Do not use the other modes on sand as the vehicle may become stuck.

You can deactivate the ASR and DSC systems by turning the knob to the «OFF«

position.

The ASR and DSC systems will no longer act on the operation of the engine

or of the brakes in the event of a change of trajectory. These systems are reactivated automatically from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the ignition is switched on.

Recommendations The vehicle is designed principally

to drive on tarmac roads, but it may occassionally drive on other less passable terrain. However, it does not permit off-road driving: Driving on terrain that can damage the underbody or tear off elements (e.g. fuel pipe, fuel cooler) by obstacles or stones in particular. Driving on terrain with steep gradients and poor grip. Crossing a waterway.

Hill Assist Descent Control Hill Assist Descent Control system for medium to steep slopes, on tarmac or other road surfaces (e.g. gravel, mud). This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of control of the vehicle when descending, whether going forward or in reverse. During a descent, the system assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed, depending on

the gear engaged, while progressively releasing the brakes.

For the system to activate, the gradient must be greater than 5%.

The system can be used with the gearbox in neutral. Otherwise, engage a gear corresponding to the speed to prevent the engine stalling. With an automatic gearbox, the system can be used with the selector at N, D or R.

When the system is regulating, the Active Safety Brake system is automatically

deactivated.

Operation Switching on By default, the system is not selected. The state of the function is not saved when the ignition is switched off.

To select the system, at speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), press this button until

70

Safety

its lamp lights up; this indicator lamp appears in green on the instrument panel. The system becomes active at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h). When the vehicle begins its descent, the driver can release the accelerator and brake pedals; the system regulates the speed:

If the gearbox is in first or second gear, the speed decreases and the

indicator lamp flashes rapidly. If the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch pedal is depressed, the speed decreases and the indicator lamp flashes slowly; in this case, the maintained descent speed is lower. On a downward slope, with the vehicle stationary, if the driver releases the accelerator and brake pedals, the system will release the brakes to set the vehicle gradually in motion. The brake lamps light up automatically when the system is regulating. If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), regulation is paused automatically, the indicator lamp goes back to grey in the instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in the button remains on. Regulation resumes automatically when the speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the slope and pedal release conditions are met. You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal again at any time.

Switching off

Press this button until its indicator lamp goes off; the indicator lamp also goes off in the instrument panel. Above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Malfunction If a fault occurs with the system, this warning lamp comes on in green,

accompanied by the display of a message in the instrument panel. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Seat belts Inertia reel The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel which allows the strap length to adjust automatically to the shape of the user. The seat belt returns to its storage automatically when it is not used.

The inertia reels are fitted with a device which automatically locks the strap in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Pyrotechnic pretensioning This system improves safety in the event of a frontal or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are enabled when the ignition is on. Force limiting system This system reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving their protection.

In the event of an impact Depending on the nature and

seriousness of the impacts, the pyrotechnic device may trigger before and independently of airbag deployment. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on. Following an impact, have the seat belt system checked, and if necessary replaced,

by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning system and a force limiting system.

Height adjustment

71

Safety

5by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning system and a force limiting system.

Height adjustment

To adjust the height of the anchorage point, squeeze control A and slide it to the notch desired.

Rear seat belts

Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt with inertia reel. The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and force limiting system.

Seat belts, centre rear The seat belt for the rear central position is integrated into the back of the roof.

Installation

Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the left buckle. Insert tongue B into the right buckle. Check that each buckle is fastened correctly by pulling the strap. Removal and storage Press the red button on buckle B, then the button on buckle A. Guide the strap as it reels in and take tongue B, then A to the magnet at the anchoring point on the roof.

72

Safety

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into the buckle. Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling on the strap.

Unfastening Press the red button on the buckle. Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.

Seat belt not fastened/ unfastened alerts

A. Front and rear seat belts not fastened/ unfastened warning lamp

1. Front left seat belt warning lamp 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp

If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the corresponding warning lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and front passenger airbag warning lamps display.

If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5)

comes on for around 30 seconds.

Above about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning lamp remains on until the driver or the front/rear passenger fasten their seat belt.

Advice The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they

are all fastened before setting off. Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must always fasten the seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not invert the seat belt buckles, as they will not fulfil their role properly. To ensure the proper functioning of the belt buckles, make sure that there are no foreign bodies present (e.g. a coin) before fastening. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Installation The lower part of the strap must be

positioned as low as possible over the pelvis. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. At the front, adjusting the position of the seat belt may require the seat height to be adjusted. In order to be effective, a seat belt must: be tightened as close to the body as possible. be pulled in front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it is not twisted. must only be used to secure one person.

73

Safety

5 not show signs of tearing or fraying. not be changed or modified, in order to avoid affecting its performance.

Recommendations for children Use a suitable child seat if the passenger

is less than 12 years old or shorter than 1.5 metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one child. Never carry a child on your lap. For more information on Child seats, refer to the corresponding section.

Maintenance In accordance with current safety

regulations, for all work on your vehicle’s seat belts, contact a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a CITRON dealer is able to provide. Have the seat belts checked regularly by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by CITRON dealers.

Airbags General information This system is designed to improve the safety of the occupants of the front seats and the rear outer seats in the event of a violent collision. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting system. Electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: In the event of violent impact, the airbags deploy instantly and help better protect the occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the occupants. In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to protect you in these situations. The seriousness of the impact depends on the nature of the obstacle and the speed of the vehicle at the moment of collision.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.

Impact detection zones

A. Front impact zone B. Side impact zone

When one or more airbags are deployed, the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge

incorporated in the system makes a noise and releases a small quantity of smoke. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience irritation. The detonation noise associated with the deployment of one or more airbags may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

74

Safety

Front airbags

This system protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact, limiting the risk of head and chest injury. The driver’s airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deployment They deploy, except the front passenger airbag if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver’s side, and the dashboard, passenger’s side, to cushion their forward movement.

* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.

Lateral airbags

In the event of a serious side impact, this system protects the driver and front passenger to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between the hip and the shoulder. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, on the door side.

Deployment The lateral airbags are deployed on one side in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B. The lateral airbag inflates between the chest of the vehicle’s occupant and the corresponding door panel.

Curtain airbags This system helps provide greater protection for the driver and passengers (with the exception

of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B. The curtain airbag inflates between the front and rear occupants of the vehicle and the corresponding windows.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may not be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

In the event of a minor impact or bump at the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle

rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of the lateral airbags are deployed.

Advice For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations

below. Adopt a normal and upright sitting position. Fasten your seat belt and position it correctly. Do not place anything between the occupants and the airbags (e.g. child, animal, object), do not fix or attach anything near or in the path of the airbags, as this could cause injuries when they are deployed. Never modify the original definition of the vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time, discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen, have the airbag systems checked. All work must be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop

Front airbags Do not drive holding the steering wheel

by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

75

Safety

5Advice For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations

below. Adopt a normal and upright sitting position. Fasten your seat belt and position it correctly. Do not place anything between the occupants and the airbags (e.g. child, animal, object), do not fix or attach anything near or in the path of the airbags, as this could cause injuries when they are deployed. Never modify the original definition of the vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time, discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen, have the airbag systems checked. All work must be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop

Front airbags Do not drive holding the steering wheel

by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently. Do not fix or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard, as this could cause injuries when the airbags are deployed.

Lateral airbags Use only approved seat covers

compatible with the deployment of these airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a CITRON dealer. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backrests (e.g. clothing) as this could cause injuries to the chest or arm when the airbag is deployed. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary. The vehicle’s front door panels include side impact sensors. A damaged door or any unauthorised or incorrectly executed work (modification or repair) on the front doors or their interior trim could compromise the operation of these sensors — risk of malfunction of the lateral airbags! All work must be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop

Curtain airbags Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,

as this could cause head injuries when the curtain airbag is deployed. Do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof.

Child seats The regulations on carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the

legislation in force in your country.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations: In accordance with European regulations, all children under the age of 12 or less than 1,5 metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. Statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats. Children weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the «rearward facing» position, whether in the front or rear of the vehicle.

It is recommended that children travel on the rear seats of the vehicle:

rearward facing up to the age of 3, forward facing over the age of 3.

76

Safety

Make sure that the seat belt is correctly positioned and tightened.

For child seats with a support leg, ensure that the support leg is in firm and steady contact with the floor.

Advice An incorrectly installed child seat in a vehicle compromises the child’s safety in

the event of an accident. Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat, as this could destabilise it. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harness keeping the slack relative to the child’s body to a minimum, even for short journeys. When installing a child seat using the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the vehicle seat. If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it forwards if necessary. Remove the head restraint before installing a child seat with a backrest on a passenger seat. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

Installing a booster seat The chest part of the seat belt must be

positioned on the child’s shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child’s thighs. Use a booster seat with a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at shoulder level.

Additional protections To prevent accidental opening of the

doors and rear windows, use the «Child lock». Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. As a safety measure, do not leave: a child alone and unsupervised inside a vehicle, a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle.

Child seat at the rear Forward-facing or rearward-facing

Move the vehicle’s front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing child seat itself do not touch the vehicle’s front seat. Check that the backrest of the forward-facing child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle’s rear seat, and ideally in contact with it.

Centre rear seat A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.

Child seat at the front

Adjust the front passenger seat to the maximum rear longitudinal position, with the backrest straightened.

«Forward facing»

You must leave the front passenger airbag active.

«Rearward facing»

The front passenger airbag must be deactivated before installing a rearward

facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.

77

Safety

5″Forward facing»

You must leave the front passenger airbag active.

«Rearward facing»

The front passenger airbag must be deactivated before installing a rearward

facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.

Warning label — Front passenger airbag

You must comply with the following instruction, as reminded by the warning label on both sides of the passenger sun visor:

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the

CHILD can occur.

Deactivating the front passenger airbag

Passenger airbag OFF

To ensure the safety of the child, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated

when a «rearward facing» child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed in the event of deployment of the airbag.

Vehicles not equipped with a deactivation/reactivation control

Installing a «rearward facing» child seat on the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited — risk of death or serious injury in the event of airbag deployment!

Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag For vehicles on which it is fitted, the switch is located inside the glove box.

78

Safety

With the ignition off: To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the switch to the «OFF» position. To reactivate it, turn the key to the «ON» position. When the ignition is switched on:

This warning lamp comes on and remains lit to signal deactivation.

Or This warning lamp comes on for about 1 minute to signal activation.

Recommended child seats Range of child seats secured using a three- point seat belt.

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1 «RMER Baby-Safe»

Installed in the «rearward facing» position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L5 «RMER KIDFIX 2R»

Can be fitted to the vehicle’s ISOFIX mountings.

The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the side rear

seats. The head restraint on the vehicle seat must

be removed.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L6 «GRACO Booster»

The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the front

passenger seat or on the rear side seats.

«ISOFIX» mountings The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX compliant mountings:

The mountings comprise three rings for each seat, indicated by a marking: Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat backrest and cushion.

79

Safety

5

The 2 latches on ISOFIX child seats are secured to them. One ring B, located behind the seat, called the TOP TETHER, for attaching seats fitted with an upper strap.

This system prevents the child seat from tipping forwards in the event of a front impact. This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the vehicle. To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:

Remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed). Pass the strap of the child seat behind the seat backrest, centring it between the openings for the head restraint rods. Secure the upper strap hook to ring B. Tighten the upper strap.

When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left-hand rear seat of the bench seat,

before fitting the seat, first move the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering with the operation of the seat belt.

An incorrectly installed child seat in a vehicle compromises the child’s safety in

the event of an accident. Strictly observe the fitting instructions provided in the user guide supplied with the child seat.

For information about the options for fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle,

refer to the summary table.

Recommended ISOFIX child seats

Also consult the user guide from the child seats manufacturer to find out how to

install and remove the seat.

«RMER Baby-Safe and its ISOFIX base» (size category: E)

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

Installed «rearward facing» using an ISOFIX base which is attached to rings A.

The base has a support leg, height- adjustable, which rests on the vehicle’s floor.

This child seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle seat using the

three-point seat belt.

80

Safety

«RMER Duo Plus ISOFIX» (size category: B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

«RMER Duo Plus ISOFIX» (size category: B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Suitable for forward-facing installation only. Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as

TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,

lying down. This child seat can also be used in seat

positions not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle’s seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the

child’s feet do not touch the backrest.

i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that are anchored to the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.

Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats In compliance with European regulations, this table indicates the possibilities for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) as well as the largest ISOFIX and i-Size child seats for the seat positions fitted with ISOFIX anchorage points in the vehicle.

81

Safety

5Seat number

Front seats (i)

Rear seats (i)

1 3 4 5 6

3 1 4 5 6

Front passenger airbag Deactivated «OFF» (b)

Activated «ON» (c)

Position compatible with a universal (a) child seat

no yes (d) (j) yes (d) (k) yes (e) (f) no (l) yes (e) (f)

Position compatible with an i-Size child seat

no no (l) yes no (l) yes

Position equipped with a TOP TETHER hook

no no (l) yes no (l) yes

«Carrycot» type child seat no no (l) no no (l) no

«Rearward facing» ISOFIX child seat no no (l) R3 (g) (h) no (l) R3 (g) (h)

«Forward facing» ISOFIX child seat no no (l) F3 (g) (h) no (l) F3 (g) (h)

Child booster seat no B3 (d) (l) (m) B3 (g) (m) no (l) B3 (g) (m)

Rules: A position that is i-Size compatible is also compatible with R1, R2 and F2X, F2, B2. A position that is R3 compatible is also compatible with R1, R2 and R2X.

A position that is R2 compatible is also compatible with R1. A position that is F3 compatible is also compatible with F2X and F2.

A position that is B3 compatible is also compatible with B2. (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be

installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

82

Safety

(b) To install a «rearward facing» child seat at this seat position, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated («OFF«).

(c) Only a «forward facing» child seat is authorised at this seat position with the front passenger airbag activated («ON«).

(d) Adjust the front passenger seat to the fully backward position.

(e) To install a «rearward facing» or «forward facing» child seat on a rear seat, move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough space for the child seat and the child’s legs.

(f) To install a «rearward facing» or «forward facing» child seat on a rear seat, move the rear seat backwards as far as possible, with the backrest straightened.

(g) Adjust the seat to the fully backward position.

(h) Adjust the head restraint to its highest setting or remove the head restraint.

(i) Depending on version, refer to the legislation in force in your country before installing a child in this seat position.

(j) For universal child seat: groups 0, 0+ and 1.

(k) For universal child seat: groups 2 and 3 only.

(l) Seats not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

(m) Remove the head restraint.

Key Seat position where the installation of a child seat is forbidden. Front passenger airbag deactivated.

Front passenger airbag activated.

Seat position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt

and universally approved «rearward facing» and/or «forward facing» for all sizes and weight groups.

Seat position suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt

and universally approved «forward facing» for groups 1, 2 & 3.

Seat position where securing an i-Size child seat is authorised. Presence of a TOP TETHER anchorage point at the rear of the backrest,

authorising the attachment of a universal ISOFIX child seat.

«Rearward facing» ISOFIX child seat:

R1: ISOFIX child seat for baby. R2 and R2X: ISOFIX reduced size child seats. R3: ISOFIX large size child seat.

«Forward facing» ISOFIX child seat:

F2X: ISOFIX child seat for toddlers. F2: ISOFIX reduced height child seat. F3: ISOFIX full height child seat.

Booster child seat:

B2: reduced width booster seat. B3: full width booster seat.

Seat position not authorised for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat.

For seat adjustments, refer to the table «Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats«.

Manual child lock

The system prevents a rear door from being opened using its interior handle. The red control is located on the edge of each rear door (indicated by a marking on the bodywork).

Activation/Deactivation

To activate the child lock, turn the built-in key in the red control as far as possible:

To the right on the left-hand rear door. To the left on the right-hand rear door.

83

Safety

5For seat adjustments, refer to the table «Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats«.

Manual child lock

The system prevents a rear door from being opened using its interior handle. The red control is located on the edge of each rear door (indicated by a marking on the bodywork).

Activation/Deactivation

To activate the child lock, turn the built-in key in the red control as far as possible:

To the right on the left-hand rear door. To the left on the right-hand rear door.

To deactivate the child lock, turn the key in the opposite direction.

Do not confuse the child lock control, which is red, with the back-up locking

control, which is black.

Electric child lock

This control prevents the opening of the rear doors using their interior handles.

Activation/Deactivation

With the ignition on, press this button to activate/deactivate the child lock. A message is displayed, confirming activation/ deactivation of the child lock. When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is activated.

Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a malfunction of the electric

child lock. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

With the child lock activated, it is still possible to open the doors from outside

and/or to operate the rear electric windows from the driver’s door.

This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of

the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always keep the electronic key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.

84

Driving

Driving recommendations Observe the driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Monitor your environment and keep your hands on the wheel to be able to react to anything that may happen any time. Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for braking and maintain a longer safety distance, especially in bad weather. Stop the vehicle before performing operations that require sustained attention (e.g. settings). During long trips, take a break every 2 hours.

Important! Never leave the engine running in a closed space without sufficient

ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit toxic exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death!

In very severe wintry conditions (temperature below -23C), let the engine

run for 4 minutes before moving off, to ensure the correct operation and durability of the mechanical components of your vehicle (engine and gearbox).

Never drive with the parking brake applied. Risk of overheating and

damaging the braking system!

Do not park the vehicle or leave the engine running on a flammable

surface (e.g. dry grass, dead leaves).The vehicle exhaust system is very hot, even several minutes after the engine stops. Risk of fire!

Never drive on surfaces covered with vegetation (tall grass, accumulated

dead leaves, crops, debris) such as a field, a country lane overgrown with bushes or a grassy verge. This vegetation could come into contact with the vehicle’s exhaust system or other systems which are very hot. Risk of fire!

Make sure you do not leave any item in the passenger compartment which could

act like a magnifying glass under the effect of the sun’s rays and cause a fire — risk of fire or damage to interior surfaces!

Never leave the vehicle unattended, with the engine running. If you have to

leave your vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P (depending on the type of gearbox).

Never leave children inside the vehicle unsupervised.

On flooded roads We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads, as this could cause serious damage to the engine or gearbox, as well as to your vehicle’s electrical systems.

If the vehicle absolutely must drive through a flooded section of road: Check that the depth of the water does not exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that might be generated by other users. Deactivate the Stop & Start function. Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h). Do not stop and do not switch off the engine. On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety conditions allow, make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Towing Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and

particular care must be taken.

Do not exceed the maximum towable weights.

At altitude: reduce the maximum load by 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower air density at high altitudes decreases engine performance.

New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has driven at least 620 miles

(1,000 kilometres).

If the outside temperature is high, let the engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the

vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool.

Before setting off Nose weight Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight (at the point where it joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

85

Driving

6Towing Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and

particular care must be taken.

Do not exceed the maximum towable weights.

At altitude: reduce the maximum load by 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower air density at high altitudes decreases engine performance.

New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has driven at least 620 miles

(1,000 kilometres).

If the outside temperature is high, let the engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the

vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool.

Before setting off Nose weight Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight (at the point where it joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Tyres Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures. Lighting Check the electrical signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.

If a genuine CITRON towing device is used, the rear parking sensors will be

deactivated automatically to avoid the audible signal.

When driving Cooling Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant temperature to increase. The maximum towable load depends on the gradient and the exterior temperature. The fans cooling capacity does not increase with engine speed. Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to limit the amount of heating produced. Pay constant attention to the coolant temperature.

If this warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle

and switch off the engine as soon as possible. Brakes Using the engine brake is recommended to limit the overheating of the brakes. Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer.

Side wind Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more susceptible to wind when towing.

Anti-theft protection Electronic immobiliser The keys contain a code, which must be recognised by the vehicle before starting is possible. If the system malfunctions, indicated by the display of a message, the engine will not start. Contact a CITRON dealer.

For safety and theft protection reasons, never leave the electronic key in the

vehicle, even when you are close to it.

86

Driving

Starting / Switching off the engine with the key Key ignition switch

It has 3 positions: 1. Stop

Inserting/removing the key, steering column locked.

2. Ignition on Steering column unlocked, ignition on, preheating (Diesel), switching the engine on.

3. Starting

Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key or the remote control. This would weigh

down on its shaft in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction.

Ignition on position It allows the use of the vehicle’s electric equipment or the charging of accessories. Once the state of charge of the battery drops to the reserve level, the system switches to energy

economy mode. The power supply is cut off automatically to preserve the remaining battery charge.

Starting the engine With the parking brake applied: With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector in mode N or P then depress the brake pedal. Insert the key into the ignition switch; the system recognises the code. Unlock the steering column by simultaneously turning the steering wheel and the key.

In certain cases, you may need to apply significant force to move the steering

wheel (e.g. wheels turned to full lock).

With a petrol engine, operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine starts. Once the engine has started, release the key and allow it to return to position 2.

Petrol engines After a cold start, preheating the catalytic

converter can cause noticeable engine vibrations, for anything up to 2 minutes (accelerated idle speed).

With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position 2, to activate the engine preheating system.

Wait until this warning lamp goes off on the instrument panel, then turn the key to

position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal, to operate the starter motor. Once the engine has started, release the key and allow it to return to position 2.

In wintry conditions, the warning lamp may stay on for a longer period. When

the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not come on. In mild conditions, do not leave the engine to warm up while stationary, but move off straight away and drive at moderate speed.

If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition. Wait a few

seconds before operating the starter motor again. If the engine does not start after a few attempts, do not keep trying — risk of damaging the starter motor and the engine! Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Switching off the engine Immobilise the vehicle. With the engine at idle, turn the key to position 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. To lock the steering column, turn the steering wheel until it locks.

To facilitate unlocking of the steering column, it is recommended that the

wheels be returned to the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.

Never switch off the ignition before the complete immobilisation of the vehicle.

With the engine off, the braking and steering assistance systems are also cut off — risk of loss of control of the vehicle!

Check that the parking brake is correctly applied, particularly on sloping ground.

When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in your possession and lock the vehicle.

Energy economy mode After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), for a maximum combined duration of 30 minutes, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps or dipped beam headlamps.

For more information on Energy economy mode, refer to the

corresponding section.

Key left in When the driver’s door is opened, a

message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, if the key has been left in the ignition switch in position 1.

87

Driving

6To facilitate unlocking of the steering column, it is recommended that the

wheels be returned to the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.

Never switch off the ignition before the complete immobilisation of the vehicle.

With the engine off, the braking and steering assistance systems are also cut off — risk of loss of control of the vehicle!

Check that the parking brake is correctly applied, particularly on sloping ground.

When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in your possession and lock the vehicle.

Energy economy mode After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), for a maximum combined duration of 30 minutes, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps or dipped beam headlamps.

For more information on Energy economy mode, refer to the

corresponding section.

Key left in When the driver’s door is opened, a

message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, if the key has been left in the ignition switch in position 1.

If the key has been left in the ignition switch in position 2, the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1, then back to position 2.

Starting/Switching off the engine with Keyless Entry and Start

The electronic key must be present in the passenger compartment.

If the electronic key is not detected, a message is displayed. Move the electronic key so that the engine can be started or switched off. If there is still a problem, refer to the «Key not detected — Back-up starting or Back-up switch-off» section.

Starting

With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P or N and depress the brake pedal.

Press the «START/STOP» button while maintaining pressure on the pedal until the engine starts. Diesel engines In negative temperatures and/or when the engine is cold, starting takes place only after the preheating warning lamp goes out.

If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the «START/STOP» button:

Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not press the «START/STOP» button again until the engine is running. In all circumstances, if one of the starting conditions is not met, a message is displayed.

88

Driving

In some circumstances, a message indicates that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel while pressing the «START/STOP» button to assist unlocking of the steering column.

Petrol engines With Petrol engines, after a cold start,

pre-heating the catalytic converter can cause noticeable engine vibrations, for anything up to 2 minutes (accelerated idle speed).

Switching off Immobilise the vehicle using the parking brake. With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear lever into neutral. With an automatic gearbox, ideally select mode P or N. Press the «START/STOP» button. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel to lock the steering column.

If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine will not stop.

With the engine off, the braking and steering assistance systems are also cut

off — risk of loss of control of the vehicle!

Never leave your vehicle with the electronic key still inside.

Switching on the ignition without starting the engine

With the electronic key in the passenger compartment, pressing the «START/STOP» button, without depressing any of the pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on without starting the engine (the instrument panel and accessories such as the audio system and the lighting will come on). Press this button again to switch off the ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.

With the ignition on, the system automatically goes into energy economy

mode to maintain an adequate state of charge in the battery.

Key not detected Back-up starting A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, to enable the engine to be started if the system fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or if the battery in the electronic key is flat.

Place and hold the remote control against the back-up reader. With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, then depress the brake pedal. Press the «START/STOP» button. The engine starts.

Back-up switch-off

If the electronic key is not detected or is no longer in the recognition zone, a message appears in the instrument panel when closing a door or trying to switch off the engine. To confirm the instruction to switch off the engine, press the «START/STOP» button for approximately 5 seconds. In the event of a fault with the electronic key, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Emergency switch-off In case of emergency only, the engine can be switched off without conditions (even when driving). Press the «START/STOP» button for about 5 seconds. In this case, the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.

89

Driving

6Back-up switch-off

If the electronic key is not detected or is no longer in the recognition zone, a message appears in the instrument panel when closing a door or trying to switch off the engine. To confirm the instruction to switch off the engine, press the «START/STOP» button for approximately 5 seconds. In the event of a fault with the electronic key, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Emergency switch-off In case of emergency only, the engine can be switched off without conditions (even when driving). Press the «START/STOP» button for about 5 seconds. In this case, the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.

Parking brake Release

Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button, then lower the lever fully.

When driving the vehicle, if this warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come

on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message, this means that the parking brake is still applied or has not been fully released.

Application Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise the vehicle.

When parking on a slope, turn the wheels against the kerb, apply the

parking brake, engage a gear and switch off the ignition.

When towing, parking on a steep slope, or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the

wheels towards the kerb and engage a gear

(manual gearbox) or move the selector lever to position P (automatic gearbox). For towing, your vehicle is approved for parking on slopes of up to 12%.

5-speed manual gearbox Engaging reverse gear

Fully depress the clutch pedal. Push the gear lever fully to the right, then backwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at

idle.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting the engine:

Always select neutral. Depress the clutch pedal.

90

Driving

6-speed manual gearbox Engaging 5th or 6th gear Move the gear selector fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.

Failure to follow this instruction could cause permanent damage to the gearbox

(inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear).

Engaging reverse gear

Raise the ring under the knob and move the gear selector to the left, then forwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at

idle.

* Snow programme: depending on the country of sale.

As a safety precaution and to facilitate engine starting:

Always select neutral. Press the clutch pedal.

Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 6-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of automatic operation or manual gear changing. Two driving modes are available: Automatic operation for electronic management of the gears by the gearbox:

With the Sport programme for a more dynamic driving style.

Or the Snow programme to improve driving in the event of poor grip.*

Manual operation for sequential changing of the gears by the driver. In automatic mode, you can still change gear manually using the steering-mounted controls (e.g. when overtaking).

Gear selector module

1. Sport programme 2. Snow programme

(depending on country of sale) P. Park

Vehicle immobilised, parking brake applied or released. Engine starting.

R. Reverse Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, engine at idle.

N. Neutral Vehicle immobilised, parking brake applied. Engine starting.

D. Automatic operation M. +/- Manual operation

To shift up/down through the gears, push the control backwards/forwards.

Information displayed on the instrument panel

When a position is selected in the grid with the gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp lights up on the instrument panel. P. Park R. Reverse N. Neutral D. Drive (automatic operation) S. Sport programme T. Snow programme 1…6. Gear engaged during manual operation -. Instruction not accepted during manual

operation

Foot on the brake Depress the brake pedal when this warning lamp is displayed on the

instrument panel (e.g. when starting the engine).

Starting the vehicle With your foot on the brake pedal, select position P or N.

Start the engine.

91

Driving

6Information displayed on the instrument panel

When a position is selected in the grid with the gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp lights up on the instrument panel. P. Park R. Reverse N. Neutral D. Drive (automatic operation) S. Sport programme T. Snow programme 1…6. Gear engaged during manual operation -. Instruction not accepted during manual

operation

Foot on the brake Depress the brake pedal when this warning lamp is displayed on the

instrument panel (e.g. when starting the engine).

Starting the vehicle With your foot on the brake pedal, select position P or N.

Start the engine.

If the conditions are not met, you will hear an audible signal, accompanied by the display of a message. With the engine running, depress the brake pedal. Release the parking brake, unless it is set to automatic mode. Select position R, D or M. Gradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off immediately.

If position N is selected inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return

to idle, then select position D to accelerate.

When the engine is running at idle with the brakes released, if position R, D or M

is selected, the vehicle moves off even without the accelerator being pressed. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running. When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P.

Automatic operation Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears. The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable

gear according to the driving style, the road profile and the load in the vehicle. For maximum acceleration without touching the selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick- down). The gearbox changes down automatically or holds the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. When braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide effective engine braking. If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety reasons.

Never select position N while the vehicle is moving.

Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.

«Sport» and «Snow» programmes These two special programmes supplement automatic operation in specific conditions of use. «Sport»

Press this button once the engine has started.

«S«appears on the instrument panel. The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic driving style. «Snow»

Press this button once the engine has started.

«T» appears on the instrument panel.

The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads.

92

Driving

This programme improves starting and traction when grip is poor.

Return to automatic operation At any time, press the selected button («S» or «T») again to exit the activated programme and return to auto-adaptive mode.

Manual operation To limit fuel consumption during an extended standstill with the engine

running (for example, in a traffic jam), set the gear selector to N and apply the parking brake.

Selecting position M enables sequential shifting between the six gears. To shift up/down through the gears, push the control backwards/forwards. The gearbox only changes gear if the vehicle speed and engine speed conditions allow; otherwise, the rules for automatic operation are temporarily applied. D disappears, and the gears engaged appear in succession on the instrument panel. If the engine speed is too low or too high, the selected gear flashes for a few seconds, then the gear actually engaged is shown. It is possible to change from position D to position M at any time. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically.

The Sport and Snow programmes are inactive in manual operation.

This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (gear selector between

two positions).

Switching off the vehicle Before switching off the engine, it is possible to engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral. In both cases, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle.

If the gear selector is not in position P, when the driver’s door is opened or

approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, an audible signal sounds and a message appears. Return the gear selector to P; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp comes on and a message is

displayed, when the ignition is switched on. In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a significant jolt (without risk to the gearbox) when changing from P to R and from N to R. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting.

Have the system checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

There is a risk of damaging the gearbox: If the accelerator and brake pedals are

depressed simultaneously. In the event of a battery failure, forcing the selector from position P to another position.

Automatic gearbox Never try to start the engine by pushing

the vehicle.

Gear shift indicator (Depending on engine) This system is designed to reduce fuel consumption by recommending the most suitable gear.

Operation Depending on the driving situation and the vehicle’s equipment, the system may recommend skipping one or more gears. Gear engagement recommendations are not to be considered mandatory. Indeed, the configuration of the road, the traffic density and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the systems advice. The system cannot be deactivated.

With an automatic gearbox, the system is only active in manual operation.

The information appears on the instrument panel, in the form of an arrow

and the recommended gear.

The system adapts the gear change instructions according to the driving

conditions (e.g. slope, load) and driving style (e.g. power demand, acceleration, braking). The system never suggests: engaging first gear; engaging reverse gear.

Hill start assist This system keeps the vehicle briefly stationary (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill start, while you transfer your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. The system is only active when: The vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal. Certain slope conditions are met. The drivers door is closed.

Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held temporarily by hill start assist.

If someone needs to get out of the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually. Then check that the parking brake indicator lamp is on fixed on the instrument panel.

93

Driving

6With an automatic gearbox, the system is only active in manual operation.

The information appears on the instrument panel, in the form of an arrow

and the recommended gear.

The system adapts the gear change instructions according to the driving

conditions (e.g. slope, load) and driving style (e.g. power demand, acceleration, braking). The system never suggests: engaging first gear; engaging reverse gear.

Hill start assist This system keeps the vehicle briefly stationary (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill start, while you transfer your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. The system is only active when: The vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal. Certain slope conditions are met. The drivers door is closed.

Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held temporarily by hill start assist.

If someone needs to get out of the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually. Then check that the parking brake indicator lamp is on fixed on the instrument panel.

The hill start assist function cannot be deactivated. However, using the parking

brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its operation.

Operation

Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time when you release the brake pedal: provided you are in first gear or neutral with a manual gearbox. provided you are in mode D or M with an automatic gearbox.

Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for a short time when you release the brake pedal.

Malfunction If the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel,

accompanied by the display of a message. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Stop & Start The Stop & Start function puts the engine temporarily into standby — STOP mode — during phases when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. red lights, traffic jams). The engine automatically restarts — START mode — as soon as the driver indicates the intention of moving off again. Primarily designed for urban use, the function is intended to reduce fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary. The function does not affect the functionalities of the vehicle, in particular the braking.

Deactivation/Reactivation The function is activated by default when the ignition is switched on.

94

Driving

With/Without audio system

Press the button. A message on the instrument panel confirms the change of status. When the function is deactivated, the orange indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in standby, it restarts immediately. With the touch screen button

The settings are changed via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.

A message on the instrument panel confirms the change of status. When the function is deactivated, if the engine was in standby, it restarts immediately. Associated indicator lamp

Function activated.

Opening the bonnet Before doing anything under the bonnet,

deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid

any risk of injury caused by the engine restarting automatically.

Driving on flooded roads Before entering into a flooded area, it is

strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Driving recommendations, particularly on flooded roads, refer to the corresponding section.

Operation Main conditions for operation The drivers door must be closed. The driver’s seat belt must be fastened. The level of charge in the battery must be sufficient. The temperature of the engine must be within its nominal operating range. The outside temperature must be between 0C and 35C.

Putting the engine into standby (STOP mode) The engine automatically enters standby mode as soon as the driver indicates their intention to stop:

With a manual gearbox: with the gear lever in neutral and the clutch pedal released. With an automatic gearbox: with the gear selector in mode D or M, the brake pedal depressed until the vehicle stops or the gear selector in mode N, with the vehicle stationary. Time counter A time counter adds up the time spent in standby during the journey. It is reset to zero every time the ignition is switched on.

Special cases:

The engine will not go into standby if the conditions for operation are not met and in the following cases: Steep slope (ascending or descending). Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last engine start (with the key or the START/STOP button). Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment. Demisting active. Braking assistance being used.

In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

After the engine has restarted, STOP mode is not available until the vehicle

has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after

coming out of reverse gear or turning the steering wheel.

Restarting the engine (START mode) The engine automatically restarts as soon as the driver indicates the intention of moving off again: With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal fully depressed. With an automatic gearbox: With the selector in mode D or M: with the brake pedal released. With the selector in mode N and the brake pedal released: with the selector at D or M. With the selector in mode P and the brake pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, D or M. With reverse gear engaged.

Special cases

The engine will restart automatically if the conditions for operation are met again and in the following cases: Vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h). Some specific conditions (braking assistance, air conditioning setting, etc.).

In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

Malfunctions In the event of a malfunction, the buttons indicator lamp flashes briefly, then remains on.

95

Driving

6coming out of reverse gear or turning the steering wheel.

Restarting the engine (START mode) The engine automatically restarts as soon as the driver indicates the intention of moving off again: With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal fully depressed. With an automatic gearbox: With the selector in mode D or M: with the brake pedal released. With the selector in mode N and the brake pedal released: with the selector at D or M. With the selector in mode P and the brake pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, D or M. With reverse gear engaged.

Special cases

The engine will restart automatically if the conditions for operation are met again and in the following cases: Vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h). Some specific conditions (braking assistance, air conditioning setting, etc.).

In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

Malfunctions In the event of a malfunction, the buttons indicator lamp flashes briefly, then remains on.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. The vehicle stalls in STOP mode All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on if there is a fault. Switch off the ignition then start the engine again with the key or the «START/STOP» button.

12 V battery The Stop & Start system requires a

12 V battery of specific technology and specification. All work must be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop

Tyre under-inflation detection This system alerts the driver if one or more tyres suffer a drop in pressure. The alert is raised when the vehicle is moving, not when stationary. It compares the information given by the wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. It takes into account the last values stored during the reinitialisation request. It is therefore essential that the tyre pressure is correct during the operation. This operation is the drivers responsibility.

The tyre under-inflation detection cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need

for vigilance on the part of the driver. This system does not avoid the need to regularly check the tyre pressures (including the spare wheel), especially before a long journey. Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly in adverse conditions (heavy load, high speed, long journey): worsens road-holding. lengthens braking distances. causes premature wear of the tyres. increases energy consumption.

The inflation pressures defined for the vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure

label. For more information on the Identification markings, refer to the corresponding section.

Checking tyre pressures This check should be done monthly

when the tyres are «cold» (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds). Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.

96

Driving

Snow chains The system does not have to be

reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains.

Under-inflation alert This is signalled by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an

audible signal and, depending on equipment, the display of a message. Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and avoid sudden braking. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

The loss of pressure detected may not always cause visible deformation of the

tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.

Using a compressor, such as the one in the temporary puncture repair kit, check the pressures of all four tyres when cold. If it is not possible to carry out this check immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (depending on equipment).

Driving too slowly may not ensure optimum monitoring.

The alert is not immediately triggered in the event of a sudden loss of pressure or tyre

blow-out. This is because analysis of the values read by the wheel’s speed sensors can take several minutes. The alert may be delayed at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a sporty driving mode.

The alert is kept active until the system is reinitialised.

Reinitialisation The system must be reinitialised after any adjustment to the pressure of one or more tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.

Before reinitialising the system, make sure that the pressures of the four tyres

are correct for the conditions of use of the vehicle and conform to the values written on the tyre pressure label. Check the pressures of the four tyres before performing the reinitialisation. The system does not advise if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.

The reinitialisation of the system is done with the ignition on and the vehicle stationary: Via the vehicle configuration menu for vehicles fitted with a touch screen. Via the button on the dashboard for vehicles without a touch screen.

With/Without audio system

Press and hold this button. Reinitialisation is confirmed by a high-pitched audible signal. A low-pitched audible signal indicates that the reinitialisation operation has not been successful.

With touch screen In the menu Driving / Vehicle, select the tab «Driving functions«, then «Reset

under-inflation detection«. Select «Yes» to confirm. The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display of a message and an audible signal.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, these warning lamps light up on

the instrument panel. A message appears, accompanied by an audible signal. In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring function is no longer performed.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

«Space-saver» type spare wheel The use of this type of spare wheel may

suspend tyre pressure monitoring. In this case, the malfunction warning lamp comes on and disappears once the wheel has been replaced by one of uniform size (the same as the others), the pressure readjusted and the reinitialisation carried out.

Driving and manoeuvring aids — General recommendations

Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for

vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must comply with the Highway Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in all circumstances and must be able to retake control of it at all times. The driver must adapt the speed to climatic conditions, traffic and the state of the road. It is the driver’s responsibility to constantly monitor traffic conditions, assess the distance and relative speed of other vehicles, and anticipate their manoeuvres before using the direction indicator and changing lanes.

97

Driving

6Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

«Space-saver» type spare wheel The use of this type of spare wheel may

suspend tyre pressure monitoring. In this case, the malfunction warning lamp comes on and disappears once the wheel has been replaced by one of uniform size (the same as the others), the pressure readjusted and the reinitialisation carried out.

Driving and manoeuvring aids — General recommendations

Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for

vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must comply with the Highway Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in all circumstances and must be able to retake control of it at all times. The driver must adapt the speed to climatic conditions, traffic and the state of the road. It is the driver’s responsibility to constantly monitor traffic conditions, assess the distance and relative speed of other vehicles, and anticipate their manoeuvres before using the direction indicator and changing lanes.

These systems do not make it possible to exceed the laws of physics.

Driving aids You should hold the steering wheel with

both hands, always use the door and interior mirrors, always leave your feet close to the pedals and take a break every 2 hours.

Manoeuvring aids The driver must always check the

surroundings of the vehicle before and during the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the mirrors.

Driving aids camera This camera and its associated functions

may be impaired or not work if the windscreen area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, frosty, covered with snow, damaged or masked by a sticker. In humid and cold weather, demist the windscreen regularly. Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel,

alternating shade and light) can also impair detection performance. In the event of a windscreen replacement, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to recalibrate the camera; otherwise, the operation of the associated driving aids may be disrupted.

Other cameras The images from the camera(s)

displayed on the touch screen or on the instrument panel may be distorted by the terrain. In the presence of areas in shade, or in conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate lighting, the image may be darkened and with lower contrast. Obstacles may appear further away than they actually are.

Sensors The operation of the sensors, as well as

any associated functions, may be disrupted by noise pollution such as that emitted by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of snow or dead leaves on the road or in the event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.

98

Driving

A front or rear impact to the vehicle can upset the sensors settings, which is not always detected by the system: distance measurements may be distorted. The sensors do not systematically detect obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). Certain obstacles located in the sensors blind spots may not be detected or may no longer be detected during the manoeuvre. Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound waves: pedestrians may not be detected.

Maintenance Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and

the field of vision of the cameras regularly. When washing your vehicle at high pressure, direct the spray from at least 30 cm away from the sensors and cameras.

Mats/Pedal trims The use of mats or pedal trims not

approved by CITRON may interfere with the operation of the speed limiter or cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Ensure that the mat is secured correctly. Never fit one mat on top of another.

Units of speed Ensure that the units of speed displayed

on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are those for the country you are driving in. If this is not the case, when the vehicle is stationary, set the display to the required units of speed so that it complies with what is authorised locally. In case of doubt, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Head-up display System which projects various information onto a smoked blade placed in the driver’s field of vision to avoid the driver having to take their eyes off the road.

Information displayed during operation

Once the system has been activated, the following information is grouped together in the head-up display: A. The speed of your vehicle. B. Cruise control/speed limiter information. C. If your vehicle is suitably equipped, automatic

emergency braking alerts and navigation instructions.

D. If your vehicle is suitably equipped, speed limit information.

For more information on Navigation, refer to the section Audio equipment

and telematics.

Selector

1. Switching on 2. Switching off (long press)

3. Brightness adjustment 4. Display height adjustment

Activation/Deactivation With the engine running, press button 1 to activate the system and deploy the projection blade.

Press and hold button 2 to deactivate the system and retract the projection blade. The state of the system is saved when the engine is switched off and restored on restarting.

Adjusting the height With the engine running, adjust the display to the desired height using the buttons 4:

up to move the display up, down to move the display down.

99

Driving

63. Brightness adjustment 4. Display height adjustment

Activation/Deactivation With the engine running, press button 1 to activate the system and deploy the projection blade.

Press and hold button 2 to deactivate the system and retract the projection blade. The state of the system is saved when the engine is switched off and restored on restarting.

Adjusting the height With the engine running, adjust the display to the desired height using the buttons 4:

up to move the display up, down to move the display down.

Brightness adjustment With the engine running, adjust the brightness of the information display using the buttons 3:

on the «sun» to increase the brightness, on the «moon» to decrease the brightness.

When stationary or while driving, no objects should be placed around the

projection blade (or in its recess) so as not to impede its movement and correct operation.

In certain extreme weather conditions (rain and/or snow, bright sunshine, etc.),

the head-up display may not be legible or may suffer temporary interference. Some sunglasses may hamper reading of the information. To clean the projection blade, use a clean, soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry or abrasive cloth, or detergent or solvent products, due to the risk of scratching the projection blade or damaging the non-reflective coating.

This system operates when the engine is running, and the settings are saved when

the ignition is switched off.

Memorising speeds This function, used only for the speed limiter and programmable cruise control, lets you save speed settings that will subsequently be proposed for the purpose of configuring these two systems. You can memorise multiple speed settings for each of the two systems. By default, some speed settings are already memorised.

As a safety measure, the driver must only change speed settings when stationary.

Changing a speed setting Speed settings can be activated, deactivated, selected and changed in the

Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.

«MEM» button

With this button, you can select a memorised speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the programmable cruise control.

100

Driving

For more information on the Speed limiter or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding section.

Road signs recognition For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system displays the maximum speed authorised locally on the instrument panel, using: Speed limit signs detected by the camera. Speed limit information from the navigation systems mapping.

The units for the speed limit (mph or km/h) depend on the country you are

driving in. This should be taken into account to ensure you observe the speed limit. For the system to work properly when changing countries, the speed unit of the

instrument panel must match that of the country you are driving in.

Automatic sign reading is a driving aid system and does not always display the

correct speed limits. The speed limit signs present on the road always take priority over those displayed by the system. The system is designed to detect signs that conform to the Vienna Convention on road signs.

Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed.

The display of the speed limit on the instrument panel is updated when passing a speed limit sign intended for cars (light vehicles).

Displays in the instrument panel

Head-up display

1. Speed limit indication

Speed display

The system is active but is not detecting speed limit information.

On detection of speed limit information, the system displays the value.

The driver can adjust the vehicles speed according to the information given by the system.

Activation/Deactivation By default, the system is automatically activated at every engine start.

The settings are changed via the vehicle configuration menu.

Information display With an LCD text instrument panel, the speed limit recognition information is displayed after the trip computer information. To display it:

Press the button located on the end of the wiper control stalk.

Or, depending on equipment, press the knob located on the steering wheel.

Operating limits The system does not take account of reduced speed limits, especially those imposed in the following cases:

101

Driving

6The driver can adjust the vehicles speed according to the information given by the system.

Activation/Deactivation By default, the system is automatically activated at every engine start.

The settings are changed via the vehicle configuration menu.

Information display With an LCD text instrument panel, the speed limit recognition information is displayed after the trip computer information. To display it:

Press the button located on the end of the wiper control stalk.

Or, depending on equipment, press the knob located on the steering wheel.

Operating limits The system does not take account of reduced speed limits, especially those imposed in the following cases:

Poor weather (rain, snow). Atmospheric pollution. Towing. Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel or snow chains fitted. Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture repair kit. Young drivers. The system may not display the speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset period and in the following situations: Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard, damaged or bent. Obsolete or incorrect maps.

Storing the speed setting

In addition to Road signs recognition, the driver can select the speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or cruise control ‘store’ button.

For more information on the Speed limiter or Cruise control, refer to the

corresponding sections.

Steering-mounted controls

1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection 2. Memorise the speed setting

Display on the instrument panel

102

Driving

Head-up display

3. Speed limit indication. 4. Request to memorise the speed. 5. Current speed of the vehicle. 6. Current speed setting.

Storing the speed setting

Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. The speed limiter/cruise control information is displayed.

Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed setting, the system displays the value and a message prompting you to save it as a new

speed setting. «MEM» flashes for a few seconds on the display.

If there is a difference of less than 6 mph (9 km/h) between the speed setting and

the speed displayed by the Road signs recognition, the «MEM» symbol is not displayed.

Press button 2once to save the suggested speed value. A message is displayed, confirming the request.

Press button 2again to confirm and save the new speed setting. The display then reverts to its previous state.

Speed limiter For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the

driver (speed setting). The speed limiter is switched on manually. The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). The speed setting remains in the system memory when the ignition is switched off.

Steering-mounted control

1. ON (LIMIT position)/OFF (position 0) 2. Reduce the speed setting 3. Increase the speed setting 4. Pause/resume speed limiter with the speed

setting previously stored 5. Depending on version:

Display the speed thresholds saved using the Memorising speeds function or Use the speed suggested by the Road signs recognition (MEM display)

For more information on Memorising speeds or the Road signs recognition, refer to the corresponding sections.

Displays in the instrument panel

Head-up display

6. Speed limiter mode selection indication

103

Driving

6For more information on Memorising speeds or the Road signs recognition, refer to the corresponding sections.

Displays in the instrument panel

Head-up display

6. Speed limiter mode selection indication

7. Speed limiter on/pause status indication 8. Programmed speed setting value 9. Speed suggested by the Road signs

recognition

Switching on/Pausing

Turn thumbwheel 1 to the «LIMIT» position to select speed limiter mode; the function is paused.

If the limit speed setting is suitable (most recent speed setting programmed in the system), press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses the function.

When the speed setting remains below the vehicle’s speed for a prolonged

period of time, an audible warning is emitted.

Adjusting the limit speed setting You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed. To modify the limit speed setting based on the vehicles current speed: Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or — 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or — 5 mph (8 km/h). To modify the cruise speed setting based on the speed suggested by the Road signs recognition, as shown on the instrument panel: Press button 5 once; a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request. Press button 5 again to save the suggested speed. The speed is immediately shown on the instrument panel as the new speed setting.

Temporarily exceeding the speed setting Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The speed limiter is temporarily deactivated and the displayed speed setting flashes. Release the accelerator pedal to return to below the speed setting. When exceeding the speed is not due to the driver’s action (e.g. in case of a steep slope), an audible signal is triggered immediately.

104

Driving

On a steep descent or in the event of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will

not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the speed setting. If necessary, apply the brakes to control your vehicles speed.

When the vehicle speed returns to the speed setting level, the speed limiter operates again: the speed setting display becomes fixed again.

Switching off Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the «OFF» position: speed limiter information is no longer displayed.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, dashes are displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the speed setting. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Cruise control — Specific recommendations

The cruise control function does not guarantee compliance with the maximum

authorised speed and the safety distance

between vehicles, the driver remains responsible for their driving. In the interest of public safety, only use cruise control if the traffic conditions enable vehicles to drive at a steady speed and maintain an adequate safety distance. Remain vigilant while cruise control is activated. If you press and hold one of the speed setting modification buttons, your vehicle may change speed very abruptly. When descending a steep hill, the cruise control system cannot prevent the vehicle from exceeding the set speed. Brake if necessary to control the vehicle speed. On steep climbs or when towing, the set speed may not be reached or maintained.

Exceeding the programmed speed setting

You can temporarily exceed the speed setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the programmed speed flashes). To return to the speed setting, release the accelerator pedal (when the set speed is reached again, the displayed speed stops flashing).

Operating limits Never use the system in the following

situations: In an urban area with the risk of pedestrians crossing the road.

In heavy traffic. On winding or steep roads. On slippery or flooded roads. In poor weather conditions. In the event of restricted visibility for the driver. Driving on a speed circuit. Driving on a rolling road. When using a space-saver type spare wheel. When using snow chains, non-slip covers or studded tyres.

Cruise control For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids and the Cruise control — particular recommendations.

This system automatically maintains the vehicles speed at the value programmed

by the driver (speed setting), without the use of the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is switched on manually. It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h). With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must be engaged. With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second gear or higher in mode M must be engaged.

Cruise control remains active after changing gear, regardless of the gearbox

type, on engines fitted with the Stop & Start function.

Switching off the ignition cancels any speed setting.

Steering-mounted control

1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF 2. Activate cruise control at the current speed/

decrease speed setting 3. Activate cruise control at the current speed/

increase speed setting 4. Pause/resume cruise control with the speed

setting previously saved

105

Driving

6Cruise control remains active after changing gear, regardless of the gearbox

type, on engines fitted with the Stop & Start function.

Switching off the ignition cancels any speed setting.

Steering-mounted control

1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF 2. Activate cruise control at the current speed/

decrease speed setting 3. Activate cruise control at the current speed/

increase speed setting 4. Pause/resume cruise control with the speed

setting previously saved

5. Depending on version: Display the speed thresholds saved using the Memorising speeds function or Use the speed suggested by the Road signs recognition (MEM display)

For more information on Memorising speeds or the Road signs recognition, refer to the corresponding sections.

Information displayed on the instrument panel

Head-up display

6. Cruise control mode selection indication 7. Cruise control pause/resume status indication 8. Programmed speed setting value 9. Speed suggested by the Road signs

recognition

Switching on/pausing Turn thumbwheel 1 to the «CRUISE» position to select cruise control mode; the function is paused. Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control and save a speed setting when the vehicle has reached the desired speed; the vehicles current speed is saved as the speed setting. Release the accelerator pedal. Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the function. Pressing button 4 again restores operation of the cruise control (ON).

106

Driving

Modifying the cruise speed setting Cruise control must be active. To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the current speed of the vehicle: Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or — 1 mph (km/h). Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or — 5 mph (km/h).

Pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed

of the vehicle.

As a precaution, we recommend setting a cruise speed fairly close to the current

speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle.

To change the cruise speed setting using memorised speed settings and from the touch screen: Press button 5 to display the memorised speed settings. Press the touch screen button for the desired speed setting. The selection screen closes after a few moments. This setting becomes the new cruise speed. To modify the cruise speed setting using the speed suggested by the Road signs recognition shown on the instrument panel:

Press button 5 once; a message is displayed to confirm the memorisation request. Press button 5 again to save the suggested speed. The speed is immediately shown on the instrument panel as the new speed setting.

Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed If needed (when overtaking, for example) it is possible to exceed the programmed speed by pressing the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is temporarily deactivated and the programmed speed displayed flashes. To return to the programmed speed, release the accelerator pedal. Once the vehicle has returned to the programmed speed, the cruise control resumes operation: the display of the programmed speed becomes fixed again.

When descending a steep hill, the cruise control system cannot prevent the

vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

You may have to brake to control the speed of your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is automatically paused. To activate the system again, with the vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h), press button 4.

Switching off Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the «OFF» position: the cruise control information disappears from the screen.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, dashes are displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the speed setting. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Intelligent emergency braking assistance

For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system:

warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian. reduces the vehicle’s speed to avoid a collision or limit its severity. This system is comprised of three functions: Collision Risk Alert. Intelligent emergency braking assistance (iEBA). Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency braking).

The vehicle has a camera located at the top of the windscreen.

This system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

This system is designed to assist the driver and improve road safety. It is the driver’s responsibility to continuously monitor traffic conditions in accordance with applicable driving regulations.

As soon as the system detects a potential obstacle, it prepares the braking

circuit in case automatic braking is needed. This may cause a slight noise and a slight sensation of deceleration.

107

Driving

6 warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian. reduces the vehicle’s speed to avoid a collision or limit its severity. This system is comprised of three functions: Collision Risk Alert. Intelligent emergency braking assistance (iEBA). Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency braking).

The vehicle has a camera located at the top of the windscreen.

This system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.

This system is designed to assist the driver and improve road safety. It is the driver’s responsibility to continuously monitor traffic conditions in accordance with applicable driving regulations.

As soon as the system detects a potential obstacle, it prepares the braking

circuit in case automatic braking is needed. This may cause a slight noise and a slight sensation of deceleration.

Deactivation/Activation By default, the system is automatically activated at every engine start.

The settings are changed via the vehicle configuration menu.

Deactivation of the system is signalled by the illumination of this warning lamp,

accompanied by the display of a message.

Operating conditions and limits Vehicle moving forward. ESC system operational. ASR system activated. Seat belts fastened for all passengers. Stabilised speed on roads with few bends. In the following cases, deactivating the system via the vehicle’s configuration menu is advised: Towing a trailer. Carrying long objects on roof bars. Vehicle with snow chains fitted. Before using an automatic car wash, with the engine running. When changing a wheel, working near a wheel or inside the engine compartment. Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in a workshop. Towed vehicle, engine running. When a «space-saver» type spare wheel is fitted (depending on version). If the brake lamps are not working.

Following an impact to the windscreen close to the detection camera.

It can be dangerous to drive if the brake lamps are not in perfect working order.

The driver must not overload the vehicle (keep within the GVW limit and load

height limits for roof bars).

It is possible that warnings are not given, are given too late or seem unjustified.

The driver must always stay in control of the vehicle and be prepared to react at any time to avoid an accident.

Following an impact, the system is automatically deactivated.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Collision Risk Alert This function warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front or with a pedestrian present in their traffic lane.

Modifying the alert trigger threshold This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity with which the function warns of the risk of collision.

The settings are changed via the vehicle configuration menu.

108

Driving

Select one of the three pre-defined thresholds: «Far», «Normal» or «Close». The last threshold selected is memorised when the ignition is switched off.

Operation Depending on the degree of risk of collision detected by the system and the alert trigger threshold chosen by the driver, several different levels of alert may be triggered and displayed on the instrument panel or on the head-up display. The system takes account of the vehicle dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one in front, the environmental conditions and the operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the most relevant moment.

(orange) Level 1: visual alert only, warning you

that the vehicle in front is very close. The message «Vehicle close» is displayed.

(red) Level 2: visual and audible alert, warning

you that a collision is imminent. The message «Brake!» is displayed. Level 3: in some cases, a vibration alert in the form of micro-braking can be given, confirming the risk of collision.

Where the speed of your vehicle is too high approaching another vehicle, the

first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed when there is a stationary obstacle or when the «Near» trigger threshold has been selected.

Intelligent emergency braking assistance (iEBA) This function supplements braking in the event that the driver brakes, but not enough to avoid a collision. This assistance will only be provided if the driver presses the brake pedal.

Active Safety Brake

This function, also called automatic emergency braking, intervenes following the alerts if the driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicle’s brakes. The system aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a collision where the driver fails to react.

Operation The system operates subject to the following conditions: The vehicle’s speed does not exceed 37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. The vehicle’s speed does not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected.

The vehicle’s speed is between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) when a moving vehicle is detected.

This warning lamp flashes (for approximately 10 seconds) as soon as

the function applies the vehicles brakes. With an automatic gearbox, in the event of automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, keep the brake pedal depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving off again. With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, the engine may stall.

The driver can maintain control of the vehicle at any time by firmly turning the

steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the accelerator pedal.

The brake pedal may vibrate slightly while the function is operating.

If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 seconds.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel,

accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal.

109

Driving

6 The vehicle’s speed is between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) when a moving vehicle is detected.

This warning lamp flashes (for approximately 10 seconds) as soon as

the function applies the vehicles brakes. With an automatic gearbox, in the event of automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, keep the brake pedal depressed to prevent the vehicle from moving off again. With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a complete stop, the engine may stall.

The driver can maintain control of the vehicle at any time by firmly turning the

steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the accelerator pedal.

The brake pedal may vibrate slightly while the function is operating.

If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 seconds.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel,

accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal.

Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

These warning lamps light up on the instrument panel to indicate

that the driver’s and/or front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened (depending on version). The automatic braking system is deactivated until the seat belts are fastened.

Distraction detection For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

Depending on version, the function consists of either the «Coffee Break Alert» system alone or combined with the «Driver Attention Warning» system.

These systems are in no way designed to keep the driver awake or to prevent

the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. It is the drivers responsibility to stop if feeling tired. Take a break if you are feeling tired or at least every 2 hours.

Activation/Deactivation The settings are changed via the vehicle configuration menu.

The status of the function is saved when the ignition is switched off.

Coffee Break Alert The system triggers an alert when it detects that the driver has not taken a

break after two hours of driving at a speed above 43 mph (70 km/h). This alert is issued via the display of a message encouraging the driver to take a break, accompanied by an audible signal. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. The system resets itself if one of the following conditions is met: With the engine running, the vehicle has been stationary for more than 15 minutes. The ignition has been switched off for a few minutes. The driver’s seat belt is unfastened and their door is opened.

As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops below 43 mph (70 km/h), the

system goes into standby. Driving time starts being counted again once the speed reaches above 43 mph (70 km/h).

Driver Attention Warning Depending on version, the Coffee Break Alert system may be combined with the Driver Attention Warning system.

110

Driving

The system assesses the driver’s level of alertness, fatigue and distraction by

identifying trajectory changes in relation to the lane markings. To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on the upper part of the windscreen. This system is particularly suited to fast roads (speed higher than 43 mph (70 km/h)). At a first alert level, the driver is warned by the message «Be vigilant!«, accompanied by an audible signal. After three first-level alerts, the system triggers a further alert with the message «Dangerous driving: take a break«, accompanied by a more pronounced audible signal.

In certain driving conditions (poor road surface or strong winds), the system may

give alerts independent of the driver’s level of vigilance.

The following situations may interfere with the operation of the system or

prevent it from working: lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks); close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings not detected); roads that are narrow, winding, etc.

Lane departure warning system

For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system, using a camera which recognises solid or broken lines, detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the ground. If the driver’s attention drops and the speed is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h), the system triggers a warning if there is an unexpected change of direction. This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads.

Deactivation / Activation The system is activated every time the ignition is switched on.

OFF

To deactivate the system, press this button. Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of the indicator lamp on the button and

this warning lamp on the instrument panel. Reactivation is carried out via another press; the indicator lamp on the button and the warning lamp go out.

Detection If an unexpected change of direction is detected, this warning lamp flashes in the

instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal. No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is activated and for approximately 20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp comes on on the

instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Blind spot monitoring For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system warns the driver of a potential danger posed by the presence of another vehicle (car, lorry, motorcycle) in the vehicle’s blind spots (areas hidden from the driver’s field of vision) using sensors located on the sides of the bumpers.

111

Driving

6Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp comes on on the

instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Blind spot monitoring For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system warns the driver of a potential danger posed by the presence of another vehicle (car, lorry, motorcycle) in the vehicle’s blind spots (areas hidden from the driver’s field of vision) using sensors located on the sides of the bumpers.

The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp that appears in the door mirror on the side in question: immediately, when being overtaken; after a delay of about one second, when overtaking a vehicle slowly.

Activation/Deactivation It is set via theDriving/Vehicle touch screen menu.

When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp comes on in each mirror to indicate that the system is activated. The status of the system is memorised when the ignition is switched off.

The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towing device

approved by CITRON.

Operating conditions All vehicles are moving in the same direction and in adjacent lanes. The speed of your vehicle must be between 7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h).

When overtaking a vehicle, the speed difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h). Traffic is flowing normally. Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in the blind spot. You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, etc.

Operating limits

112

Driving

No alert is triggered in the following conditions: presence of stationary objects (e.g. parked vehicles, safety rails, lampposts, signs). vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. on winding roads or in case of sharp turns. when overtaking or being overtaken by a very long vehicle (e.g. truck, bus), which is both detected in a blind spot from behind and present in the driver’s field of vision from the front. quick overtaking manoeuvre. very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or a stationary object.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, this warning lamp flashes for a few

moments in the instrument panel, accompanied

by the Service warning lamp coming on and the display of a message. Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

The system may be temporarily disturbed by certain climatic conditions (e.g. rain,

hail). In particular, driving on a wet road or going from a dry to a wet area can cause false alerts (e.g. presence of a cloud of water droplets in the blind spot interpreted as a vehicle). In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors, or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper correct operation of the system.

Parking sensors For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system detects and signals the proximity of obstacles (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) using sensors located in the bumper.

Rear parking sensors Engage reverse gear to start the system (confirmed by an audible signal). The system is switched off when reverse gear is disengaged.

Audible assistance

The system signals the presence of obstacles within the sensors detection zone. The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.

When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than about thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous. The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.

Visual assistance

This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars on the screen whose location represents the distance between the obstacle and the vehicle (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very close). When the obstacle is very close, the «Danger» symbol is displayed on the screen.

Front parking sensors In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle

113

Driving

6When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than about thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous. The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.

Visual assistance

This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars on the screen whose location represents the distance between the obstacle and the vehicle (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very close). When the obstacle is very close, the «Danger» symbol is displayed on the screen.

Front parking sensors In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle

is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle remains below 6 mph (10 km/h). The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

The sound emitted by the speaker (front or rear) indicates whether the obstacle is

in front or behind.

Deactivation/Activation With/Without audio system

To deactivate or activate the system, press this button. The indicator lamp is on when the system is deactivated. With touch screen

In the Driving/Vehicle menu, select the «Driving functions» tab, then

«Parking sensors«.

The system status is memorised when the ignition is switched off.

The rear parking sensors system will be deactivated automatically if a trailer or

bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Operating limits If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, affecting distance measurements.

Malfunction In the event of a malfunction when changing into reverse gear, this warning

lamp lights up on the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal (short beep). Have it checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Top Rear Vision For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

114

Driving

As soon as reverse gear is engaged with the engine running, this system displays views of your vehicles close surroundings on the touch screen using a camera located at the rear of the vehicle.

The screen is divided into two parts with a contextual view and a view from above the vehicle in its close surroundings. The parking sensors supplement the information on the view from above the vehicle. Various contextual views may be displayed: Standard view. 180 view. Zoom view. AUTO mode is activated by default. In this mode, the system chooses the best view to display (standard or zoom). You can change the type of view at any time during a manoeuvre. The system status is not saved when the ignition is switched off.

Principle of operation

Using the rear camera, the vehicle’s close surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres at low speed. An image from above your vehicle in its close surroundings is reconstructed (represented

between the brackets) in real time and as the manoeuvre progresses. It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the vehicle remains stationary for too long.

Rear view

To activate the camera located on the tailgate, engage reverse gear and do not exceed a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). The system is deactivated: Automatically, at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. Upon changing out of reverse gear (the image remains displayed for 7 seconds). By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left corner of the touch screen.

AUTO mode

This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view changes from the rear view (standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is approached at the level of the red line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.

Standard view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

115

Driving

6AUTO mode

This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view changes from the rear view (standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is approached at the level of the red line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.

Standard view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

The blue lines 1 represent the width of your vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction changes according to the position of the steering wheel. The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu.

Zoom view

The camera records the vehicle’s surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to create a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu.

Obstacles may appear further away than they actually are.

It is important to monitor the sides of the vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the mirrors. Parking sensors also provide additional information about the area around the vehicle.

180 view

The 180 view facilitates reversing out of a parking space, making it possible to see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C.

116

Driving

This view is only available via the view selection menu.

Quick start mode

This mode displays, as quickly as possible, the contextual view (left-hand part) and the overhead view of the vehicle. A message is displayed advising you to check your vehicle’s surroundings before starting the manoeuvre.

Park Assist For more information, refer to the General recommendations on the use

of driving and manoeuvring aids.

This system provides active parking assistance: it detects a parking space and then steers in the appropriate direction to park in the space while the driver controls the driving direction, gear changes, acceleration and braking.

To help the driver monitor the manoeuvre, the system automatically triggers the display from the Top Rear Vision function and activates the parking sensors. The system measures the available parking spaces and calculates the distances to obstacles using ultrasonic sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of the vehicle.

The system assists with the following manoeuvres: A. Entering a «parallel» parking space B. Leaving a «parallel» parking space C. Entering a «bay» parking space

Operation When approaching a parking area, reduce the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) or less.

Activating the function The function is activated in the Vehicle/ Driving touch screen menu.

Select «Park Assist«.

Activating the function deactivates the Blind spot monitoring system.

You can deactivate the function at any time until the parking space entry or exit

manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow located in the top left-hand corner of the display page.

Selecting the type of manoeuvre

A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the touch screen: by default, the «Entry» page if the vehicle has been running since the ignition was switched on, otherwise, the «Exit» page. Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to activate the parking space search. The selected manoeuvre can be changed at any time, even while searching for an available space.

Parking space search You should drive at a distance of between 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h), until the system finds an available space. The parking space search stops over this limit. The function automatically deactivates once the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h).

For »parallel» parking, the space must at a minimum be equal to the length of your

vehicle plus 0.60 m. For »bay» parking, the width of the space must be equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m.

If the parking sensors function has been deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu

of the touch screen, it will be automatically reactivated when the system is activated.

117

Driving

6Parking space search You should drive at a distance of between 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h), until the system finds an available space. The parking space search stops over this limit. The function automatically deactivates once the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h).

For »parallel» parking, the space must at a minimum be equal to the length of your

vehicle plus 0.60 m. For »bay» parking, the width of the space must be equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m.

If the parking sensors function has been deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu

of the touch screen, it will be automatically reactivated when the system is activated.

When the system finds an available space, «OK» is displayed on the parking view, accompanied by an audible signal.

Preparing for the manoeuvre Move very slowly until the request to stop the vehicle is displayed: «Stop the vehicle«, accompanied by the «STOP» sign and an audible signal. Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions page is displayed on the screen. To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the instructions. The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by the message «Manoeuvre under way«, accompanied by an audible signal. Reversing is indicated by this message: «Release the steering wheel, reverse«. The Top Rear Vision function and the parking sensors are automatically activated to help you monitor your vehicle’s close surroundings during the manoeuvre.

During the manoeuvre The system controls the vehicles steering. It gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction when starting «parallel» entry and exit parking manoeuvres, and for all «bay» entry manoeuvres. These instructions are displayed as a symbol accompanied by a message:

«Reverse».

Go forwards».

The manoeuvring status is indicated by these symbols:

Manoeuvre in progress (green).

Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) (the arrows indicate that the driver must

resume control of the vehicle). The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are indicated by these symbols:

7 5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry.

5 3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit.

During manoeuvring phases, the steering wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold

the steering wheel or put your hands between the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out for any objects that could interfere with the manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). Risk of injury! It is the driver’s responsibility to constantly monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming towards you. The driver should check that no objects or people are obstructing the vehicles path.

118

Driving

The images from the camera(s) displayed on the touch screen may be

distorted by the terrain. In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight or lighting conditions, the image may be darkened and with lower contrast.

The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted at any time, either by the driver or automatically by the system. Interruption by the driver: taking over control of the steering. activating the direction indicator lamps on the opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. unfastening the driver’s seat belt. switching off the ignition. Interruption by the system: vehicle exceeding the speed limit of 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking space exit manoeuvres. activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery road. opening of a door or the boot. engine stall. system malfunction. after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a parking bay. Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically deactivates the function.

The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, accompanied by the «Manoeuvre cancelled» message on the touch screen. A message prompts the driver to take back control of the vehicle.

End of the parking space entry or exit manoeuvre The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is completed. The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, accompanied by the message «Manoeuvre completed» on the touch screen. When entering a parking space, the driver may be required to complete the manoeuvre.

Operating limits The system may suggest an inappropriate parking space (parking prohibited, work in progress with damaged road surface, location alongside a ditch, etc.). The system may indicate that a space has been found but will not offer it because of a fixed obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, which would not allow the vehicle to follow a trajectory required for parking. The system may indicate that a space has been found but the manoeuvre will not be triggered, because the width of the lane is insufficient. The system is not designed for performing the parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend.

The system does not detect spaces that are much larger than the vehicle itself or that are delimited by obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences, etc.). If the boot is heavily loaded, the tilt of the vehicle towards the rear may interfere with the distance measurements.

Do not use the function under the following exterior conditions:

Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or quay or on the edge of a drop. When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice).

If any of the following malfunctions occurs, do not use the system:

If a tyre is under-inflated. If one of the bumpers is damaged. If one of the cameras is faulty.

If the vehicle has undergone any of the following modifications, do not use the

function: When carrying an object extending beyond the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). With a non-approved towball in place. With snow chains fitted. When driving on a small-diameter or «space-saver» type spare wheel. When the wheels fitted are a different size from the original ones.

After modifying one or both bumpers (added protection). If the sensors have been repainted other than by the CITRON dealer network. With sensors not approved for the vehicle.

Malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs during use, indicated by this warning lamp

coming on, it causes the function to deactivate. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the event of a power steering malfunction, this warning lamp is

displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by a warning message.

You must stop the vehicle. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and

switch off the ignition. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

119

Driving

6 After modifying one or both bumpers (added protection). If the sensors have been repainted other than by the CITRON dealer network. With sensors not approved for the vehicle.

Malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs during use, indicated by this warning lamp

coming on, it causes the function to deactivate. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

In the event of a power steering malfunction, this warning lamp is

displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied by a warning message.

You must stop the vehicle. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and

switch off the ignition. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

WITH TOTAL QUARTZ LUBRICANTS

FILL UP WITH CONFIDENCE

For more than 50 years, TOTAL and CITRON have shared common values: excellence, creativity and technological innovation.

It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants adapted for engines in CITRON vehicles, making them ever more fuel efficient and environmentally friendly.

TOTAL and CITRON test the reliability and the performance of their products under extreme motorsport conditions.

Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants when servicing your vehicle; they are your assurance of optimum engine life and performance.

prefers

Compatibility of fuels

Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol respectively.

Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 and EN16709 standards and containing up to 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even occasionally, imposes special maintenance conditions referred to as «Arduous conditions».

Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 standard.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (e.g. pure or diluted vegetable or animal

oils, domestic fuel) is strictly prohibited — risk of damaging the engine and fuel system!

The only fuel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 (petrol)

or B715000 (Diesel) standards.

Diesel at low temperature At temperatures below 0 C (+32 F), the formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel

121

Practical information

7Compatibility of fuels

Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol respectively.

Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 and EN16709 standards and containing up to 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even occasionally, imposes special maintenance conditions referred to as «Arduous conditions».

Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 standard.

The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (e.g. pure or diluted vegetable or animal

oils, domestic fuel) is strictly prohibited — risk of damaging the engine and fuel system!

The only fuel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 (petrol)

or B715000 (Diesel) standards.

Diesel at low temperature At temperatures below 0 C (+32 F), the formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel

fuels could prevent the engine from operating correctly. In these temperature conditions, use winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank more than 50 % full. At temperatures below -15 C (+5 F) to avoid problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle under shelter (heated garage).

Travelling abroad Certain fuels could damage your vehicles engine. In certain countries, the use of a particular fuel may be required (specific octane rating, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct operation of the engine. For all additional information, consult a dealer.

Refuelling Fuel tank capacity: approximately 45 litres. Reserve level: approximately 5 litres.

Low fuel level /2 1

1 When the low fuel level is reached, one of these warning lamps lights

up on the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal. When it first comes on, about 5 litres of fuel remain. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp appears every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by the message and the audible signal. When driving, this message and audible

signal are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on Running out of fuel (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.

A small arrow by the warning lamp indicates which side of the vehicle the

fuel filler flap is located on.

Stop & Start Never refuel with the engine in STOP

mode; you must switch off the ignition.

Refuelling When refuelling, at least 5 litres must be added in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is normal, caused by the sealing of the fuel system. To refuel in complete safety: Always switch off the engine.

122

Practical information

With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear- central part of the filler flap to open it. Take care to select the pump that delivers the correct fuel type for your vehicle’s engine (see a reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). Turn the filler cap to the left, remove it and place it on its support (on the filler flap).

Insert the filler nozzle and push it in as far as possible before starting to refuel (to minimise the risk of splashing).

Do not continue after the nozzles third cut- out. Doing so may cause malfunctions. Put the filler cap back in place and turn it to the right. Close the fuel filler flap.

If you have put in the wrong fuel for the vehicle, you must have the fuel tank

drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine.

The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. For petrol engines, you must use unleaded fuel. The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded petrol nozzles only.

Fuel cut-off Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a collision.

Misfuel prevention (Diesel) (Depending on country of sale.) This mechanical device prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device is visible when the filler cap is removed.

Operation

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle.

The misfuel prevention device does not prevent filling with a jerrycan, regardless

of the fuel type.

Travelling abroad As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be

different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to check with a CITRON dealer if the vehicle is suitable for the distribution equipment of the countries visited.

Snow chains In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.

Snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to

«space-saver» type spare wheels.

Observe the legislation in force in your country relating to the use of snow

chains and maximum authorised speeds.

Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to the vehicle:

Original tyre size Chain types

195/65 R15 Maximum 9 mm link

195/60 R16

205/60 R16 Cannot be fitted with chains215/50 R17

For more information on snow chains, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Installation tips To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the road. Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent movement of the vehicle.

123

Practical information

7Snow chains In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.

Snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to

«space-saver» type spare wheels.

Observe the legislation in force in your country relating to the use of snow

chains and maximum authorised speeds.

Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to the vehicle:

Original tyre size Chain types

195/65 R15 Maximum 9 mm link

195/60 R16

205/60 R16 Cannot be fitted with chains215/50 R17

For more information on snow chains, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Installation tips To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the road. Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent movement of the vehicle.

Fit the snow chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer. Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). Stop the vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.

It is strongly recommended that you practise fitting the snow chains on a level

and dry surface before setting off.

Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow to avoid

damaging the vehicle’s tyres and the road surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.

Towing device with quickly detachable towball Presentation No tools are required to install or remove this genuine towing device.

1. Carrier 2. Protective plug 3. Connection socket 4. Safety eye 5. Detachable towball 6. Locking/unlocking wheel 7. Security key lock 8. Label to note the key references

124

Practical information

A. Locked position (green mark opposite the white mark); the wheel is in contact with the towball (no gap).

B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite the white mark); the wheel is no longer in contact with the towball (gap of around 5 mm).

Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible location, close to the carrier or in the

boot.

Trailers with LED lamps are not compatible with the wiring harness of this

device.

To ensure complete safety while driving with a Towing device, refer to the

corresponding section.

Before each use Verify that the towball is correctly fitted,

checking the follow points: The green mark on the wheel is aligned with the white mark on the towball. The wheel is in contact with the towball (position A). The security key lock is closed and the key removed; the wheel can no longer be operated. The towball must not be able to move in its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with your hand.

If the towball is not locked, the trailer can become detached — risk of an accident!

During use Never release the locking system with a

trailer or load carrier on the towball. Never exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle — the Gross Train Weight or GTW. Always comply with the maximum authorised load on the towing device: if it is exceeded, this device may become detached from the vehicle — risk of an accident! Before driving, check the headlamp height adjustment and check that the lamps on the trailer operate correctly. For more information on Headlamp height adjustment, refer to the corresponding section.

After use When travelling without a trailer or

load carrier, remove the towball and fit the protective plug into the carrier, to provide clear visibility of the number plate and/or its lighting.

Fitting the towball

Below the rear bumper, remove the protective plug 2 from the carrier 1.

Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position automatically.

125

Practical information

7

The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear!

Check that the mechanism has correctly locked into place and that the green mark on the wheel is aligned with the white mark on the towball (position A). Close the lock 7 using the key. Remove the key. The key cannot be removed while the lock is open. Clip the cap onto the lock.

Remove the protective cover from the towball. Attach the trailer to the towball. Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety eye 4 on the carrier. Tilt the connection socket 3 to put it in position. Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a quarter turn to connect it to the connection socket 3 on the carrier.

Removing the towball

Grasp the trailer’s plug, perform a quarter turn and pull to disconnect it from the connection socket 3 on the carrier. Tilt the connection socket 3 to the left to stow it away. Detach the trailer’s safety cable from the safety eye 4 on the carrier. Unhitch the trailer from the towball. Replace the protective cover over the towball.

Remove the cap from the lock. Insert the key into the lock 7.

126

Practical information

Open the lock using the key. Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in a clockwise direction until it stops; do not release the wheel.

Extract the towball from the base of its carrier 1. Release the wheel; it automatically locks in the unlocked position and the red mark on the wheel is in line with the white mark on the towball (position B).

Replace the protective plug 2 into the carrier 1. Stow the towball in its bag to protect it from knocks and dirt.

Maintenance Correct operation is only possible if the towball and its carrier are kept clean. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed and the protective plug fitted to the carrier.

Work on the towing device Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified

workshop.

Towing device Load distribution Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the

axle, and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it. Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. The maximum towable load must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude.

Use genuine towing devices and wiring harnesses approved by CITRON. We

recommend having them fitted by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. If not fitted by a CITRON dealer, they must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer’s instructions. Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions are automatically deactivated while an approved towing system is in use. For more information about driving with a towing device fitted to a trailer and associated with the Trailer stability assist, refer to the corresponding section.

Comply with the maximum authorised towable weight, as indicated on your

vehicle’s registration certificate, on the manufacturer’s label and in the Technical data section of this guide.

If using accessories attached to the towing device (e.g. bicycle carriers, tow

boxes): Comply with the maximum authorised nose weight.

Do not transport more than 4 conventional bicycles or 2 electric bicycles. When loading bicycles onto a bicycle carrier on a towball, be sure to place the heaviest bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.

Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving.

Load reduction mode This system manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning and the heated rear screen. The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Energy economy mode This system manages the duration of use of certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. After switching off the engine and for a maximum cumulative period of around 30 minutes, you can continue to use functions such as the audio and telematics system, dipped beam headlamps or courtesy lamps.

127

Practical information

7 Do not transport more than 4 conventional bicycles or 2 electric bicycles. When loading bicycles onto a bicycle carrier on a towball, be sure to place the heaviest bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.

Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving.

Load reduction mode This system manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning and the heated rear screen. The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Energy economy mode This system manages the duration of use of certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. After switching off the engine and for a maximum cumulative period of around 30 minutes, you can continue to use functions such as the audio and telematics system, dipped beam headlamps or courtesy lamps.

Selecting the mode A confirmation message is displayed when energy economy mode is entered, and the active functions are placed on standby.

If a telephone call is in progress at the time, it will be maintained for around 10

minutes via the audio systems hands-free system.

Exiting the mode These functions are automatically reactivated the next time the vehicle is used. To restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: For less than 10 minutes, to use the equipment for approximately 5 minutes. For more than 10 minutes, to use the equipment for approximately 30 minutes. Let the engine run for the specified duration to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or continuously restarting the engine.

A flat battery prevents the engine from starting.

For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.

Roof bars As a safety measure and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use

transverse roof bars approved for your vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof bars.

Fitting directly to the roof

You must only attach the transverse bars to the four fixing points located on the roof frame. These points are concealed by the vehicle doors when the doors are closed. The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be inserted into the opening of each fixing point.

128

Practical information

Fitting on longitudinal bars

The transverse bars must be fixed at the markings located on the longitudinal bars.

Sunroof Check that the load does not pass below

the roof bars so that it does not impede the movements of the sunroof — risk of major damage!

Recommendations Distribute the load uniformly, taking care

to avoid overloading one of the sides. Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof. Secure the load firmly. Drive gently: the vehicle will be more susceptible to the effects of side winds and its stability may be affected. Regularly check the security and tight fastening of the roof bars, at least before each trip. Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed.

Maximum load distributed over the roof bars, for a loading height not exceeding

40 cm: without longitudinal bars: 50 kg. with longitudinal bars: 45 kg. As this value may change, please verify the maximum load quoted in the guide supplied with the roof bars. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the vehicle. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than the vehicle.

Bonnet Stop & Start Before doing anything under the bonnet,

you must switch off the ignition to avoid any risk of the engine restarting automatically. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the cooling fan or in certain moving components — risk of strangulation and serious injury!

The location of the interior bonnet release lever prevents the bonnet being

opened when the left-hand front door is closed.

When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay

with care (risk of burns), using the protected area. When the bonnet is open, take care not to damage the safety catch. Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions.

Cooling of the engine when stopped The engine cooling fan may start after

the engine has been switched off. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan!

Opening

Open the left-hand front door.

129

Practical information

7 Pull the interior release lever, located at the bottom of the door frame, towards you.

Tilt the safety catch to the left and raise the bonnet.

Unclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.

Closing Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the support slot. Clip the stay in its housing. Lower the bonnet and release it near the end of its travel. Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked correctly.

Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly

recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited.

Engine compartment The engine shown here is an example for illustrative purposes only. The locations of the following components may vary: Air filter. Engine oil dipstick. Engine oil filler cap. Priming pump.

Petrol engine

Diesel engine

1. Screenwash fluid reservoir 2. Engine coolant reservoir 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Battery 5. Remote earth point (-) 6. Fusebox 7. Air filter 8. Engine oil filler cap 9. Engine oil dipstick

130

Practical information

10. Priming pump*

Diesel fuel system This system is under very high pressure.

All work must be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop

Checking levels Check all of the following levels regularly in accordance with the manufacturer’s service schedule. Top them up if required, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

The fluids must comply with the manufacturer’s requirements and with

the vehicle’s engine.

Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine

may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).

* Depending on engine.

Used products Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin.

Most of these fluids are harmful to health and very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground.

Empty used oil into the containers reserved for this purpose at a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Engine oil The level is checked, with the engine having been switched off for at least 30

minutes and on level ground, either using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). It is recommended that you check the level, and top up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).

In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emissions control system,

never use additives in the engine oil.

Checking using the dipstick For the location of the dipstick, please refer to the illustration of the corresponding engine compartment. Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and pull it out completely. Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, lint-free cloth.

Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down, then pull it out again to visually check the oil level: the correct level is between marks A (max) and B (min). Do not start the engine if the level is: above mark A: contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. below mark B: top up the engine oil immediately.

Oil grade Before topping up or changing the

engine oil, check that the oil is suitable for your engine and complies with the recommendations in the service schedule

supplied with the vehicle (or available from your CITRON dealer or qualified workshop). Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate your warranty in the event of engine failure.

Topping up the engine oil level For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please refer to the corresponding engine compartment illustration. Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills on engine components (risk of fire). Wait a few minutes before checking the level again using the dipstick. Top up the level if necessary. After checking the level, carefully screw the oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in its tube.

The oil level indication displayed on the instrument panel when the ignition is

switched on is not valid for 30 minutes following an addition of oil.

Brake fluid The level of this fluid should be close to the «MAX» mark. If not, check the brake

pads for wear. To know how often the brake fluid should be replaced, refer to the manufacturer’s servicing schedule.

131

Practical information

7supplied with the vehicle (or available from your CITRON dealer or qualified workshop). Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate your warranty in the event of engine failure.

Topping up the engine oil level For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please refer to the corresponding engine compartment illustration. Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills on engine components (risk of fire). Wait a few minutes before checking the level again using the dipstick. Top up the level if necessary. After checking the level, carefully screw the oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in its tube.

The oil level indication displayed on the instrument panel when the ignition is

switched on is not valid for 30 minutes following an addition of oil.

Brake fluid The level of this fluid should be close to the «MAX» mark. If not, check the brake

pads for wear. To know how often the brake fluid should be replaced, refer to the manufacturer’s servicing schedule.

Clean the cap before removing it to refill. Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed

container.

Engine coolant It is normal to top up this fluid between two services.

The check and top-up must only be done with the engine cold. A level of coolant that is too low risks causing major damage to the engine; the coolant level must be close to the «MAX» mark without ever going above it. If the level is close to or below the «MIN» mark, it is essential to top it up. When the engine is hot, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan. As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up to the required level.

Cooling of the engine when stopped The engine cooling fan may start after

the engine has been switched off. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan!

Screenwash fluid Top up to the required level when necessary.

Fluid specification The fluid must be topped up with a pre-mixed product. In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid containing an anti-freeze agent which is appropriate for the temperature conditions must be used in order to protect the system’s components (pump, tank, ducts, jets).

Filling with pure water is prohibited in all circumstances (risk of freezing,

limescale, etc.).

Diesel fuel additive (Diesel with particle filter)

On reaching the minimum level in the particle filter additive tank, this warning

lamp comes on fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a warning message.

Topping up The topping up of this additive must be carried out quickly. Visit a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

AdBlue (BlueHDi) An alert is triggered when the reserve level is reached.

132

Practical information

For more information on the Indicators and in particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to the corresponding section. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in accordance with regulations, you must top up the AdBlue tank. For more information on AdBlue (BlueHDi), and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to the corresponding section.

Checks Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer’s service schedule and according to your engine. Otherwise, have them checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Only use products recommended by CITRON or products of equivalent

quality and specification. In order to optimise the operation of components as important as those in the braking system, CITRON selects and offers very specific products.

12 V battery The battery does not require any maintenance.

Check regularly that the terminals are correctly tightened (versions without quick-release terminals) and that the connections are clean.

For more information on the precautions to take before any work on the 12 V

battery, refer to the corresponding section.

Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery with

special technology and specifications. Its replacement should be carried out only by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Passenger compartment filter

Depending on the environment and the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,

city driving), change it twice as often, if necessary.

A clogged passenger compartment filter can adversely affect air conditioning

system performance and generate undesirable odours.

Air filter Depending on the environment and the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,

city driving), change it twice as often, if necessary.

Oil filter Change the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed.

Particle filter (Diesel) The start of clogging of the particle filter is indicated by the temporary lighting of this

warning lamp, accompanied by an alert message. As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low Diesel additive level.

For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section.

Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you

may, in exceptional circumstances, notice water vapour coming from the exhaust while accelerating. These emissions have no impact on the vehicles behaviour and the environment.

New vehicle During the first few particle filter

regeneration operations, you may notice a «burning» smell. This is perfectly normal.

Manual gearbox The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Automatic gearbox The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Brake pads Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles

used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the

brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and defrost them.

Brake disc wear For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a CITRON dealer or a

qualified workshop.

Manual parking brake If you notice excessive brake lever travel or decreased effectiveness, the parking

brake must be adjusted, even between two services. This system must be checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

133

Practical information

7Automatic gearbox The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Brake pads Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles

used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.

After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the

brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and defrost them.

Brake disc wear For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a CITRON dealer or a

qualified workshop.

Manual parking brake If you notice excessive brake lever travel or decreased effectiveness, the parking

brake must be adjusted, even between two services. This system must be checked by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Wheels and tyres The inflation pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, must be

checked on «cold tyres. The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure label are valid for «cold» tyres. If you have driven for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the label.

Under-inflation increases energy consumption. Non-compliant tyre

pressures cause tyres to wear prematurely and have an adverse effect on the vehicle’s road holding — risk of accident!

Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the braking and road holding performance of the vehicle. Regularly check the condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and rims as well as the presence of the valve caps. When the wear indicators no longer appear set back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is less than 1.6 mm; replace the tyres as soon as possible. Using different size wheels and tyres from those specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer reading and have an adverse effect on road holding. Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles can cause the ESC to mistime.

Always mark the direction of rotation on the tyres that will be stored when fitting winter or summer tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place and away from direct exposure to the sun’s rays.

Winter or 4-seasons tyres can be identified by this symbol on their

sidewalls.

AdBlue (BlueHDi) To respect the environment and ensure compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without adversely affecting the performance or fuel consumption of its Diesel engines, CITRON has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with a system that combines SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases.

SCR system Using a liquid called AdBlue that contains urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are harmless to health and the environment.

The AdBlue is contained in a special tank holding about 17 litres.

Its capacity allows a driving range of approximately 3,900 miles (6,500 km), which may vary considerably depending on your driving style. An alert system is triggered once the reserve level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a

134

Practical information

further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is empty and the vehicle is immobilised. If the estimated distance travelled by the vehicle between two services is greater than 12,500 miles (20,000 km), it will be necessary to top up the AdBlue.

For more information on the Warning and indicator lamps and the associated

alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the corresponding sections.

Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a device required by law prevents the engine from

being restarted. If the SCR system is faulty, the level of emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet the Euro 6 standard and the vehicle starts polluting the environment. In the event of a confirmed SCR system malfunction, it is essential to visit a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. After 685 miles (1,100 km), a device is automatically activated to prevent the engine from starting. In both cases, a range indicator indicates the distance that can be travelled before the vehicle is stopped.

Freezing of the AdBlue

AdBlue freezes at temperatures below around -11C.

The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue tank, allowing you to continue driving in very cold conditions.

Supply of AdBlue

It is recommended that the AdBlue be topped up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating that the reserve level has been reached.

For the correct operation of the SCR system:

Use only AdBlue fluid that meets the ISO 22241 standard. Never transfer AdBlue to another container as it would lose its purity. Never dilute AdBlue with water.

You can obtain AdBlue from a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop, as well as service stations equipped with AdBlue pumps specially designed for passenger vehicles.

Never top up from an AdBlue dispenser reserved for heavy goods vehicles.

Recommendations on storage AdBlue freezes at about -11C and deteriorates above +25C. Containers should be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for at least a year. If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has completely thawed out at room temperature.

Never store AdBlue containers in your vehicle.

Precautions for use AdBlue is a urea-based solution. This fluid is non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when kept in a cool place). In the event of contact with the skin, wash the affected area with soap and running water. In the event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse the eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if you feel a persistent burning sensation or irritation. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions (high temperature, for example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia vapours have an irritant effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).

Store AdBlue out of the reach of children, in its original container.

Procedure Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is above -11C. Otherwise the AdBlue may be frozen and so cannot be poured into the tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area

for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out.

Never pour the AdBlue into the Diesel fuel tank.

If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse

immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.

Important: in the event of a top-up after a breakdown because of a lack of

AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 minutes before switching on the ignition, without opening the drivers door, unlocking the vehicle, inserting the key into the ignition switch, or bringing the key for the «Keyless Entry and Start» system into the passenger compartment. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 seconds before starting the engine.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the switch to switch off the engine. or With Keyless Entry and Start, press the «START/STOP» button to switch off the engine.

135

Practical information

7for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out.

Never pour the AdBlue into the Diesel fuel tank.

If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse

immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.

Important: in the event of a top-up after a breakdown because of a lack of

AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 minutes before switching on the ignition, without opening the drivers door, unlocking the vehicle, inserting the key into the ignition switch, or bringing the key for the «Keyless Entry and Start» system into the passenger compartment. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 seconds before starting the engine.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the switch to switch off the engine. or With Keyless Entry and Start, press the «START/STOP» button to switch off the engine.

With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler flap open, turn the blue cap of the AdBlue tank a quarter turn anti-clockwise.

Filling up

With a container of AdBlue: after checking the expiry date, read the instructions on the label carefully before pouring the contents of the container into the vehicle’s AdBlue tank. With an AdBlue pump: insert the nozzle and fill the tank until the nozzle automatically cuts out.

In order not to overfill the AdBlue tank: Add between 10 and 13 litres using

AdBlue containers. Stop after the nozzles first automatic cut- out, if you are refilling at a service station. The system only registers AdBlue top-ups of 5 litres or more.

If the AdBlue tank is completely empty which is confirmed by the message

Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible it is essential to add at least 5 litres.

After refilling

Perform the same sequence of operations in reverse order.

Do not dispose of AdBlue containers in the household waste.

Place them in a container reserved for this purpose or take them back to where you purchased them.

Advice on care and maintenance General recommendations Observe the following recommendations to avoid damaging the vehicle. Exterior

Never use a high-pressure jet wash in the engine compartment — risk of

damaging the electrical components! Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine or extremely cold conditions.

When washing the vehicle in an automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure

to lock the doors and, depending on version,

136

Practical information

move the electronic key away and deactivate the «hands-free» function (Hands-Free Tailgate Access). When using a pressure washer, keep the jet nozzle at a minimum distance of 30 cm from the vehicle (particularly when cleaning areas containing chipped paint, sensors or seals). Promptly clean up any stains containing chemicals liable to damage the vehicle’s paintwork (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect secretions, pollen and tar). Depending on the environment, clean the vehicle frequently to remove salty deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial areas) and mud/salts (in wet or cold areas). These substances can be highly corrosive. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop for advice on removing stubborn stains requiring special products (such as tar or insect removers). Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed by a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Interior

When washing the vehicle, never use a water hose or high-pressure jet to clean

the interior. Liquids carried in cups or other open containers can spill, presenting a risk of damage to the instruments and controls and

the controls located on the centre console. Be vigilant! To clean instrument panels, touch screens or other displays, wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use products (e.g. alcohol, disinfectant) or soapy water directly on these surfaces — risk of damage!

Bodywork High-gloss paint

Do not use abrasive products, solvents, petrol or oil to clean the bodywork.

Never use an abrasive sponge to clean stubborn stains — risk of scratching the paintwork! Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to plastic or rubber parts.

Use a soft cloth and soapy water or a pH neutral product.

Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean microfibre cloth. Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. Comply with the instructions for use stated on the product.

Decals (Depending on version)

Do not use a high-pressure washer to clean the vehicle — risk of damaging or

detaching the decals!

Use a high-flow hose (temperature between 25C and 40C).

Place the jet of water perpendicular to the surface to be cleaned. Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.

137

In the event of a breakdown

8Running out of fuel (Diesel) With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. Before starting to prime the system, it is essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the fuel tank.

For more information on Refuelling and on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), refer to

the corresponding section.

For non-BlueHDi versions, the fuel system components are located in the engine compartment; this may be under a removable cover.

For more information on the Engine compartment, in particular the location

of these components under the bonnet, refer to the corresponding section.

BlueHDi engines Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine). Wait around 1 minute and switch off the ignition. Operate the starter motor to start the engine. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.

Non-BlueHDi engines Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, unclip the cover to access the priming pump.

Operate the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (resistance may be

felt at the first press). Operate the starter motor to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again, then the starter motor. Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then close the bonnet.

Tool kit Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. Its content depends on your vehicle’s equipment: Temporary puncture repair kit. Spare wheel.

Accessing the tools Depending on version, the tool kit is stored in a bag or in a storage box in the boot.

List of tools

1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle (depending on equipment)

2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in the glove box or in the tool box) (depending on country of sale) To adapt the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.

138

In the event of a breakdown

Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on this label.

For more information on Identification markings, particularly this label, refer to the corresponding section.

For more information on the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section.

3. Removable towing eye and flat blade screwdriver The flat blade screwdriver allows the cover plate on the front or rear bumper to be opened to screw in the removable towing eye.

For more information on Towing the vehicle and using the removable towing eye, refer to the corresponding section.

With temporary puncture repair kit

4. 12 V compressor with cartridge of sealant and speed limit sticker For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust the tyre pressure.

For more information about the Temporary puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding section.

With spare wheel

5. Wheelbrace For removing the wheel bolts.

6. Jack with integrated handle To raise the vehicle.

7. Wheel bolt cap removal tool (stored in the glove box, tool bag or tool box) (depending on equipment) For removing the wheel trim from steel wheels or the central bolt cover from alloy wheels.

For more information on the Spare wheel, refer to the corresponding section.

These tools are specific to the vehicle and may vary according to the level of

equipment. Do not use them for any other purpose.

The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.

Do not use any jack other than the one supplied with the vehicle.

If the vehicle does not have its original jack, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain the one that was intended by the manufacturer. The jack meets European standards, as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE. The jack does not require any maintenance.

Temporary puncture repair kit

Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view explanatory videos.

Made up of a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures located on the tyre tread.

Only the 12 V socket located at the front of the vehicle can be used to power the

compressor.

139

In the event of a breakdown

8Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on this label.

For more information on Identification markings, particularly this label, refer to the corresponding section.

For more information on the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section.

Access to the kit

This kit is installed in the storage box, under the boot floor.

Repair procedure Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. nail, screw) which have penetrated into

the tyre.

Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic and apply the parking brake. Follow the safety instructions (hazard warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. Switch the ignition off. Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.

Connect the pipe from the compressor to the bottle of sealant.

Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it in the notch provided on the compressor. Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be repaired, and place it in a clean place.

140

In the event of a breakdown

Checking/adjusting tyre pressures The compressor can be used, without injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures. Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep it in a clean place. Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly. Check that the compressor switch is in position «O«. Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the compressor. Connect the compressor’s electric plug to the vehicle’s 12 V socket. Switch the ignition on. Start the compressor by placing the switch at position «I» and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicle’s tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button located on the compressor pipe, near the valve connection.

If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, the tyre is damaged;

contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Once the correct pressure is reached, put the switch in position «O«. Remove the kit and stow it. Refit the cap on the valve.

Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly. Check that the compressor switch is in position «O«. Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the compressor. Connect the compressor’s electric plug to the vehicle’s 12 V socket.

Affix the speed limit sticker.

The speed limit sticker must be affixed inside the vehicle in the area close to the

driver, to remind them that a wheel is in temporary use.

Switch the ignition on.

Switch on the compressor by moving the switch to position «I» until the tyre pressure reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of blowback).

If after approximately 7 minutes, the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this

indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Move the switch to position «O«. Disconnect the compressor’s electric plug from the vehicle’s 12 V socket. Remove the kit. Refit the cap on the valve. Remove and store the bottle of sealant.

The sealant product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the

eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children. The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the bottle.

After use, do not discard the bottle into the environment; take it to a CITRON dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of sealant, available from a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the puncture. Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than 50 miles (80 km). You must contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to have the repair checked and the tyre changed.

141

In the event of a breakdown

8Checking/adjusting tyre pressures The compressor can be used, without injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures. Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep it in a clean place. Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly. Check that the compressor switch is in position «O«. Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the compressor. Connect the compressor’s electric plug to the vehicle’s 12 V socket. Switch the ignition on. Start the compressor by placing the switch at position «I» and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicle’s tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button located on the compressor pipe, near the valve connection.

If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, the tyre is damaged;

contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Once the correct pressure is reached, put the switch in position «O«. Remove the kit and stow it. Refit the cap on the valve.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise

the under-inflation detection system. For more information on Tyre under-inflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.

Spare wheel Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view explanatory videos.

For more information on the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section.

Accessing the spare wheel The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under the floor. To access the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool kit section.

Depending on version, the spare wheel may be a standard steel or ‘space-saver’

wheel.

Removing the spare wheel

Unclip and remove the tool storage box or remove the polystyrene cover (depending on version). Slacken the central nut. Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). Lift the spare wheel towards you from the rear. Take the wheel out of the boot.

Removing a wheel Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does

not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch off the ignition.

142

In the event of a breakdown

Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place. Remove the wheel.

Stowing the damaged wheel To stow an alloy wheel, first remove

the wheel trim from the centre of the wheel so that the fastening device (nut and bolt) can be put in place. In the case of a «space saver» type spare wheel, the damaged wheel cannot be stowed under the floor. It must be placed in the boot; use a cover to protect the inside of the boot.

With an automatic gearbox, select mode P to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. Check that the parking brake indicator lamps on the instrument panel are on fixed. The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

Wheel with wheel trim When removing the wheel, first remove

the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture using the wheelbrace. When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel trim, starting by placing its aperture in line with the valve and then pushing it into place all round its edge with the palm of your hand.

If the vehicle has steel wheels, remove the wheel trim. If the vehicle has alloy wheels, remove the central bolt cover using tool 7. If the vehicle is so equipped, fit security bolt socket 2 to wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security bolt. Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only.

Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the front A or rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.

Extend jack 6 until its head comes into contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted into the central part of the head of the jack. Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to easily admit the spare (not punctured) wheel.

Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may

slip or collapse — risk of injury! Take care to position the jack strictly at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is centred under the contact area on the vehicle. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing — risk of injury!

143

In the event of a breakdown

8

Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place. Remove the wheel.

Stowing the damaged wheel To stow an alloy wheel, first remove

the wheel trim from the centre of the wheel so that the fastening device (nut and bolt) can be put in place. In the case of a «space saver» type spare wheel, the damaged wheel cannot be stowed under the floor. It must be placed in the boot; use a cover to protect the inside of the boot.

Fitting a wheel Fitting a steel or «space-saver» type spare wheel

If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the washers A do not make contact with the steel or «space-saver» type spare wheel. The wheel is held in place by the conical contact surface B of each bolt.

Fit the wheel on the hub. Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only.

Lower the vehicle again fully. Fold jack 6 and remove it.

Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only. Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts (depending on equipment). Store the tools.

144

In the event of a breakdown

Refitting the lamp units Perform the operations in the reverse

order to dismantling.

Opening the bonnet/Accessing the bulbs

Proceed with caution when the engine is hot — risk of burns! Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the cooling fan — risk of strangulation!

Halogen bulbs (Hx) To ensure good quality lighting, check

that the bulb is correctly positioned in its housing.

Light-emitting diode (LED) headlamps and lamps Depending on version, the affected types of headlamps/lamps are: Front foglamps. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps. Dipped beam headlamps. Main beam headlamps. Direction indicator side repeaters. Third brake lamp. Number plate lamps.

Putting the spare wheel back in place

The punctured wheel cannot be put under the boot floor.

Put the spare wheel back in place in its housing. Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in the middle of the wheel. Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain the wheel correctly. Stow the tools in the bag or storage box (depending on equipment).

If there is no wheel in the well, the fastening device (nut and bolt) cannot be

refitted.

After changing a wheel With a «space-saver» type spare wheel

Deactivate certain driving aid functions (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, etc.). Do not exceed the maximum authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or the maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km). Driving with more than one «space-saver» type spare wheel is prohibited.

Visit a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Have the tightening of the spare wheel’s bolts and its tyre pressure checked. Have the punctured tyre examined. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.

Changing a bulb In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), misting on the

internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating:

Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with detergent or solvent products. Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product. When using a high-pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the headlamps, lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.

Changing a bulb must only be done with the ignition off and after the headlamp /

lamp has been switched off for several minutes — risk of serious burns! Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers; use a lint-free cloth. It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb of the same type and specification. To avoid lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs.

145

In the event of a breakdown

8Refitting the lamp units Perform the operations in the reverse

order to dismantling.

Opening the bonnet/Accessing the bulbs

Proceed with caution when the engine is hot — risk of burns! Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the cooling fan — risk of strangulation!

Halogen bulbs (Hx) To ensure good quality lighting, check

that the bulb is correctly positioned in its housing.

Light-emitting diode (LED) headlamps and lamps Depending on version, the affected types of headlamps/lamps are: Front foglamps. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps. Dipped beam headlamps. Main beam headlamps. Direction indicator side repeaters. Third brake lamp. Number plate lamps.

If you need to replace this type of bulb, you must contact a CITRON dealer or a

qualified workshop. Do not touch the «Full LED» technology headlamps or lamps — risk of electrocution!

Front lamps

1. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps (LED) 2. Direction indicators (PY21W) 3. Dipped beam headlamps (LED) 4. Main beam headlamps (LED) 5. Foglamps (LED)

Direction indicators

Rapid flashing of the indicator lamp for a direction indicator (left or right) indicates

that one of the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed.

Turn the bulb holder an eighth of a turn anti- clockwise and remove it. Remove the bulb and replace it.

Amber-coloured bulbs must be replaced by bulbs with identical specifications and

colour.

146

In the event of a breakdown

Fit the console back into place around the courtesy lamp and clip it correctly. Rear courtesy lamp

Using a thin, flat blade screwdriver, unclip the courtesy lamp. Remove the defective bulb and replace it. Fit the courtesy lamp back into place and clip it correctly.

Boot (W5W)

Unclip the cover using a small flat blade screwdriver. Remove the bulb and replace it. Put the unit back in place.

Rear lamps

1. Brake lamps / Sidelamps (W21/5W) 2. Direction indicators (WY21W) 3. Reversing lamp or foglamp (P21W)

Replacing lamp units These bulbs are changed from outside the boot.

Identify the defective bulb then open the boot. Using a thin, flat blade screwdriver, unclip the two plastic covers, then flip them down.

Unscrew the two fixing screws located in the openings.

Unclip the lamp unit and carefully extract it pulling straight towards the outside. Hold the lamp unit and disconnect the connector. Turn the bulb holder of the faulty bulb a quarter turn anti-clockwise and pull it out. Remove the bulb and replace it.

Make sure to engage the lamp unit in its guides while keeping it in line with the

vehicle. Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but without damaging the lamp unit.

Reversing lamps and foglamp

Replacing bulbs Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Interior lighting Courtesy lamps (W5W) Front courtesy lamp

Using a thin, flat blade screwdriver, unclip the entire console surrounding the courtesy lamp. Remove the defective bulb and replace it.

147

In the event of a breakdown

8 Fit the console back into place around the courtesy lamp and clip it correctly. Rear courtesy lamp

Using a thin, flat blade screwdriver, unclip the courtesy lamp. Remove the defective bulb and replace it. Fit the courtesy lamp back into place and clip it correctly.

Boot (W5W)

Unclip the cover using a small flat blade screwdriver. Remove the bulb and replace it. Put the unit back in place.

Fuses Changing a fuse All work must be carried out only by a

CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop The replacement of a fuse by a third party could cause a serious malfunction of the vehicle.

Installing electrical accessories The vehicle’s electrical system is

designed to operate with standard or optional equipment. Before fitting other electrical equipment or accessories to your vehicle, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

CITRON accepts no responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing the vehicle

or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied or not recommended by CITRON and not installed in accordance with its recommendations, in particular when the combined power consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

12 V battery Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or for charging a discharged battery.

Lead-acid starter batteries These batteries contain harmful substances (sulphuric acid and lead).

They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must never under any circumstances be discarded with household waste. Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery.

All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid any risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards.

Accessing the battery The battery is located under the bonnet.

For access to the (+) terminal:

148

In the event of a breakdown

Release the bonnet by pulling the internal release lever, then the external safety catch. Raise the bonnet. (+) Positive terminal. This terminal has a quick-release clamp. (-) Negative terminal. As the battery’s negative terminal is not accessible, use the engine mounting.

Starting using another battery If the vehicle’s battery is flat, the engine can be started using a backup battery (either external or from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a battery booster.

Never start the engine by connecting a battery charger.

Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. Check beforehand that the backup battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, etc.). Make sure that the jump leads are well away from the engines moving parts (fan, belt, etc.). Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the engine is running.

Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the booster. Connect one end of the green or black cable to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting vehicle). Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and leave it running for a few minutes. Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run. If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again. Wait for it to return to idle. Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.

Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.

Driving immediately without having reached a sufficient level of charge may

affect some of the vehicle’s functions.

Automatic gearbox Never try to start the engine by pushing

the vehicle.

Charging the battery using a battery charger For optimum service life of the battery, it is essential to maintain an adequate state of charge. In some circumstances, it may be necessary to charge the battery: When using the vehicle mainly for short journeys. If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for several weeks. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

To charge the vehicle’s battery yourself, use only a charger compatible with

lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

149

In the event of a breakdown

8Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the charger.

Never reverse polarities.

It is not necessary to disconnect the battery.

Switch the ignition off. Switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, lighting, wipers, etc.).

Switch off charger B before connecting the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any dangerous sparks. Ensure that the charger cables are in good condition. Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Connect the cables of charger B as follows:

the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of battery A,

the negative (-) black cable to earth point C on the vehicle.

At the end of the charging operation, switch off charger B before disconnecting the cables from battery A.

If this label is present, use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing irreversible

damage to the electrical components.

24V

12V

+

Never try to charge a frozen battery — risk of explosion!

If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a CITRON dealer or by a qualified workshop who will verify that the internal components have not been damaged and that the case has not cracked, which would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive acid leaking.

Some functions, including Stop & Start, are not available if the battery is not

sufficiently charged.

Disconnecting the battery In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine, we recommend disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be unused for an extended period.

Before disconnecting the battery: Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, roof). Switch off all electricity-consuming devices (audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.). Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes. After accessing the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal.

Quick-release terminal clamp Disconnecting the (+) terminal

Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal. Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. Remove clamp B by lifting it off.

150

In the event of a breakdown

When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering assistance.

A professional recovery service must be called in the following cases: broken down on a motorway or main road;

not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake; not possible to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, with the engine running; towing with only two wheels on the ground; four-wheel drive vehicle; no approved towbar available.

Towing constraints

Type of vehicle (engine/gearbox)

Front wheels on the ground

Rear wheels on the ground

Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground with towbar

Internal combustion/Manual

Internal combustion/Automatic

In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).

Reconnecting the (+) terminal

Raise lever A fully. Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal. Push clamp B fully down. Lower lever A to lock clamp B. Depending on equipment, lower the plastic cover on the (+) terminal.

Do not force the lever when pressing on it, as if the clamp is not positioned

correctly, locking will then not be possible. Start the procedure again.

Following reconnection After reconnecting the battery, turn on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the engine, to enable the electronic systems to initialise.

For right-hand drive versions, when the total distance recorder has reached

37 miles (60 km), you must wait approximately 15 minutes before starting the engine.

If minor problems nevertheless persist following this operation, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. Referring to the relevant section, reinitialise certain equipment: Remote control key or electronic key (depending on version).

Sunroof and electric blind. Electric windows. Date and time. Preset radio stations.

After reconnecting the battery, the message «Collision risk detection

system fault» is displayed on the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on. This operation is perfectly normal. The message will disappear while driving.

The Stop & Start system may not be operational during the trip following the

first engine start. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period with the vehicle immobilised, the duration of which depends on the exterior temperature and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

Towing Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using the towing eye.

General recommendations Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving.

Check that the towing vehicle is heavier than the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towbar; ropes and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently.

151

In the event of a breakdown

8When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering assistance.

A professional recovery service must be called in the following cases: broken down on a motorway or main road;

not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake; not possible to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, with the engine running; towing with only two wheels on the ground; four-wheel drive vehicle; no approved towbar available.

Towing constraints

Type of vehicle (engine/gearbox)

Front wheels on the ground

Rear wheels on the ground

Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground with towbar

Internal combustion/Manual

Internal combustion/Automatic

In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).

152

In the event of a breakdown

Accessing the tools

The tools are located in the boot. Depending on version, they are stored under the floor or behind the removable grille of the right-hand compartment. For access: Open the boot. Then, depending on version, lift up the floor using the handle, remove it and remove the mat. Or open the removable grille on the right by pulling from the top. For more information on the list of tools, refer to the Tool kit section.

Towing your vehicle

On the front bumper, unclip the cover from below using the flat blade screwdriver. Screw the towing eye in fully. Install the towbar. With a manual gearbox, move the gear lever into neutral. With an automatic gearbox, move the gear selector into position N.

Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components

(braking, transmission, etc.) and to the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

Unlock the steering and release the parking brake. Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a short distance.

Towing another vehicle

On the rear bumper, unclip the cover from below using the flat blade screwdriver. Screw the towing eye in fully. Install the towbar. Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the vehicle being towed. Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a short distance.

If the vehicle is equipped with a BlueHDi 120 S&S EAT6 engine and a sunroof or

spare wheel, it is forbidden to tow another vehicle.

153

Technical data

9Engine technical data and towed loads Engines The engine characteristics are given in the vehicle’s registration document, as well as in sales brochures. Only the values available at the time of publication are presented in the tables. Contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain missing values.

The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under

conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).

For more information, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop.

Weights and towed loads The weights and towed loads relating to the vehicle are indicated on the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also indicated on the manufacturer’s plate or label. For more information, contact a CITRON dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value

must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1,000 metres of altitude. The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the towball.

When exterior temperatures are high, the vehicle performance may be limited in

order to protect the engine. When the exterior temperature is higher than 37C, reduce the towed weight.

Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle can adversely affect its road holding.

Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer. When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the local legislation in force).

154

Technical data

Engines and towed loads — PETROL Engine PureTech 82 PureTech 110

Gearbox Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6)

Code EB2FMA (Euro 4)

EB2F MB5 (Euro 6.1)

EB2DTM AT6III (Euro 4)

EB2DTM AT6III (Euro 5)

Model codes: 2R… HMZE HMZB HNVZ HNVV

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199

Max. power: EC standard (kW)

60 60 81 81

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 10 or 12% slope (kg)

650 650 840 840

Unbraked trailer (kg) 560 560 620 620

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)

65 65 65 65

155

Technical data

9Engine PureTech 110 S&S PureTech 110 PureTech 130 S&S

Gearbox Manual 6-speed (BVM6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6)

Code EB2ADT MB6 (Euro 6.3)

EB2DTM AT6III (Euro 6.1)

EB2ADTS (Euro 6.3)

Model codes: 2R… HNPM HNVW HNS1

Cubic capacity (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199

Max. power: EC standard (kW) 81 81 96

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 10 or 12% slope

(kg)

880 840 840

Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 620 620

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)

65 65 65

156

Technical data

Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

Engines and towed loads — DIESEL Engine HDi 92 BlueHDi 110 S&S BlueHDi 120 S&S

Gearbox Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 5-speed (BVM5) Manual 6-speed (BVM6) Automatic 6-speed (EAT6)

Code DV6D BE (Euro 4)

DV6D BE (Euro 5)

DV5RCe MB6 STT (Euro 6.3)

DV5RCD AT6III STT (Euro 6.3)

Model codes: 2C… 9HPA 9HPE YHSM YHX1

Cubic capacity (cc) 1,560 1,560 1,499 1,499

Max. power: EC standard (kW)

68 68 81 88

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 10 or 12% slope (kg)

840 840 880 880/0*

Unbraked trailer (kg) 610 610 620 650/0*

Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)

65 65 65 55

* Vehicle with sunroof or spare wheel.

157

Technical data

9Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

* Mirrors folded in. ** Version with longitudinal bars.

Identification markings Various visible markings for vehicle identification and vehicle search.

A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the right-hand front seat floor. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the dashboard. Printed on an adhesive label visible through the windscreen. C. Manufacturer’s label. Affixed to the driver’s door. Bears the following information: Manufacturers name. European whole vehicle type approval number. Vehicle Identification number (VIN). Gross vehicle weight (GVW). Gross train weight (GTW).

158

Technical data

Maximum weight on the front axle. Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres label. Affixed to the driver’s door. Bears the following information about the tyres: Tyre pressures, unladen and laden. Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions and type as well as the load and speed indices. Spare tyre inflation pressure.

The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed

indices than those indicated on the label, without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres). In the event of a change in the type of tyres, contact a CITRON dealer for the tyre fits approved for the vehicle.

159

Bluetooth audio system

10Bluetooth audio system

The different functions and settings described vary according to the version

and configuration of your vehicle.

As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver,

the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be done with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Your audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your

vehicle. All work on the system must be carried out exclusively by a dealer or qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of electrocution, fire or mechanical faults.

To avoid discharging the battery, the audio system may switch off after a few

minutes if the engine is not running.

First steps Press: On/Off. Rotate: adjust volume. Short press: change audio source (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD;

streaming). Long press: display the Telephone menu (if a telephone is connected).

Adjust audio settings: Front/rear fader; left/right balance; bass/

treble; loudness; audio ambience. Activate/Deactivate automatic volume adjustment (based on the vehicles speed).

Radio : Short press: display the list of radio

stations. Long press: update the list. Media : Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the available sorting options.

Select the screen display mode, between: Date; Audio functions; Trip computer;

Telephone. Confirm or display contextual menu.

Buttons 1 to 6.

Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station.

Radio: Automatic step by step search up/down

for radio stations. Media: Select previous/next CD, USB, streaming track. Scroll in a list.

Radio: Manual step by step search up/down for

radio stations. Select previous/next MP3 folder. Media: Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/playlist on the USB device. Scroll in a list.

Cancel the current operation. Go up one level (menu or folder). Access the main menu.

Activate/Deactivate TA function (traffic announcements).

Long press: select type of announcement. Selection of FM/DAB/AM wavebands.

160

Bluetooth audio system

«Telephone«: Call, Directory management, Telephone management,

Hang up. «Trip computer«.

«Maintenance«: Diagnosis, Warning log, etc. «Connections«: Manage connections, search for devices. «Personalisation-configuration«: Define the vehicle parameters, Choice of

language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Date and time adjustment.

Press the «MENU» button.

Move from one menu to another.

Enter a menu.

Radio Selecting a station

Press the SOURCE button repeatedly and select the radio. Press this button to select a waveband (FM / AM / DAB). Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations. Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up / down for radio

frequencies.

Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls — Type 1

Radio: Select the previous / next preset radio

station. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Media: Select the previous / next track. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list.

Radio: Short press: display the list of radio

stations. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the available sorting options.

Other than telephone call: Short press: changing audio source

(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; streaming), confirmation if the «Telephone» menu is open. Long press: open the «Telephone» menu. In the event of a telephone call: Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call.

During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone menu. Long press: end the call.

Confirm a selection.

Increase volume.

Decrease volume.

Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously pressing the increase and decrease

volume buttons.

Steering mounted controls — Type 2

Access to the main menu.

Increase volume.

Mute / Restore the sound.

Decrease volume.

Other than telephone call: Short press: changing audio source

(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; streaming), confirmation if the «Telephone» menu is open. Long press: open the «Telephone» menu.

In the event of a telephone call: Short press: accept the call. Long press: reject the call. During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone menu. Long press: end the call.

Start voice recognition on your smartphone via the system. Radio: Short press: display the list of radio

stations. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the available sorting options.

Radio: Select the previous / next preset radio

station. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Media: Select the previous / next track. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a list. Press the thumbwheel: confirm.

Menus Depending on version.

«Multimedia«: Media settings, Radio settings.

161

Bluetooth audio system

10«Telephone«: Call, Directory management, Telephone management,

Hang up. «Trip computer«.

«Maintenance«: Diagnosis, Warning log, etc. «Connections«: Manage connections, search for devices. «Personalisation-configuration«: Define the vehicle parameters, Choice of

language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Date and time adjustment.

Press the «MENU» button.

Move from one menu to another.

Enter a menu.

Radio Selecting a station

Press the SOURCE button repeatedly and select the radio. Press this button to select a waveband (FM / AM / DAB). Press one of the buttons for an automatic search for radio stations. Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up / down for radio

frequencies.

Press this button to display the list of stations received locally.

To update this list, press for more than two seconds. The sound is cut while updating.

RDS The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks,

etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment.

If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol appears struck out in the screen.

The RDS, if activated, enables you to continue listening to the same station by

automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Short procedure In «Radio» mode, press the OK button to activate or deactivate RDS directly.

Long procedure Press the MENU button.

Select «Audio functions«.

Press OK.

Select the «FM waveband preferences» function. Press OK.

Select «Frequency tracking (RDS)«.

Press OK, RDS is displayed on the screen.

Play TA messages The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To

operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station that carries this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, etc.) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message.

Take care when increasing the volume while listening to TA messages. The

volume may prove too high on return to the original audio source.

162

Bluetooth audio system

When the radio station is displayed in the screen , press «OK» to display the

contextual menu. (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information on the station, etc.)

DAB / FM station tracking «DAB» does not have 100% coverage of the country.

When the digital signal is weak, «DAB / FM auto tracking» allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue FM station (if it exists). When the «DAB / FM auto tracking» is active, the DAB station will be selected automatically.

Press the MENU button.

Select «Multimedia» and confirm.

Select «DAB / FM auto tracking» and confirm.

If «DAB / FM auto tracking» tracking is enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds

when the system switches to the analogue FM station sometimes with a change in volume.

Press the TA button to activate or deactivate traffic messages.

Receiving INFO messages The INFO function gives priority to TA alert messages. To be active, this

function needs good reception of a radio station that transmits this type of message. When a message is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is interrupted automatically to receive the INFO message. Normal play of the media previously playing is resumed at the end of the message.

Make a long press on this button to display the list of categories. Select or deselect categories.

Activate or deactivate the reception of the corresponding messages.

Display TEXT INFOS Radio text is information transmitted by the radio station related to the station’s

current programme or song.

When the radio station is displayed in the screen, press OK to display the

contextual menu. Select «RadioText (TXT) display» and confirm OK to save.

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Depending on version

If the current DAB radio station is not available on FM, «DAB FM» is struck out.

1 Options display: if active but not available, the display will be struck out.

2 Display showing the name of the current station.

3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: memorise a radio station.

4 Display showing the name of the multiplex service being used.

5 RadioText (TXT) display for the current radio station.

6 Represents the signal strength for the band being listened to.

When changing region, updating the list of preset radio stations is recommended.

Full list of radio stations and «multiplexes».

Terrestrial digital radio Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional categories of

traffic announcements (TA INFO). The different «multiplex / ensemble services offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical order.

Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, etc.)

Change of station within the same «multiplex / ensemble». Starting of a search for the previous / next «multiplex / ensemble». Long press: selection of the categories of news desired among Transport, News,

Entertainment and Special Flash (available depending on the station).

163

Bluetooth audio system

10When the radio station is displayed in the screen , press «OK» to display the

contextual menu. (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information on the station, etc.)

DAB / FM station tracking «DAB» does not have 100% coverage of the country.

When the digital signal is weak, «DAB / FM auto tracking» allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue FM station (if it exists). When the «DAB / FM auto tracking» is active, the DAB station will be selected automatically.

Press the MENU button.

Select «Multimedia» and confirm.

Select «DAB / FM auto tracking» and confirm.

If «DAB / FM auto tracking» tracking is enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds

when the system switches to the analogue FM station sometimes with a change in volume.

If the «DAB» station you are listening to is not available on FM («DAB/FM» option

struck out), or if «DAB / FM auto tracking» is not on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.

Media USB port

Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the

USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). The system changes automatically to «USB» source.

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

Any additional devices connected to the system must comply with the standard

applicable to the product and/or the standard IEC 60950-1.

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Playlists are updated every time a new USB memory stick is connected.

When the USB port is used, the portable device charges automatically.

Play mode The play modes available are: Normal: the tracks are played in order, depending on the classification of the selected files. Random: the tracks in an album or folder are played in a random order. Random on all media: all of the tracks saved in the media are played in random order. Repeat: the tracks played are only those from the current album or folder.

Press this button to display the contextual menu for the Media function. Press this button to select the chosen play mode. Press this button to confirm.

The choice made is displayed at the top of the screen.

Choosing a track to play Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next track. Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next folder.

File classification Make a long press on this button to display the different classifications.

164

Bluetooth audio system

Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or rewind.

Bluetooth audio streaming Streaming allows music files on the telephone to be played via the vehicle’s loudspeakers. Connect the telephone. (Refer to the «Pairing a Bluetooth telephone» section).

Activate the streaming source by pressing SOURCE.

In certain cases, play of the audio files must be initiated from the keypad. Audio files can be selected using the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls. The contextual information can be displayed in the screen. If the telephone supports the function. The audio quality depends on the quality of transmission by the telephone.

Connecting Apple players Connect the Apple player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically. Control is via the audio system. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists). The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple player.

Select by «Folder» / «Artist» / «Genre» / «Playlist«.

Depending on availability and type of device used.

Press OK to select the desired classification, then press OK again to

confirm.

Playing files Make a short press on this button to display the chosen classification. Navigate in the list using the left / right and up / down buttons. Confirm the selection by pressing OK.

Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next track in the list.

Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or rewind.

Press one of these buttons to go to the previous / next «Folder» / «Artist» /

«Genre» / «Playlist«* in the list.

Input AUX socket (AUX) Depending on equipment

Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an

audio cable (not supplied).

Any additional devices connected to the system must comply with the standard

* Depending on availability and the type of device used.

applicable to the product and/or the standard IEC 60950-1.

Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select «AUX«.

First adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your audio system. Controls are managed via the portable device.

Do not connect the same device to both the auxiliary jack socket and the USB

port at the same time.

CD player Insert circular compact discs only. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the quality of the original player. Insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.

External CD players connected via the USB port are not recognised by the

system.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button

several times in succession and select «CD«. Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.

Press the LIST button to display the list of tracks on the CD. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or rewind.

Playing an MP3 compilation Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before play begins.

On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8

directory levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. The folder structure is not observed during playback. All of the files are displayed on a single level.

To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button

several times in succession and select «CD«. Press one of the buttons to select a folder on the CD. Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD. Press the LIST button to display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation.

165

Bluetooth audio system

10Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or rewind.

Bluetooth audio streaming Streaming allows music files on the telephone to be played via the vehicle’s loudspeakers. Connect the telephone. (Refer to the «Pairing a Bluetooth telephone» section).

Activate the streaming source by pressing SOURCE.

In certain cases, play of the audio files must be initiated from the keypad. Audio files can be selected using the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls. The contextual information can be displayed in the screen. If the telephone supports the function. The audio quality depends on the quality of transmission by the telephone.

Connecting Apple players Connect the Apple player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically. Control is via the audio system. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists). The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple player.

Information and advice The CD player can play files with .mp3, .wma, .wav and .aac file extensions, with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA TAG). No other file types (.mp4, etc.) can be read. Files of the «.wma» type should be to the wma 9 standard. The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 kHz. Via the USB port, the system can play audio files with the extension «.mp3, .wma, .wav, .cbr, .vbr» with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. No other file types (.mp4, etc.) can be read. Files of the «.wma» type should be to the wma 9 standard. The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 kHz. File names should have fewer than 20 characters, avoiding special characters (e.g. ? ; ) so as to avoid any reading or display problems. In order to be able to play a burned CDR or CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same burning standard be always used on an individual disc, with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) for the best acoustic quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended. To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (File Allocation Table).

It is recommended that you use genuine Apple USB cables for correct operation.

Telephone Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

As a safety measure and because they require prolonged attention on the part of

the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.

Activate the telephone’s Bluetooth function and ensure that it is «visible to

all» (telephone configuration).

166

Bluetooth audio system

connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free kit and streaming). «Delete connection«: to delete the pairing.

When you delete a pairing in the system, remember to delete it from your

telephone as well.

Press OK to confirm.

Receiving a call An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Select the «YES» tab in the screen using the buttons. Confirm with OK.

Press this button at the steering mounted controls to accept the call.

Making a call In the «Telephone» menu. Select «Call«. Select «Dial«. Or Select «Directory«. Or Select «Calls list«.

Confirm with OK.

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the instructions for your telephone and with your service provider for the services to which you have access.

Procedure from the telephone Select the name of the system in the list of devices detected.

Procedure from the system Press the MENU button.

Select «Connections«.

Confirm with OK.

Select «Search for a device«.

Confirm with OK.

A window is displayed with a search in progress message. In the list of devices detected, select a telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a time.

Completing the pairing

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or

from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.

If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not restricted. A message appears in the screen confirming the pairing.

Information and advice The «Telephone» menu gives access to the following functions in particular: «Directory«, if your telephone equipment is fully compatible, «Call log«, «View paired devices«. Depending on the type of telephone, you may be asked to accept or confirm access by the system to each of these functions.

Go to the Brand’s website for more information (compatibility, more help,

etc.).

Managing connections The telephone connection automatically includes hands free operation and audio

streaming. The ability of the system to connect to just one profile depends on the telephone. Both profiles may connect by default.

Press the MENU button.

Select «Connections«.

Press OK to confirm.

Select «Bluetooth Connections management» and confirm. The list of

paired telephones is displayed. Press OK to confirm.

Indicates that a device is connected.

A number indicates the profile of the connection with the system:

1 for media or 1 for telephone. 2 for media and telephone.

Indicates connection of the audio steaming profile. Indicates connection of the hands-free telephone profile. Select a telephone.

Press OK to confirm.

Then select and confirm:

«Connect telephone» / «Disconnect telephone» : to connect / disconnect the telephone or the hands-free kit only. «Connect media player» / «Disconnect media player» : to connect / disconnect streaming only. «Connect telephone + media player» / «Disconnect telephone + media player» : to

167

Bluetooth audio system

10connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free kit and streaming). «Delete connection«: to delete the pairing.

When you delete a pairing in the system, remember to delete it from your

telephone as well.

Press OK to confirm.

Receiving a call An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Select the «YES» tab in the screen using the buttons. Confirm with OK.

Press this button at the steering mounted controls to accept the call.

Making a call In the «Telephone» menu. Select «Call«. Select «Dial«. Or Select «Directory«. Or Select «Calls list«.

Confirm with OK.

Press this button for more than two seconds for access to your directory, then

navigate using the thumb wheel.

Ending a call In the «Telephone» menu. Select «End call«. Confirm with OK to end the call.

During a call, press one of these buttons for more than two seconds.

The system accesses the telephone’s contacts directory, depending on its

compatibility, and while it is connected via Bluetooth.

With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the

directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.

Managing calls During a call, press OK to display the contextual menu.

End call In the contextual menu, select «Hang up» to end the call.

Confirm with OK.

Microphone off (so that the caller cannot hear)

In the contextual menu:

select «Micro OFF» to switch off the microphone. deselect «Micro OFF» to switch the microphone on.

Confirm with OK.

Telephone mode In the contextual menu:

select «Telephone mode» to transfer the call to the telephone (for example, to leave the vehicle while continuing a conversation). deselect «Telephone mode» to transfer the call to the vehicle.

Confirm with OK.

If the contact has been cut off, when you reconnect on returning to the vehicle, the Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically and sound returned to the system (depending on the compatibility of the telephone). In some cases, the Telephone mode must be activated from the telephone.

168

Bluetooth audio system

Interactive voice response From the contextual menu, select «DTMF tones» and confirm to use the digital

keypad to navigate in the interactive voice response menu.

Confirm with OK.

Consultation call From the contextual menu, select «Switch» and validate to return to a call

left on hold. Confirm with OK.

Directory To access the directory, press and hold SRC/TEL. Select «Directory» to see the list of contacts. Confirm with OK.

To modify the contacts saved in the system, press MENU then select

«Telephone» and confirm. Select «Directory management» and confirm. You can: «Consult an entry«, «Delete an entry«, «Delete all entries«.

The system accesses the telephone’s contacts directory, depending on its

compatibility, and while it is connected via Bluetooth.

With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the

directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.

Voice recognition This function allows you to use your smartphone’s voice recognition via the system. To start voice recognition, depending on the type of steering mounted controls: Make a long press on the end of the lighting control stalk. OR

Press this button.

Voice recognition requires the use of a compatible smartphone first connected to

the vehicle by Bluetooth.

Frequently asked questions The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

With the engine off, the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use. When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to avoid discharging the vehicle’s battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the charge of the battery. The message «the audio system is overheated» is displayed onscreen. To protect the installation if the ambient temperature is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode, in which the volume may be decreased or the CD player stopped. Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.

Radio There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD, etc.). For optimal listening quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) can be adjusted to different audio sources, resulting in audible differences when switching between sources (radio, CD, etc.). Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are appropriate to the sources being listened to. We recommend setting the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re

169

Bluetooth audio system

10balance and Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to «None», setting loudness correction to «Active» in CD mode and «Inactive» in Radio mode. The preset stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). The wrong waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the stations are preset. Traffic announcement (TA) is shown but I receive no traffic information. The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. Tune to a radio station that broadcasts traffic information. The reception quality of the tuned radio station gradually deteriorates or the station presets are inoperative (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). The vehicle is too far from the selected stations transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the geographical area. Activate the RDS function to allow the system to check for a more powerful transmitter in the area. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not indicative of an audio system malfunction.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through an automatic car wash or in an underground car park). Have the aerial checked by a dealer. The sound intermittently cuts out for 1 or 2 seconds in radio mode. During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another frequency giving better reception of the station. Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon occurs too frequently and always on the same route.

Media The Bluetooth connection is cut. The battery in the peripheral device may not be sufficiently charged. Charge the battery in the peripheral device. The message «USB device error» is displayed in the screen. The USB stick has not been recognised, or may be corrupted. Reformat the USB memory stick. The CD is systematically ejected or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does not contain audio files or contains audio files of a format not recognised by the audio system. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system not recognised by the audio system. Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.

Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too badly damaged. Check the content in the case of a burned CD: read the recommendations in the «Audio» section. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not be played by the audio system. The CD audio quality is is poor. The CD is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Return bass and treble settings to 0, without selecting an ambience. I am unable to play the music files on my smartphone via the USB port. Depending on the smartphone, access by the audio system to music on the smartphone may have to be approved on the latter. Manually activate the MTP profile on the smartphone (USB settings menu).

Telephone I am unable to access my voicemail. Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function. Call your voicemail, via the telephone menu, using the number provided by your operator. I am unable to access my directory of contacts. Check the compatibility of your telephone.

170

Bluetooth audio system

You did not grant access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. Accept or confirm access by the system to the contacts on your telephone. I am unable to continue a conversation when getting into my vehicle. Handset mode is activated. Deselect handset mode to transfer the call to the vehicle. I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating systems) have their own specificities in the pairing procedure and some telephones are not compatible. Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the telephone pairing from the system and the system pairing from the telephone, in order to view the compatibility of the telephones.

171

CITRON Connect Radio

11CITRON Connect Radio

Multimedia audio system — Applications — Bluetooth telephone

The functions and settings described vary according to the vehicle version and

configuration, as well as the country of sale.

For safety reasons and because they require sustained attention by the driver,

the following operations must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on: Pairing the smartphone with the system via Bluetooth. Using the smartphone. Connecting to the CarPlay or Android Auto applications (certain applications stop displaying when the vehicle is moving).

Changing the system settings and configuration.

The system is protected so that it only operates in the vehicle.

The message Energy economy mode is displayed when the system is about to go into standby.

The systems Open Source Software (OSS) source codes are available at the

following addresses: https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/

First steps With the engine running, a press mutes the sound.

With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. Increase or decrease the volume using the wheel or the «plus» or «minus» buttons (depending on the equipment). Use the buttons on either side of or below the touch screen to access the menus, then press the virtual buttons on the touch screen. Depending on the model, use the «Source» and «Menu» buttons on the left of the touch screen to access the menus, then press the virtual buttons on the touch screen.

At all times it is possible to display the rolling menus by pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. All touch-sensitive areas on the screen are white. On pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the screen, you can switch between pages either by tapping the tab for the desired page or by swiping the pages to the left or right with your finger. Press in the shaded area to go back up a level or confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or confirm.

The touch screen is of the «capacitive» type.

To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Certain information is displayed permanently in the upper bar of the touch screen: Air conditioning status information (depending on version), and direct access to the corresponding menu. Radio Media and Telephone menu status information. Privacy status information. Access to the touch screen and digital instrument panel settings.

172

CITRON Connect Radio

Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu.

Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station.

Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a list. Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing selected, access to presets.

Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.

Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received.

Menus Applications

Access configurable equipment.

Audio source selection (depending on equipment): FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on equipment). Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). USB Memory stick. Media player connected via the auxiliary socket (depending on equipment).

In the «Settings» menu, it is possible to create a profile for an individual or for a

group of people with shared interests, and configure a wide range of settings (radio presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). Settings are applied automatically.

In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. It may

enter standby mode (with the screen and sound off) for 5 minutes or more. The system will resume normal operation when the temperature in the passenger compartment has dropped.

Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls — Type 1

Radio: Select the previous/next preset radio

station. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Media: Select the previous/next track. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.

Radio: Short press: display the list of radio

stations. Long press: update the list. Media: Short press: display the list of folders. Long press: display the available sorting options.

Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if equipment connected; CD; streaming). Confirm a selection.

Increase volume.

Decrease volume.

Mute/restore sound by simultaneously pressing the increase and decrease

volume buttons.

Steering mounted controls — Type 2

Voice commands: This control is located on the steering

wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment). Short press, smartphone voice commands via the system.

Increase volume.

Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase

and decrease buttons simultaneously (depending on equipment). Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

Media (short press): change the multimedia source. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.

Call in progress (short press): access telephone menu.

173

CITRON Connect Radio

11Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu.

Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station.

Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a list. Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing selected, access to presets.

Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.

Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received.

Menus Applications

Access configurable equipment.

Radio Media

Select an audio source or radio station.

Telephone

Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth. Run certain applications from a

smartphone connected via CarPlay or Android Auto.

Settings

Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience,

etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, etc.).

Driving

Activate, deactivate or configure certain vehicle functions.

174

CITRON Connect Radio

Enter the FM and AM waveband values using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to confirm.

Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved

by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and in no way indicative of an audio system malfunction.

Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Band» to change waveband.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Presetting a station Select a radio station or frequency.

Make a short press on the star outline. If the star is solid, the radio station is

already preset.

Navigation

Configure the navigation and select your destination via CarPlay or Android Auto.

Air conditioning

21,518,5

Manage various temperature and air flow settings.

Applications Viewing photos Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The system can read folders and image files in the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png.

Press Applications to display the main page. Press «Photos«.

Select a folder.

Select an image to view.

Press this button to display the details of the photo. Press the back arrow to go back a level.

Managing messages Press Applications to display the main page. Press «SMS».

Select the «SMS tab.

Press this button to select the display settings for messages.

Press this button to search and select a recipient. Select the «Quick messages tab.

Press this button to select the display settings for messages. Press this button to write a new message.

Press the bin alongside the selected message to delete it. Press this button alongside the selected message to display the secondary page. Press this button to edit and modify the existing text. Press this button to write a new message.

Press the bin to delete the message.

Radio Selecting a station

Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations.

Or Move the slider to manually search for frequencies up or down.

Or Press the frequency.

175

CITRON Connect Radio

11Enter the FM and AM waveband values using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to confirm.

Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved

by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and in no way indicative of an audio system malfunction.

Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Band» to change waveband.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Presetting a station Select a radio station or frequency.

Make a short press on the star outline. If the star is solid, the radio station is

already preset.

Or Select a radio station or frequency. Press «Preset«.

Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station.

Activating/Deactivating RDS RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatically retuning to alternative frequencies.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Activate/deactivate «RDS«.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

RDS station tracking may not be available nationwide, as many radio

stations do not cover 100 % of the country. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Displaying text information The «Radio Text» function displays information transmitted by the radio station relating to the station or the currently playing song.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Activate/deactivate «News«.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Playing TA messages The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station that transmits this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast, the current media is automatically interrupted so that the TA message can be heard. Normal play of the previously playing media resumes at the end of the message.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Activate/deactivate «TA«.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Audio settings Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Audio settings«.

176

CITRON Connect Radio

Playlists are updated whenever the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The audio system memorises these lists, which will subsequently load faster if they have not been changed.

Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Depending on equipment

Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an

audio cable (not supplied). This source is only available if «Auxiliary input» has been selected in the audio settings. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the audio system. Controls are managed via the portable device.

Selecting the source Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «SOURCES» button. Select the source.

Bluetooth Streaming

Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed from your smartphone. The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the system.

Select the «Tone«, «Balance«, «Sound«, «Voice» or «Ringtones» tab to configure

the sound settings. Press the back arrow to confirm.

In the «Tone» tab, the Ambience, Bass, Medium and Treble sound settings are

different and independent for each audio source. In the «Balance tab, the All passengers, Driver and Front only settings are common to all sources. In the «Sound tab, activate or deactivate «Volume linked to speed«, «Auxiliary input» and «Touch tones«.

The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys system) uses audio

processing to adjust the sound quality according to the number of passengers in the vehicle.

Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging optimises the sound distribution inside

the passenger compartment.

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Terrestrial Digital Radio Digital radio provides higher quality sound. The various «multiplexes/ensembles» offer a choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Band» to select «DAB band«.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

FM-DAB Follow-up «DAB» does not cover 100 % of the country. When the digital radio signal is poor, the «FM-DAB Follow-up» enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding «FM» analogue station (if there is one).

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Activate/deactivate «FM-DAB Follow-up«.

Press in the shaded area to confirm.

If «FM-DAB Follow-up» is activated, there may be a time offset of a few seconds

when the system switches to «FM» analogue radio, and in some cases a change in volume. When the digital signal quality is restored, the system automatically changes back to «DAB».

If the «DAB» station being listened to is not available on «FM», or if «FM-DAB

Follow-up» is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.

Media USB port

Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the

USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.

177

CITRON Connect Radio

11Playlists are updated whenever the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The audio system memorises these lists, which will subsequently load faster if they have not been changed.

Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Depending on equipment

Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an

audio cable (not supplied). This source is only available if «Auxiliary input» has been selected in the audio settings. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the audio system. Controls are managed via the portable device.

Selecting the source Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «SOURCES» button. Select the source.

Bluetooth Streaming

Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed from your smartphone. The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the system.

If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the smartphone. Control is from the portable device or by using the system’s touch buttons.

Once connected in Streaming mode, the smartphone is considered to be a media

source.

Connecting Apple players Connect the Apple player to the USB socket using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically. Control is via the audio system.

The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/

albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ podcasts). It is also possible to use a classification structured in the form of a library. The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of the Apple player.

Information and advice The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry devices or Apple players via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not supplied. Devices are managed using the audio system controls. Other devices, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, if compatible.

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The audio system will only play audio files with «.wav», «.wma», «.aac», «.ogg» and «.mp3» file extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other file types («.mp4», etc.) can be read. All «.wma» files must be standard WMA 9 files. The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz. To avoid reading and display problems, we recommend choosing file names less than 20 characters long that do not contain any special characters (e.g. ? . ; ). Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format (File Allocation Table).

We recommend using the original USB cable for the portable device.

178

CITRON Connect Radio

Press the «PHONE» button to display the secondary page.

Press «Android Auto» to start the application in the system.

Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons.

There may be a pause before applications become available,

depending on the quality of the network.

Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Consult the telephone user guide and the service provider to check which services are available.

The Bluetooth function must be activated and the telephone configured as «Visible

to all (in the telphone settings).

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.

Telephone USB sockets Depending on equipment, for more information on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay or Android Auto applications, refer to the «Ease of use and comfort» section.

For the list of compatible smartphones, visit the Manufacturer’s website in your

country.

Synchronising a smartphone enables users to display applications that support

the smartphones CarPlay or Android Auto technology on the vehicles screen. For CarPlay technology, the CarPlay function must first be activated on the smartphone. Unlock the smartphone for the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work. As principles and standards are constantly changing, we recommend keeping the smartphone’s operating system up-to- date, together with the date and time on the smartphone and the system.

CarPlay smartphone connection Depending on country.

On connecting the USB cable, the CarPlay function deactivates the

system’s Bluetooth mode. The «CarPlay» function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and compatible applications.

Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by the USB

cable. From the system, press Telephone to display the CarPlay interface.

Or If the smartphone has already connected by Bluetooth. Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by the USB

cable. From the system, press «Telephone» to display the main page.

Press the «PHONE» button to go to the secondary page.

Press «CarPlay» to display the CarPlay interface.

When the USB cable is disconnected and the ignition is switched off then back

on, the system will not automatically switch to Radio Media mode; the source must be changed manually.

The CarPlay navigation can be accessed at any time by pressing the system’s

Navigation button.

Android Auto smartphone connection Depending on country.

On the smartphone, download the Android Auto application.

The «Android Auto» function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and

applications.

Telephone not connected by Bluetooth

Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press «Telephone» to display the main page. Press «Android Auto» to start the application in the system.

Depending on the smartphone, it may be necessary to activate the «Android Auto» function.

During the procedure, several screen pages relating to certain features are

displayed. Accept to start and complete the connection.

When connecting a smartphone to the system, we recommend enabling

Bluetooth on the smartphone.

Telephone connected by Bluetooth

From the system, press «Telephone» to display the main page.

179

CITRON Connect Radio

11Press the «PHONE» button to display the secondary page.

Press «Android Auto» to start the application in the system.

Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons.

There may be a pause before applications become available,

depending on the quality of the network.

Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Consult the telephone user guide and the service provider to check which services are available.

The Bluetooth function must be activated and the telephone configured as «Visible

to all (in the telphone settings).

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.

If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend deactivating and then

reactivating the Bluetooth function on the telephone.

Procedure from the telephone Select the name of the system in the list of detected devices.

In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.

Procedure from the system Press Telephone to display the main page. Press «Bluetooth search«. The list of detected telephones is

displayed. Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list.

Connection sharing The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: «Telephone» (hands-free kit, telephone only), Streaming» (streaming: wireless playing of audio files on the telephone), «Mobile internet data«.

Select one or more profiles.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Depending on the type of telephone, you may by prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and messages.

The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone.

All three profiles may connect by default.

The profiles compatible with the system are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,

MAP and PAN.

Visit the Brand’s website for more information (compatibility, additional help, etc.).

Automatic reconnection On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is automatically recognised and within about 30 seconds after switching on the ignition, the pairing is established automatically (Bluetooth activated). To modify the connection profile:

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «PHONE» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Bluetooth connection» to display the list of paired devices. Press the «Details» button for a paired device. Select one or more profiles.

180

CITRON Connect Radio

Settings Configuring profiles

Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Profiles«.

Select «Profile 1«, «Profile 2«, «Profile 3 or «Common profile«.

Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to save.

Press the back arrow to confirm.

Press this button to activate the profile.

Press the back arrow again to confirm.

Press this button to reset the selected profile.

Adjusting the brightness Press Settings to display the main page.

Press Brightness.

Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or the instrument panel

(depending on version). Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Managing paired telephones This function lets you connect or disconnect a device or delete a pairing.

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «PHONE» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Bluetooth connection» to display the list of paired devices. Press on the name of the telephone selected in the list to disconnect it.

Press again to connect it.

Deleting a telephone Press the basket at the top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the

telephone chosen. Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it.

Receiving a call An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Make a short press on the steering mounted PHONE button to accept an

incoming call. And

Make a long press

on the steering mounted PHONE button to reject the call.

Or Press «End call«.

Making a call Using the telephone is not recommended while driving.

Parking the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.

Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the main page. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Press «Call» to start the call.

Calling a contact Press Telephone to display the main page. Or press and hold

the steering mounted PHONE button.

Press «Contacts«. Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

Press «Call«.

Calling a recently used number

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Or Press and hold

the steering mounted button.

Press «Recent calls«. Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; as a safety

measure, first park the vehicle.

Setting the ringtone Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Ring volume» to display the volume bar. Press the arrows or move the slider to set the ring volume.

181

CITRON Connect Radio

11Settings Configuring profiles

Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Profiles«.

Select «Profile 1«, «Profile 2«, «Profile 3 or «Common profile«.

Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to save.

Press the back arrow to confirm.

Press this button to activate the profile.

Press the back arrow again to confirm.

Press this button to reset the selected profile.

Adjusting the brightness Press Settings to display the main page.

Press Brightness.

Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or the instrument panel

(depending on version). Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Configuration» to access the secondary page. Press «System configuration«.

Press the «Units» tab to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Press the «Factory settings» tab to restore the initial settings.

Returning the system to factory settings activates the English language by default

(depending on version).

Press the «System info» tab to display the versions of the various modules installed in the system. Press the «Privacy» tab, or

Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Privacy» to activate or deactivate the private data mode. Activate or deactivate:

«No sharing (data, vehicle position)«. «Only data sharing «Data and vehicle position sharing«

Press the back arrow to confirm.

Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Configuration» to access the secondary page. Press «Screen configuration«.

Press «Brightness«. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or the instrument panel

(depending on version). Press the back arrow to confirm.

Press «Animation«. Activate or deactivate: Automatic scrolling. Select «Animated transitions«.

Press the back arrow to confirm.

Selecting the language Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Configuration» to access the secondary page. Select «Language» to change the language. Press the back arrow to confirm.

Setting the time Press Settings to display the main page.

182

CITRON Connect Radio

Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick. Some characters in information about the currently playing media are not displayed correctly. The audio system is unable to process certain types of character. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically launch playback. Start playback from the device. Track names and playing times are not displayed on the audio streaming screen. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

Telephone I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone’s Bluetooth function may be switched off or the device may not be visible. Check that the telephone has Bluetooth switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is «visible to all». The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. Check the compatibility of the telephone on the Brand’s website (services). Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work.

Press «Configuration» to access the secondary page. Press «Date and time«.

Select «Time«. Press this button to set the time using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to save the time.

Press this button to set the time zone.

Select the display format for the time (12h/24h). Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 hour). Activate or deactivate GPS synchronisation (UTC). Press the back arrow to save the settings.

The system may not automatically manage the change between winter and

summer time (depending on the country of sale).

Setting the date Press Settings to display the main page.

Press «Configuration» to access the secondary page. Press «Date and time«.

Select «Date«.

Press this button to set the date.

Press the back arrow to save the date.

Select the display format for the date.

Press the back arrow again to confirm.

Time and date setting is only available if «GPS Synchronisation:» is deactivated.

Frequently asked questions The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the system.

Radio The reception quality of the tuned radio station gradually deteriorates or the station presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). The vehicle is too far from the selected stations transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the geographical area. Activate the «RDS» function in the upper bar to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, including in RDS mode. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The aerial is missing or has been damaged (for example while entering a car wash or underground car park). Have the aerial checked by a dealer. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of received stations. The name of the radio station changes. The station is no longer received or its name has changed in the list. Press the round arrow on the «List» tab on the «Radio» page. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name. Press the round arrow on the «List» tab on the «Radio» page.

Media Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing time).

183

CITRON Connect Radio

11 Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick. Some characters in information about the currently playing media are not displayed correctly. The audio system is unable to process certain types of character. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically launch playback. Start playback from the device. Track names and playing times are not displayed on the audio streaming screen. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

Telephone I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone’s Bluetooth function may be switched off or the device may not be visible. Check that the telephone has Bluetooth switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is «visible to all». The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. Check the compatibility of the telephone on the Brand’s website (services). Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work.

Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the USB cables are of poor quality. Use genuine USB cables to ensure compatibility. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all countries. Check the Google Android Auto or Apple website to see which countries are supported. The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible. The volume depends on both the system and the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary. Ambient noise affects the quality of the telephone call. Reduce ambient noise (close windows, turn down ventilation, slow down, etc.). The contacts are not listed in alphabetical order. Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. Modify the telephone directory display settings.

Settings When the treble and bass settings are changed, the ambience is deselected. When the ambience is changed, the treble and bass settings are reset.

Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound functions to the middle position. When the engine is off, the system switches off after several minutes of use. When the engine is switched off, the system’s operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the charge of the battery.

184

CITRON Connect Nav

CITRON Connect Nav

GPS navigation — Applications — Multimedia audio system — Bluetooth telephone

The functions and settings described vary according to the vehicle version and

configuration, as well as the country of sale.

For safety reasons and because they require sustained attention by the driver,

the following operations must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on: Pairing the smartphone with the system via Bluetooth. Using the smartphone.

Connecting to the CarPlay or Android Auto applications (certain applications stop displaying when the vehicle is moving). Watching a video (the video stops when the vehicle starts to move again). Changing the system settings and configuration.

AM and DAB radio are not available on Hybrid vehicles.

The system is protected so that it only operates in the vehicle.

The message Energy economy mode is displayed when the system is about to go into standby.

System and map updates can be downloaded from the Brand’s website.

The update procedure is also available there.

The systems Open Source Software (OSS) source codes are available at the

following addresses: https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/

First steps With the engine running, a press mutes the sound.

With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. Increase or decrease the volume using the wheel or the «plus» or «minus» buttons (depending on the equipment). Use the menu buttons on either side of or below the touch screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Depending on the model, use the «Source» or «Menu» buttons to access the rolling menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Press «OK» to confirm.

The touch screen is of the «capacitive» type.

To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional product. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Certain information is displayed permanently in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch screen (depending on equipment): Air conditioning status information (depending on version), and direct access to the corresponding menu. Go directly to the audio source selection option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of titles depending on the source).

185

CITRON Connect Nav

12 Go to the «Notifications» of messages, emails, map updates and, depending on the services, the navigation notifications. Go to the settings for the touch screen and the digital instrument panel. Audio source selection (depending on equipment): FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on equipment). Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). USB memory stick. Media player connected via the auxiliary socket (depending on equipment). Video (depending on equipment).

In the «Settings» menu, it is possible to create a profile for an individual or for a

group of people with shared interests, and configure a wide range of settings (radio presets, audio settings, navigation history, favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied automatically.

In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. It may

enter standby mode (with the screen and sound off) for 5 minutes or more. The system will resume normal operation when the temperature in the passenger compartment has dropped.

Steering mounted controls Voice control: This control is located on the steering

wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment). Short press, system voice control. Long press, voice commands from smartphone or CarPlay, Android Auto via the system.

Increase volume.

Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase

and decrease buttons simultaneously (depending on equipment). Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons.

Media (short press): change the multimedia source. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.

Call in progress (short press): access telephone menu.

Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu.

Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station.

Media (rotate): previous/next track, move through a list. Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing selected, access presets.

Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.

Radio (press and hold): update the list of detected stations.

Menus Connected navigation

Enter navigation settings and choose a destination.

Use real-time services, depending on equipment.

186

CITRON Connect Nav

Applications

Run certain applications from a smartphone connected via CarPlay or

Android Auto. Check the status of the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections.

Radio Media

FM 87.5 MHz

Select an audio source or radio station, or display photographs.

Telephone

Connect a telephone via Bluetooth, read messages and emails and send quick

messages.

Settings

Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience,

etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, etc.).

Vehicle

Activate, deactivate or configure certain vehicle functions.

Air conditioning

21,518,5

Manage various temperature and air flow settings.

Voice commands Steering wheel-mounted controls

Voice commands: Voice commands can be issued from any

screen page after a short press on the «Voice commands» button located on the steering wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment), as long as there is no telephone call in progress.

To ensure that voice commands are always recognised by the system, please

follow these recommendations: use natural language in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your voice. always wait for the «beep» (audible signal) before speaking. for best results, closing the windows and sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous interference (depending on version). before issuing a voice command, ask any other passengers to refrain from speaking.

First steps Example of a «voice command» for navigation:

«Navigate to address 11 regent street, London»

187

CITRON Connect Nav

12Voice commands Steering wheel-mounted controls

Voice commands: Voice commands can be issued from any

screen page after a short press on the «Voice commands» button located on the steering wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment), as long as there is no telephone call in progress.

To ensure that voice commands are always recognised by the system, please

follow these recommendations: use natural language in a normal tone without breaking up words or raising your voice. always wait for the «beep» (audible signal) before speaking. for best results, closing the windows and sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous interference (depending on version). before issuing a voice command, ask any other passengers to refrain from speaking.

First steps Example of a «voice command» for navigation:

«Navigate to address 11 regent street, London»

Example of a «voice command» for the radio and media: «Play artist Madonna» Example of a «voice command» for the telephone: «Call David Miller»

The voice commands, with a choice of 17 languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,

Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish), are made using the language previously chosen and set in the system. For some voice commands, there are alternative synonyms. Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / … The voice commands in Arabic for: «Navigate to address» and «Display POI in the city», are not available.

Information — Using the system

When voice commands are activated, by briefly pressing the button, help is

displayed on the touch screen, offering various menus and enabling voice-based interaction with the system.

A number of commands are available when a menu is selected.

Press the Push To Talk button and tell me what you’d like after the tone. Remember

you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this button. If you press it again while I’m waiting for you to speak, it’ll end the conversation. If you need to start over, say «cancel». If you want to undo something, say «undo». And to get information and tips at any time, just say «help». If you ask to me do something and there’s some information missing that I need, I’ll give you some examples or take you through it step by

188

CITRON Connect Nav

step. There’s more information available in «novice» mode. You can set the dialogue mode to «expert» when you feel comfortable.

Global voice commands Voice commands

Set dialogue mode as novice — expert Select user 1 / Select profile John Increase temperature Decrease temperature

Help messages

There are lots of topics I can help you with. You can say: «help with phone», «help with navigation», «help with media» or «help with radio». For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say «help with voice controls». Say «yes» if I got that right. Otherwise, say «no» and we’ll start that again.

«Navigation» voice commands

Voice commands

Navigate home Navigate to work Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Navigate to contact, John Miller Navigate to address 11 regent street, London

Help messages

To plan a route, say «navigate to» followed by the address, the contact name or an intersection. For example, «navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London», «navigate to contact, John Miller», or «navigate to intersection of Regent Street, London». You can specify if it’s a preferred address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say «navigate to preferred address, Tennis club», or «navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London». Or, you can just say, «navigate home». To see Points of Interest on a map, you can say things like «show POI hotels in Banbury». For more information say «help with points of interest» or «help with route guidance». To choose a destination, say something like «navigate to line three» or «select line two». If you can’t find the destination but the street’s right, say for example «select the street in line three». To move around a displayed list, you can say «next page» or «previous page». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

Voice commands

Tell me the remaining distance Tell me the remaining time Tell me the arrival time Stop route guidance

Help messages

You can say «stop» or «resume route guidance». To get information about your current route, you can say «tell me the remaining time», «remaining

distance» or «arrival time». To learn more commands, try saying «help with navigation».

Voice commands

Show POI »hotel» at the destination Show nearby POI petrol station Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London Navigate to POI petrol station along the route

Help messages

To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like «show hotels in Banbury», «show nearby parking», «show hotel at the destination» or «show petrol station along the route». If you prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, you can say «navigate to nearby petrol station». If you feel you are not being well understood, try to say the word «POI» in front of the point of interest. For example say «navigate to POI restaurant at the destination». To choose a POI, say something like «select line 2». If you’ve searched for a Point of Interest and don’t see the one you’re after, you can filter further by saying something like «select POI in line 2», or «select the city in line 3». You can also scroll through the list by saying «next page» or «previous page».

Depending on the country, give destination (address) instructions in the

language configured for the system.

«Radio Media» voice commands

Voice commands

Turn on source radio — Streaming Bluetooth

Help messages

You can select an audio source by saying «turn on source» followed by the device name. For example, «turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth», or «turn on source, radio». Use the command «play» to specify the type of music you’d like to hear. You can choose between «song», «artist», or «album». Just say something like «play artist, Madonna», «play song, Hey Jude», or «play album, Thriller».

Voice commands

Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 Tune to 98.5 FM Tune to preset number five

Help messages

You can pick a radio station by saying «tune to» and the station name or frequency. For example «tune to channel Talksport» or «tune to 98.5 FM». To listen to a preset radio station, say for example «tune to preset number five».

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.

189

CITRON Connect Nav

12″Radio Media» voice commands

Voice commands

Turn on source radio — Streaming Bluetooth

Help messages

You can select an audio source by saying «turn on source» followed by the device name. For example, «turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth», or «turn on source, radio». Use the command «play» to specify the type of music you’d like to hear. You can choose between «song», «artist», or «album». Just say something like «play artist, Madonna», «play song, Hey Jude», or «play album, Thriller».

Voice commands

Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 Tune to 98.5 FM Tune to preset number five

Help messages

You can pick a radio station by saying «tune to» and the station name or frequency. For example «tune to channel Talksport» or «tune to 98.5 FM». To listen to a preset radio station, say for example «tune to preset number five».

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.

Voice commands

What’s playing? Help messages

To choose what you’d like to play, start by saying «play» and then the item. For example, say «play song Hey Jude», «play line 3» or «select line 2». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

Voice commands

Play song Hey Jude Play artist Madonna Play album Thriller

Help messages

I’m not sure what you’d like to play. Please say «play» and then a song title, an album title, or an artist name. For example, say «play song Hey Jude», «play artist Madonna» or «play album Thriller». To select a line number from the display, say «select line two». To move around a displayed list, you can say «next page» or «previous page». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

Media voice commands are available only with a USB connection.

«Telephone» voice commands

If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces:

«Please first connect a telephone», and the voice session is closed.

Voice commands

Call David Miller* Call voicemail* Display calls*

Help messages

To make a phone call, say «call» followed by the contact name, for example: «Call David Miller». You can also include the phone type, for example: «Call David Miller at home». To make a call by number, say «dial» followed by the phone number, for example, «Dial 107776 835 417». You can check your voicemail by saying «call voicemail». To send a text, say «send quick message to», followed by the contact, and then the name of the quick message you’d like to send. For example, «send quick message to

190

CITRON Connect Nav

David Miller, I’ll be late». To display the list of calls, say «display calls». For more information on SMS, you can say «help with texting». To choose a contact, say something like «select line three». To move around the list say «next page» or «previous page». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

«Text message» voice commands

If there is no telephone connected by Bluetooth, a voice message announces:

«Please first connect a telephone», and the voice session is closed.

The «Text messages» voice commands function allows you to dictate and send

an SMS. Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly between each word. When you have finished, the voice recognition system will automatically generate an SMS.

Voice commands

Send quick message to Bill Carter, I’ll be late Help messages

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.

From the list of quick messages, say the name of the one you’d like to send. To move around the list you can say «go to start», «go to end», «next page» or «previous page». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

Voice commands

Send SMS to John Miller, I’m just arriving Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don’t wait for me

Help messages

Please say «call» or «send quick message to», and then select a line from the list. To move around a list shown on the display, you can say «go to start», «go to end», «next page» or «previous page». You can undo your last action and start over by saying «undo», or say «cancel» to cancel the current action.

Voice commands

Listen to most recent message* Help messages

To hear your last message, you can say «listen to most recent message». When you want to send a text, there’s a set of quick messages ready for you to use. Just use the quick message name and say something like «send quick message to

Bill Carter, I’ll be late». Check the phone menu for the names of the supported messages.

The system only sends pre-recorded «Quick messages».

Navigation Choice of a destination To a new destination Intuitive method:

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press «Search«.

Enter an address or the key words for the destination. Press «OK» to select the «Guidance criteria«.

Or Guided method:

In order to be able to use the navigation, you must enter the «City«, the «Street«

(suggestions are displayed automatically when you begin typing), then enter the «Number» using the virtual keypad, or select

191

CITRON Connect Nav

12an address from the «Contact» list or the address «History«.

If you do not confirm the number, the navigation system will show one end of

the street.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Enter address«.

Then Select the «Country«.

Select the keyboard language.

Change the keyboard «type» according to the selected «language»: ABCDE;

AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Enter the «City«, the «Street» and the «Number«, and confirm by pressing on

the displayed suggestions. Press «OK» to select the «Guidance criteria«.

And/or Select «See on map» to choose the «Guidance criteria«. Press «OK» to start guided navigation.

Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or with two fingers on the screen.

To a recent destination Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «My destinations«.

Select the «Recent tab. Select the address chosen in the list to display the «Guidance criteria.

Press «OK» to start guided navigation.

Select «Position» to see the point of arrival on the map.

To «Home» or «My work» Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «My destinations«.

Select the «Preferred tab. Select «Home«.

Or Select «My work«.

Or Select a preset favourite destination.

To a contact Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «My destinations«.

Select the «Contact tab. Select a contact in the list to start guided navigation.

To points of interest (POI) Guided method: Points of interest (POI) are listed in different categories.

Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Points of interest«.

Select the «Travel«, «leisure«, «Commercial«, «Public» or «Geographic

tab. Or

Select «Search» to enter the name and address of a POI. Press «OK» to calculate the route.

Or Intuitive method:

192

CITRON Connect Nav

You can only select this method of using the service if a network connection

is active; this may be either a «network connection provided by the vehicle», if you use the Citron Connect Box solution, or else a «network connection provided by the user» via a smartphone, In both cases, the system is automatically connected to the Internet, if network coverage permits.

Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Search«.

Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change the «Database».

Select the «Database» in «On-Board» mode (integrated into the map), or in

«Connected» mode (connected to the Internet). Press the back arrow to confirm.

Enter an address or the key words for the destination (POI). Press «OK» to start the search.

Select the «On the route«, «Around the vehicle» or «At destination» tab to refine

your search. Select the desired address to calculate the route.

To a point on the map Press Navigation to display the main page.

Explore the map by sliding a finger on the screen. Select the destination by pressing on the map.

Tap the screen to place a marker and display the sub-menu. Press this button to start guided navigation.

Or Press this button to save the displayed address.

A long press on a point opens a list of nearby POIs.

To GPS coordinates Press Navigation to display the main page.

Explore the map by sliding a finger on the screen. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next image.

Press this button to display the world map.

Using the grid, select the desired country or region by zooming.

Press this button to display or enter the GPS coordinates.

A marker is displayed in the middle of the screen, with the «Latitude» and

«Longitude» coordinates. Choose the type of coordinates: DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. DD for: Degrees, Decimals.

Press this button to start guided navigation.

Or Press this button to save the displayed address.

OR Press this button to enter the «Latitude» value using the virtual keypad.

And Press this button to enter the «Longitude» value using the virtual keypad.

TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Available in some countries. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages are based on a European standard for traffic information broadcasting via the RDS system on FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Navigation system map and taken into account straight away when routes are calculated, to avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads.

Danger zone alerts may or may not be displayed, depending on the applicable

legislation and subscription to the corresponding service.

Connected navigation Connected navigation connection Depending on version, vehicle trim level and subscription to online services and options.

Network connection provided by the vehicle

With the Citron Connect Box solution, the system is automatically connected to

the Internet and connected services, and does not require the user to provide a connection via their smartphone. OR

Network connection provided by the user

For the list of compatible smartphones, visit the Brand’s website in your country.

Activate and enter settings for sharing the smartphone connection.

As processes and standards are constantly changing, we recommend you

193

CITRON Connect Nav

12legislation and subscription to the corresponding service.

Connected navigation Connected navigation connection Depending on version, vehicle trim level and subscription to online services and options.

Network connection provided by the vehicle

With the Citron Connect Box solution, the system is automatically connected to

the Internet and connected services, and does not require the user to provide a connection via their smartphone. OR

Network connection provided by the user

For the list of compatible smartphones, visit the Brand’s website in your country.

Activate and enter settings for sharing the smartphone connection.

As processes and standards are constantly changing, we recommend you

update the smartphone operating system as well as the date and time on the smartphone and system, to ensure that the communication process between the smartphone and the system functions correctly.

USB connection Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when

connected by the USB cable. Bluetooth connection

Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone and ensure that it is visible to

all (see the «Connect-App» section). Wi-Fi connection

Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the system and connect to it.

This function is only available if it has been activated either via the

«Notifications» or via the «Applications» menu.

Press «Notifications«.

Select Wi-Fi to activate it.

OR Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Wi-Fi network connection«.

Select the «Secured«, «Not secured» or «Stored tab. Select a network.

Using the virtual keypad, enter the «Key» network Wi-Fi and the «Password«. Press «OK» to establish a connection between the smartphone and the

vehicles system.

Usage restrictions: With CarPlay, connection sharing is only

available with a Wi-Fi connection. The quality of services depends on the quality of the network connection.

Authorize sending information

Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «System configuration«.

Select the «Private mode» tab.

OR Press «Notifications«.

Press «Private mode«.

THEN

194

CITRON Connect Nav

Activate or deactivate:

«No data sharing except for company vehicles«. «Only data sharing» «Sharing data and vehicle position«

Settings specific to connected navigation

Press Navigation to display the main page.

Press the «MENU» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Settings«.

Select the «Map tab.

Activate or deactivate: «Allow declaration of danger zones«.

«Guidance to final destination on foot«. These settings must be configured for each profile.

Press OK to confirm your selection.

Select the «Alerts tab.

Activate or deactivate:

«Advise of car park nearby«. «Filling station alert«. Risk areas alert» then press the warning icon (triangle) to configure the alerts.

«Give an audible warning«. «Advise proximity of POI 1«. «Advise proximity of POI 2«.

Press OK to confirm your selection.

The «Notifications», located in the upper bar, can be accessed at any time.

Danger zone alerts may or may not be displayed, depending on the applicable

legislation and subscription to the corresponding service.

When «TOMTOM TRAFFIC appears, the services are available.

The services offered with connected navigation are as follows.

A Connected Services pack: Weather, Filling stations, Car park, Traffic, POI local search. A Danger area pack (optional).

Declaration: «Risk areas alert»

To send information about danger zones, select the option:Allow declaration of

danger zones

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press the «Declare a new danger zone» button located in the side bars or the

upper bar of the touch screen (depending on equipment).

Select the «Type option to select the type of «Danger area». Select the «Speed» option and enter it using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to save and send the information.

Displaying fuel information Press Navigation to display the main page. Press this button to display the list of services. Press «POI on map» to display the list of points of interest. Press one of the buttons to search for «Stations«. Activate/deactivate «Stations«.

Press this button to display a secondary page. Select the «Settings tab.

Select the desired fuel.

Press «OK» to save.

Displaying charging station details

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press this button to display the list of services. Press «POI on map» to display the list of points of interest. Press one of the buttons to search for «Stations«. Activate/deactivate «Stations«.

Press this button to display a secondary page. Select the «Settings» tab.

Select the desired connector type.

Press «OK» to save.

Displaying weather information

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press this button to display the list of services. Select «View map«.

Select «Weather«.

195

CITRON Connect Nav

12Displaying charging station details

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press this button to display the list of services. Press «POI on map» to display the list of points of interest. Press one of the buttons to search for «Stations«. Activate/deactivate «Stations«.

Press this button to display a secondary page. Select the «Settings» tab.

Select the desired connector type.

Press «OK» to save.

Displaying weather information

Press Navigation to display the main page. Press this button to display the list of services. Select «View map«.

Select «Weather«.

Press this button to display basic information. Press this button to display detailed weather information.

The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will be the maximum temperature for the day.

The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be the minimum temperature for the night.

Applications USB sockets Depending on equipment, for more information on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay or Android Auto applications, refer to the «Ease of use and comfort» section.

For the list of compatible smartphones, visit the Manufacturer’s website in your

country.

Synchronising a smartphone enables users to display applications that support

the smartphones CarPlay or Android Auto technology on the vehicles screen. For CarPlay technology, the CarPlay function must first be activated on the smartphone. Unlock the smartphone for the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work.

As principles and standards are constantly changing, we recommend keeping the smartphone’s operating system up-to- date, together with the date and time on the smartphone and the system.

Connectivity Press Applications to display the main page.

Press «Connectivity» to access the CarPlay or Android Auto functions.

CarPlay smartphone connection Depending on country.

On connecting the USB cable, the CarPlay function deactivates the

system’s Bluetooth mode. The «CarPlay» function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and compatible applications.

Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by the USB

cable. Press «Telephone» to display the CarPlay interface.

Or Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by the USB

cable.

196

CITRON Connect Nav

From the system, press «Applications» to display the main page.

Press «Connectivity» to access the «CarPlay function.

Press «CarPlay» to display the CarPlay interface.

When the USB cable is disconnected and the ignition is switched off then back

on, the system will not automatically switch to Radio Media mode; the source must be changed manually.

Android Auto smartphone connection Depending on country.

Install the «Android Auto» application on the smartphone via «Google Play».

The «Android Auto» function requires the use of a compatible smartphone and compatible applications.

Connect the USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by the USB

cable. From the system, press «Applications» to display the main page.

Press «Connectivity» to access the «Android Auto function.

Press «Android Auto» to start the application in the system.

During the procedure, several screen pages relating to certain features are

displayed. Accept to start and complete the connection. Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons.

In Android Auto mode, the function that displays rolling menus by briefly pressing

the screen with three fingers is disabled.

There may be a pause before applications become available,

depending on the quality of the network.

Car Apps Press Applications to display the main page.

Press «Car Apps» to display the applications home page.

Internet Browser Press Applications to display the main page.

Press «Connectivity» to access the «Connected Apps function. Press «Connected Apps» to display the browser home page.

Select the country of residence.

Press «OK» to save and start the browser.

Connection to the internet is via one of the network connections provided by the

vehicle or the user.

Bluetooth connection

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Consult the smartphone user guide and the service provider to check which services are available.

The Bluetooth function must be activated and the smartphone configured as

«Visible to all».

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the smartphone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the smartphone.

If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend deactivating and then

reactivating the Bluetooth function on the smartphone.

Procedure from the smartphone Select the name of the system in the list of detected devices.

In the system, accept the connection request from the smartphone.

Procedure from the system Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Bluetooth connection«.

Select «Search«. The list of detected smartphones is

displayed. Select the name of the chosen smartphone in the list.

Depending on the type of smartphone, you may by prompted to accept the

transfer of contacts and messages.

Connection sharing The system offers to connect the smartphone with 3 profiles: «Telephone» (hands-free kit, telephone only), Streaming» (streaming: wireless playing of audio files on the smartphone), «Mobile internet data«.

The «Mobile internet data» profile must be activated for connected navigation (if

197

CITRON Connect Nav

12Procedure from the smartphone Select the name of the system in the list of detected devices.

In the system, accept the connection request from the smartphone.

Procedure from the system Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Press «Bluetooth connection«.

Select «Search«. The list of detected smartphones is

displayed. Select the name of the chosen smartphone in the list.

Depending on the type of smartphone, you may by prompted to accept the

transfer of contacts and messages.

Connection sharing The system offers to connect the smartphone with 3 profiles: «Telephone» (hands-free kit, telephone only), Streaming» (streaming: wireless playing of audio files on the smartphone), «Mobile internet data«.

The «Mobile internet data» profile must be activated for connected navigation (if

the vehicle does not have «Emergency and assistance call» services), after first activating smartphone connection sharing.

Select one or more profiles.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Wi-Fi connection Network connection via the smartphone’s Wi-Fi.

Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Wi-Fi network connection«.

Select the «Secured«, «Not secured» or «Stored tab. Select a network.

Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi network «Key» and «Password«. Press «OK» to establish the connection.

The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi connection sharing are exclusive.

Wi-Fi connection sharing Depending on equipment. Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system.

Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Share Wi-Fi connection«.

Select the «Activation» tab to activate or deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. And/or Select the «Settings» tab to change the systems network name and password.

Press «OK» to confirm.

To protect against unauthorised access and to make all systems as secure as

possible, the use of a security code or a complex password is recommended.

Managing connections Press Connect-App to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Manage connection«.

With this function, you can view the access to connected services, the availability of connected services and modify the connection mode.

198

CITRON Connect Nav

Radio Selecting a station

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press «Frequency«. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations.

Or Move the slider to manually search for frequencies up or down.

Or Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Radio stations» on the secondary page.

Press «Frequency«. Enter the values using the virtual keypad. First enter the units then click on the

decimals field to enter the figures after the decimal point.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved

by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode.

This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and in no way indicative of an audio system malfunction.

Presetting a station Select a radio station or frequency. (refer to the corresponding section) Press «Presets«.

Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station.

Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page.

To change the waveband, press «Band», displayed at the top right of the screen.

Activating/Deactivating RDS RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Radio settings«.

Select «General«. Activate/deactivate «Station follow«.

Press «OK» to confirm.

RDS station tracking may not be available nationwide, as many radio

stations do not cover 100 % of the country. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

Displaying text information The «Radio Text» function displays information transmitted by the radio station relating to the station or the currently playing song.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Radio settings«.

Select «General«. Activate/deactivate «Display radio text«.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Playing TA messages The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station that carries this type of message. While traffic information is being broadcast, the current media is automatically interrupted so that the

TA message can be heard. Normal play of the previously playing media resumes at the end of the message. Select «Announcements«.

Activate/deactivate «Traffic announcement«. Press «OK» to confirm.

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Terrestrial Digital Radio Digital radio provides higher quality sound. The various «multiplexes/ensembles» offer a choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press Band » at the top right of the screen to display the «DAB» waveband.

FM-DAB tracking DAB» does not cover 100 % of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor, FM-DAB auto follow-up» enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding FM analogue station (if there is one).

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

199

CITRON Connect Nav

12TA message can be heard. Normal play of the previously playing media resumes at the end of the message. Select «Announcements«.

Activate/deactivate «Traffic announcement«. Press «OK» to confirm.

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio Terrestrial Digital Radio Digital radio provides higher quality sound. The various «multiplexes/ensembles» offer a choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical order.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press Band » at the top right of the screen to display the «DAB» waveband.

FM-DAB tracking DAB» does not cover 100 % of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor, FM-DAB auto follow-up» enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatically switching to the corresponding FM analogue station (if there is one).

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Radio settings«.

Select «General«. Activate/deactivate «FM-DAB Follow-up«.

Activate/deactivate «Station follow«.

Press «OK«.

If FM-DAB auto tracking» is activated, there may be a time offset of a few

seconds when the system switches to «FM» analogue radio, and in some cases a change in volume. When the digital signal quality is restored, the system automatically changes back to «DAB».

If the «DAB» station being listened to is not available on FM (FM-DAB» option

shaded), or «FM-DAB auto tracking» is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.

Media USB port

Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the

USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The audio system memorises these lists, which will subsequently load faster if they have not been changed.

Auxiliary socket (AUX) Depending on equipment

Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an

audio cable (not supplied). This source is only available if «Auxiliary input» has been selected in the audio settings. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the audio system. Controls are managed via the portable device.

200

CITRON Connect Nav

Selecting the source Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Select «SOURCES«. Select the source.

Watching a video Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ Depending on country. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.

Video control commands are accessible only through the touch screen.

Press Radio Media to display the main page.

Select «SOURCES«. Select Video to start the video.

To remove the USB memory stick, press the pause button to stop the video, then

remove the memory stick. The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, WMV and RealVideo formats.

Streaming Bluetooth

Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed from your smartphone. The Bluetooth profile must be activated. First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the smartphone. Control is from the portable device or by using the system’s touch buttons.

Once connected in streaming mode, the smartphone is considered to be a media

source.

Connecting Apple players Connect the Apple player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically. Control is via the audio system.

The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/

albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of the Apple player.

Information and advice The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry devices and Apple players via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not supplied. Devices are managed using the audio system controls. Other devices, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming, if compatible. The audio system will only play audio files with «.wma», «.aac», «.flac», «.ogg» and «.mp3» file extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other file types («.mp4», etc.) can be read. All «.wma» files must be standard WMA 9 files. The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and 48 KHz. To avoid reading and display problems, we recommend choosing file names less than 20 characters long that do not contain any special characters (e.g. ? . ; ). Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format (File Allocation Table).

We recommend using the original USB cable for the portable device.

Telephone Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Consult the telephone user guide and the service provider to check which services are available.

The Bluetooth function must be activated and the telephone configured as «Visible

to all (in the telphone settings).

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.

If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend deactivating and then

reactivating the Bluetooth function on the telephone.

Procedure from the telephone Select the system name in the list of detected devices.

In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.

201

CITRON Connect Nav

12Telephone Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the

compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Consult the telephone user guide and the service provider to check which services are available.

The Bluetooth function must be activated and the telephone configured as «Visible

to all (in the telphone settings).

To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is used (from the telephone or from the system), ensure that the code is the same in the system and in the telephone.

If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend deactivating and then

reactivating the Bluetooth function on the telephone.

Procedure from the telephone Select the system name in the list of detected devices.

In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.

Procedure from the system Press Telephone to display the main page. Press «Bluetooth search«.

Or Select «Search«. The list of detected telephones is

displayed. Select the name of the chosen telephone in the list.

Connection sharing The system offers to connect the telephone with 3 profiles: «Telephone» (hands-free kit, telephone only), Streaming» (streaming: wireless playing of audio files on the telephone), «Mobile internet data«.

The «Mobile internet data» profile must be activated for connected navigation,

after first activating smartphone connection sharing.

Select one or more profiles.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Depending on the type of telephone, you may by prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and messages.

The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone.

All three profiles may connect by default.

The profiles compatible with the system are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,

MAP and PAN.

Visit the Brand’s website for more information (compatibility, additional help, etc.).

Automatic reconnection On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is automatically recognised and within about 30 seconds after switching on the ignition, the pairing is established automatically (Bluetooth activated). To modify the connection profile:

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Bluetooth connection» to display the list of paired devices. Press the «Details» button.

Select one or more profiles.

Press «OK» to confirm.

202

CITRON Connect Nav

Managing paired telephones This function lets you connect or disconnect a device or delete a pairing.

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Bluetooth connection» to display the list of paired devices. Press on the name of the telephone selected in the list to disconnect it.

Press again to connect it.

Deleting a telephone Select the basket at top right of the screen to display a basket alongside the

telephone chosen. Press the basket alongside the telephone chosen to delete it.

Receiving a call An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Make a short press on the steering mounted telephone button to accept an

incoming call. And

Make a long press

on the steering mounted telephone button to reject the call.

Or

Select «End call» on the touch screen.

Making a call

Using the telephone is not recommended while driving.

Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.

Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the main page. Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Press «Call» to start the call.

Calling a contact Press Telephone to display the main page. Or press and hold

the steering mounted telephone button.

Select «Contact«. Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

Select «Call«.

Calling a recently used number

Press Telephone to display the main page.

Or Press and hold

the steering mounted telephone button.

Select «Calls«. Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; as a safety

measure, first park the vehicle.

Managing contacts/entries Press Telephone to display the main page.

Select «Contact«. Select «Create» to add a new contact.

Press the «Telephone» tab to enter the contacts telephone number(s). Press the «Address» tab to enter the contacts address(es). Press the «Email» tab to enter the contacts email address(es). Press «OK» to save.

Press this button to sort contacts by Surname+first name or by First

name+surname.

The «Email» function allows email addresses to be entered for a contact,

but the system is not able to send emails.

Managing messages Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Messages» to display the list of messages. Select the «All«, «Incoming» or «Sent tab. Select the details of the message chosen in one of the lists. Press «Answer» to send a quick message stored in the system. Press «Call» to start the call.

Press «Play» to listen to the message.

Access to «Messages» depends on the compatibility between the smartphone

and the onboard system. Some smartphones retrieve messages or email messages more slowly than others.

203

CITRON Connect Nav

12Press this button to sort contacts by Surname+first name or by First

name+surname.

The «Email» function allows email addresses to be entered for a contact,

but the system is not able to send emails.

Managing messages Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Messages» to display the list of messages. Select the «All«, «Incoming» or «Sent tab. Select the details of the message chosen in one of the lists. Press «Answer» to send a quick message stored in the system. Press «Call» to start the call.

Press «Play» to listen to the message.

Access to «Messages» depends on the compatibility between the smartphone

and the onboard system. Some smartphones retrieve messages or email messages more slowly than others.

Managing quick messages Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Quick messages» to display the list of messages. Select the «Delayed«, «My arrival«, «Not available» or «Other» tab, enabling you to

create new messages. Press «Create» to write a new message.

Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press «Transfer» to select one or more recipients. Press «Play» to start playing the message.

Managing email Press Telephone to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Email» to display the list of messages. Select the «Incoming«, «Sent» or «Not read tab.

Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press «Play» to start playing the message.

Access to email messages depends on the compatibility between the

smartphone and the onboard system.

Settings Audio settings

Press Settings to display the main page.

Select «Audio settings«.

Then select «Ambience«, «Position«, «Sound«, «Voice» or «Ringtone«.

Press «OK» to save the settings.

The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys system) uses audio

processing to adjust the sound quality according to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the front and rear speaker configuration.

The Ambience setting (choice of 6 ambiances) as well as for Bass, Medium

and Treble are different and independent for each audio source. Activate or deactivate «Loudness«.

204

CITRON Connect Nav

The «Position» settings (All passengers, Driver and Front only) are common to all sources. Activate or deactivate «Touch tones«, «Volume linked to speed» and «Auxiliary input«.

Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging optimises the sound distribution inside

the passenger compartment.

Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Setting of the profiles«.

Select «Profile 1«, «Profile 2«, «Profile 3 or «Common profile«.

Press this button to enter a name for the profile using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to confirm.

Press this button to add a photograph to the profile. Insert a USB memory stick containing the photograph in the USB port.

Select the photograph. Press «OK» to accept the transfer of the photograph.

Press «OK» again to save the settings.

The location for the photograph is square; the system reshapes the original

photograph if in another format.

Press this button to reset the selected profile.

Resetting the selected profile activates the English language by default.

Select a «Profile» (1 or 2 or 3) to link «Audio settings» with it.

Select «Audio settings«.

Then select «Ambience«, «Position«; «Sound«, «Voice» or «Ringtone«.

Press «OK» to save the selected profiles settings.

Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Screen configuration«.

Select «Animation«. Activate or deactivate:Automatic scrolling

Select «Brightness«.

Move the slider to adjust the brightness of the screen and/or the instrument panel. Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «System settings«.

Select «Units» to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select «Factory settings» to restore the initial settings.

Resetting the system to «Factory settings» activates English and degrees

Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time.

Select «System info» to display the versions of the various modules installed in the system.

Selecting the language Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Languages» to change the language.

Setting the date Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Setting the time-date«.

Select «Date«. Press this button to set the date.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Select the display format for the date.

Time and date setting is only available if «GPS synchronisation» is deactivated.

Setting the time Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Setting the time-date«.

Select «Time«. Press this button to set the time using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to confirm.

Press this button to set the time zone.

Select the display format for the time (12h/24h). Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 hour). Activate or deactivate GPS synchronisation (UTC).

205

CITRON Connect Nav

12Select «Setting the time-date«.

Select «Date«. Press this button to set the date.

Press «OK» to confirm.

Select the display format for the date.

Time and date setting is only available if «GPS synchronisation» is deactivated.

Setting the time Press Settings to display the main page.

Press the «OPTIONS» button to access the secondary page.

Select «Setting the time-date«.

Select «Time«. Press this button to set the time using the virtual keypad. Press «OK» to confirm.

Press this button to set the time zone.

Select the display format for the time (12h/24h). Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 hour). Activate or deactivate GPS synchronisation (UTC).

Press «OK» to confirm.

The system may not automatically manage the change between winter and

summer time (depending on the country of sale).

Colour schemes Depending on equipment/Depending on version.

As a safety measure, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is only

possible when the vehicle is stationary.

Press Settings to display the main page.

Select «Color schemes«.

Select a colour scheme in the list then press «OK» to confirm.

Whenever the colour scheme is changed, the system restarts, temporarily

displaying a black screen.

Frequently asked questions The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the system.

Navigation I cannot enter the navigation address. The address is not recognised. Use the «intuitive method» by pressing the «Search» button at the bottom of the «Navigation page. The route calculation is not successful. The route settings may conflict with the current location (for example, if toll roads are excluded but the vehicle is on a toll road). Check the route settings in the «Navigation» menu. I am not receiving «Danger zone» alerts. You have not subscribed to the online services option. If you have subscribed to the option: — a few days may elapse before the service is activated, — services may not be selected in the system menu, — online services are not active («TOMTOM TRAFFIC» not shown on the map). The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Set the zoom level to 200 metres (656 ft), or select POIs from the POI list. The «Danger zone» audible warning feature is not working. The audible warning is not active or the volume is too low.

206

CITRON Connect Nav

Activate the audible warning in the «Navigation» menu and check the voice volume in the sound settings. The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route. The route settings do not take account of TMC messages. Configure the «Traffic info» function in the route settings list (None, Manual or Automatic). I am receiving a «Danger zone» alert which is not on my route. As well as providing guided navigation, the system announces all «Danger areas» positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for «Danger areas» located on nearby or parallel roads. Zoom the map to show the exact location of the «Danger area». You can select «On the route» to stop receiving warnings or decrease the warning duration. Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time. On starting, a few minutes may elapse before the system begins to receive traffic information. Wait until traffic information is being received correctly (traffic information icons shown on the map). In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic information. This is perfectly normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available. The altitude is not displayed.

On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Wait until the system has started up completely so that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites. Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. This behaviour is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions. My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical areas, the connection may be unavailable. Check that the online services are activated (settings, contract).

Radio The reception quality of the radio station being listened to gradually deteriorates or the station presets are not working (e.g. no sound, «87.5» MHz is displayed). The vehicle is too far from the selected stations transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the geographical area. Activate the «RDS» function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area. The aerial is missing or damaged (e.g. when going through a car wash or in an underground car park).

Have the aerial checked by a dealer. The surrounding area (e.g. hill, building, tunnel, underground car park, etc.) is blocking reception, including in RDS tracking mode. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not indicative of an audio system malfunction. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received. The name of the radio station changes. The station is no longer received or its name has changed in the list. Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets these details as the station name. Press «Update list» in the «Radio stations» secondary menu.

Media Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing time). Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick. There may be an extended pause after inserting a USB stick.

The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to a few minutes. This is perfectly normal. Some characters in information about the currently playing media may not be displayed correctly. The audio system is unable to process certain types of character. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically launch playback. Start playback from the device. Track names and playing times are not displayed on the audio streaming screen. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

Telephone I am unable to connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone’s Bluetooth function may be switched off or the device may not be visible. Check that the telephone has Bluetooth switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is «visible to all». Deactivate then reactivate the telephones Bluetooth function. The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

207

CITRON Connect Nav

12The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to a few minutes. This is perfectly normal. Some characters in information about the currently playing media may not be displayed correctly. The audio system is unable to process certain types of character. Use standard characters to name tracks and folders. Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically launch playback. Start playback from the device. Track names and playing times are not displayed on the audio streaming screen. The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.

Telephone I am unable to connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone’s Bluetooth function may be switched off or the device may not be visible. Check that the telephone has Bluetooth switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is «visible to all». Deactivate then reactivate the telephones Bluetooth function. The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

You can check the compatibility of the telephone on the Brand’s website (services). Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the USB cables are of poor quality. Use genuine USB cables to ensure compatibility. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all countries. Check the list of supported countries via these websites: Google Android Auto or Apple. The volume of the telephone connected via Bluetooth is too low. The volume depends on both the system and the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary. Ambient noise affects the quality of the telephone call. Reduce ambient noise (e.g. close the windows, reduce ventilation, slow down). Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are: synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronisations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated. Select «Display SIM card contacts» or «Display telephone contacts». The contacts are not listed in alphabetical order.

Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. Modify the telephone directory display settings. The system is not receiving SMS text messages. Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text messages to be sent to the system.

Settings When the treble and bass settings are changed, the ambience is deselected. When the ambience is changed, the treble and bass settings are reset. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source.

208

CITRON Connect Nav

Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass, Treble, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to «None», setting loudness correction to «Active» in USB mode and «Inactive» in Radio mode. In all cases, after applying sound settings, adjust the volume level on the portable device (to a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level on the audio system. When the engine is off, the system switches off after several minutes of use. When the engine is switched off, the system’s operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system automatically goes into energy economy mode and switches off to maintain an adequate charge in the battery. Start the vehicles engine to increase the charge of the battery. The date and time cannot be set. Date and time settings are only available if satellite synchronisation is deactivated. Settings menu/Options/Date-Time Setting. Select the «Time» tab and deactivate «GPS synchronisation» (UTC).

209

Event data recorders

Event data recorders Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which is received by vehicle sensors, for example, or which they generate themselves or exchange amongst themselves. Some control units are necessary for the safe functioning of your vehicle, others assist you while you drive (driver assistance systems), while others provide comfort or infotainment functions. The following contains general information about data processing in the vehicle. You will find additional information as to which specific data is uploaded, stored and passed on to third parties and for what purpose in your vehicle under the key word Data Protection closely linked to the references for the affected functional characteristics in the relevant owner’s manual or in the general terms of sale. These are also available online.

Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data for operation of the vehicle. This data includes, for example: vehicle status information (e.g. speed, movement delay, lateral acceleration, wheel rotation rate, «seat belts fastened» display) ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor, distance sensor)

As a rule such data is transient and is not stored for longer than an operational cycle, and only processed on board the vehicle itself. Often control units include data storage (including the vehicle key). This is used to allow information to be documented temporarily or permanently on vehicle condition, component stress, maintenance requirements and technical events and errors. Depending on technical equipment levels, the data stored is as follows: system component operating states (e.g. fill level, tyre pressure, battery status) faults and defects in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) system reactions in special driving situations (e.g. triggering of an airbag, actuation of the stability control systems) information on events damaging the vehicle for electric vehicles the amount of charge in the high-voltage battery, estimated range In special cases (e.g. if the vehicle has detected a malfunction), it may be necessary to save data that would otherwise just be volatile. When you use services (e.g. repairs, maintenance), the operating data saved can be read together with the vehicle identification number and used where necessary. Staff working for the service network (e.g. garages, manufacturers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services) can read the data from the vehicle. The same applies to warranty work and quality assurance measures.

Data is generally read via the OBD (On-Board Diagnostics) port prescribed by law in the vehicle. The operating data read documents the technical condition of the vehicle or individual components and assists with fault diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. This data, in particular information on component stress, technical events, operator errors and other faults, is transmitted to the manufacturer where appropriate, together with the vehicle identification number. The manufacturer is also subject to product liability. The manufacturer potentially also uses operating data from vehicles for product recalls. This data can also be used to check customer warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service company when carrying out servicing or repairs or at your request.

Comfort and infotainment functions Comfort settings and custom settings can be stored in the vehicle and changed or reset at any time. Depending on the equipment level in question, these include seat and steering wheel position settings chassis and air conditioning settings custom settings such as interior lighting You can input your own data in the infotainment functions for your vehicle as part of the selected features.

210

Event data recorders

Depending on the equipment level in question, these include multimedia data such as music, videos or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system address book data for use with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system input destinations data on the use of online services This data for comfort and infotainment functions can be stored locally in the vehicle or be kept on a device that you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player). Data that you have input yourself can be deleted at any time. This data can only be transmitted out of the vehicle at your request, particularly when using online services in accordance with the settings selected by you.

Smartphone integration, e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile device to the vehicle so that you can control it via the controls integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone image and sound can be output via the multimedia system in this case. At the same time, specific information is transmitted to your smartphone. Depending on the type of

integration, this includes data such as position data, day / night mode and other general vehicle information. For more information, please see the operating instructions for the vehicle / infotainment system. Integration allows selected smartphone apps to be used, such as navigation or music playback. No further integration is possible between smartphone and vehicle, in particular active access to vehicle data. The nature of further data processing is determined by the provider of the app used. Whether you can define settings, and if so which ones, is dependent on the app in question and your smartphone’s operating system.

Online services If your vehicle has a radio network connection, this allows data to be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The radio network connection is made possible by means of a transmitter device in your vehicle or a mobile device provided by you (e.g. a smartphone). Online functions can be used via this radio network connection. These include online services and applications / apps provided to you by the manufacturer or other providers.

Proprietary services In the case of the manufacturer’s online services, the relevant functions are described by the manufacturer in an appropriate location (e.g. Owner’s Manual, the manufacturer’s website)

and the associated data protection information is provided. Personal data may be used to provide online services. Data exchange for this purpose takes place via a protected connection, e.g. using the manufacturer’s IT systems provided for the purpose. Collection, processing and use of personal data for the purposes of preparation of services take place solely on the basis of legal permission, e.g. in the case of a legally prescribed emergency communication system or a contractual agreement, or by virtue of consent. You can activate or deactivate the services and functions (which are subject to charges to some extent) and, in some cases, the vehicle’s entire radio network connection. This does not include statutory functions and services such as an emergency communication system.

Third party services If you make use of online services from other providers (third parties), these services are subject to the liability and data protection and usage conditions of the provider in question. The manufacturer frequently has no influence over the content exchanged in this regard. Therefore, please note the nature, scope and purpose of the collection and use of personal data within the scope of third party services provided by the service provider in question.

211

Alphabetical index

180 rear vision 116

A ABS 67 Accessories 64 Active Safety Brake 106108 AdBlue 15, 133 AdBlue tank 134 Additive, Diesel 131132 Adjusting headlamps 59 Adjusting head restraints 36 Adjusting seat 3637 Adjusting the air distribution 45 Adjusting the air flow 4445 Adjusting the date 1819, 23, 182, 204 Adjusting the height and reach of the steering wheel 41 Adjusting the seat angle 37 Adjusting the seat belt height 71 Adjusting the temperature 4445 Adjusting the time 1819, 23, 181, 205 Advice on care and maintenance 135 Advice on driving 7, 8485 Airbags 73, 75, 77 Airbags, curtain 7475 Airbags, front 7475, 77 Airbags, lateral 7475 Air conditioning 4344 Air conditioning, automatic 4445 Air conditioning, manual 44

Air intake 4445 Air vents 42 Alarm 3132 Android Auto connection 196 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 67 Antitheft / Immobiliser 25 Apple CarPlay connection 178, 195 Applications 196 Armrest, front 50 Armrest, rear 51 Assistance call 65 Assistance, emergency braking 67, 108 Audible warning 65 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 165, 177, 200

B Battery, 12 V 127, 132, 147149 Battery, charging 148149 Battery, remote control 28 Blind 3234 Blind spot sensors 111 Blinds, side 50 BlueHDi 15, 131, 137 Bluetooth (hands-free) 165166, 179, 201 Bluetooth (telephone) 179180, 201202 Bodywork 136 Bonnet 128129 Boot 30, 54 Brake discs 133 Brake lamps 146

Brakes 133 Braking assistance system 67 Braking, automatic emergency 106108 Brightness 181 Bulbs 145 Bulbs (changing) 144146

C Cable, audio 199 Cable, Jack 199 Capacity, fuel tank 121122 Cap, fuel filler 121122 Care of the bodywork 136 CD 164 CD, MP3 164 Central locking 26, 30 Changing a bulb 144146 Changing a fuse 147 Changing a wheel 137, 141 Changing a wiper blade 6162 Changing the remote control battery 28 Charger, induction 48 Charger, wireless 48 Checking the engine oil level 15 Checking the levels 130131 Checking tyre pressures (using the kit) 138, 141 Checks 129, 132133 Checks, routine 132133 Child lock 83

212

Alphabetical index

Children 72, 7880 Children (safety) 83 Child seats 72, 7576, 78 Child seats, conventional 78, 80, 82 Child seats, i-Size 80, 82 Child seats, ISOFIX 7880, 82 Cleaning (advice) 135136 Closing the boot 26, 30 Closing the doors 26, 29 Coat hanger 51 Coat hook 50 Collision Risk Alert 106107 Configuration, vehicle 1820 Connected applications 196 Connection, Bluetooth 166, 179180,

196197, 201202 Connection, MirrorLink 178 Connection, Wi-Fi network 197 Connectivity 195 Container, AdBlue 134 Control, electric windows 3435 Control, emergency boot release 30 Control, emergency door 27 Control, heated seats 38 Control stalk, lighting 5556 Control stalk, wipers 6063 Courtesy lamp 146 Courtesy lamps 5354 Cruise control 99, 101102, 104106 Cruise control by speed limit recognition 101102

Cruise control, dynamic with Stop function 101102 Cup holder 50

D DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) — Digital radio 162163, 176, 199 Date (setting) 1819, 23, 182, 204 Daytime running lamps 57, 145 Deactivating the passenger airbag 74, 77 Deadlocking 2526 Defrosting 41, 47 Defrosting, front 46 Demisting 41 Demisting, front 46 Demisting, rear 41, 47 Demisting, rear screen 41, 47 Dials and gauges 8 Dimensions 157 Dipstick 15, 130 Direction indicators 56, 145146 Display, head-up 9899 Doors 29 Drivers attention warning 109 Driving 8485 Driving aids camera (warnings) 97 Driving aids (recommendations) 97 Driving economically 7 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 6768

E EBFD 67 Eco-driving (advice) 7 Economy mode 127 Electric windows 34 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 67 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 67 Emergency call 65 Emergency switching off 8889 Emergency warning lamps 64 Emissions control system, SCR 16, 133 Energy economy mode 127 Engine compartment 129 Engine, Diesel 121, 129, 137, 156 Engine, petrol 129, 154 Engines 153154, 156 Environment 7, 28 ESC (electronic stability control) 67 Exterior lighting 58

F Fatigue detection 109 Filling the AdBlue tank 131, 134 Filling the fuel tank 121122 Filter, air 132 Filter, oil 132 Filter, particle 131132 Filter, passenger compartment 43, 132 Fitting a wheel 141, 143

213

Alphabetical index

Fitting roof bars 127128 Fittings, boot 52 Fittings, interior 4748, 50 Fittings, rear 50 Flap, fuel filler 121122 Flashing indicators 56, 145 Floor, boot, adjustable 52 Fluid, brake 131 Fluid, engine coolant 131 Foglamp, rear 5556 Foglamps, front 5556, 5960, 145 Foglamps, rear 55 Folding the rear seats 3840 Frequency (radio) 198 Fuel 7, 121 Fuel consumption 7 Fuel tank 121122 Fuses 147

G Gauge, fuel 121122 Gearbox, automatic 90, 9293, 133, 148 Gearbox, manual 8990, 93, 132 Gear lever, manual gearbox 8990 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency indicator 92 Glove box 48 G.P.S. 192 Grab handles 50 Grip control 68

H Hazard warning lamps 64 headlamp adjustment 59 Headlamp adjustment 59 Headlamps, automatic dipping 5859 Headlamps, automatic illumination 5758 Headlamps, dipped beam 55, 145 Headlamps, halogen 145 Headlamps, main beam 55, 58, 145 Head restraints, front 36 Head restraints, rear 3840 Head-up display 9899 Heating 42, 44 Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) 6970 Hill Descent Control 6970 Hill start assist 93 Hooks 52 Horn 65

I Ignition 45, 88, 202 Ignition on 88 Ignition switch 8687 Immobiliser, electronic 85 Indicator, AdBlue range 15 Indicator, coolant temperature 14 Indicator, engine oil level 15 Indicators, direction 56 Inflating tyres 133, 158

Inflating tyres and accessories (using the kit) 138, 141 Infrared camera 97 Instrument panel 8, 89, 98 Instrument panel, matrix 8 Instrument panels 8 Internet browser 193, 196 ISOFIX mountings 78, 80, 82

J Jack 138, 141, 199 Jump starting 148

K Key 2427 Key, electronic 2526 Keyless Entry and Starting 2526, 85, 8788 Key not recognised 8889 Key with remote control 24, 8586 Kit, hands-free 165166, 179, 201 Kit, puncture repair 138 Kit, temporary puncture repair 137139, 141

L Labels 5 Labels, identification 157

214

Alphabetical index

Lamp, boot 54, 147 Lamps, parking 56 Lamps, rear 146 Lams with Full LED technology 59 Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) 110111 LEDs — Light-emitting diodes 57, 145 Level, AdBlue 131 Level, brake fluid 131 Level, Diesel additive 131132 Level, engine coolant 14, 131 Level, engine oil 15, 130 Levels and checks 129131 Level, screenwash fluid 61, 131 Light-emitting diodes — LEDs 57, 145 Lighting, cornering 5960 Lighting, exterior 55, 58 Lighting, guide-me home 57 Lighting, interior 5354 Lighting, mood 54 Lighting, welcome 5758 Loading 127128 Load reduction mode 127 Locating your vehicle 25 Locking 2425 Locking from the inside 30 Locking the doors 3031 Low fuel level 121122

M Maintenance (advice) 135 Maintenance, routine 98, 132 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 97 Map reading lamps 5354 Markings, identification 157 Mat 50, 98 Memorising a speed 99 Menu 178 Menu, main 160 Menus (audio) 173174, 185186 Messages 203 Messages, quick 203 Mirror, rear view 42 Mirrors, door 4142, 111 Misfuel prevention 122 Mountings, ISOFIX 78, 80, 82 MP3 CD 164

N Navigation 190192 Navigation, connected 193195 Net, storage 50

O Obstacle detection 112 Oil change 130

Oil consumption 130 OIl, engine 130 On-board tools 53, 137138 Opening the bonnet 128 Opening the boot 24, 26, 30 Opening the doors 24, 26, 29

P Pads, brake 133 Paint 136, 157 Paint colour code 157 Parcel shelf, rear 52 Park Assist 116 Parking brake 89, 133 Parking sensors, audible and visual 112 Parking sensors, front 113 Parking sensors, rear 112 Plates, identification 157 Player, Apple 165, 177, 200 Player, MP3 CD 164 Player, USB 163, 176, 199 Port, USB 49, 163, 176, 178, 195, 199 Pressures, tyres 133, 139, 141, 158 Pre-tensioning seat belts 72 Priming pump 137 Priming the fuel system 137 Profiles 181, 204 Protecting children 7480 Puncture 138139, 141

215

Alphabetical index

R Radio 161162, 174175, 198 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Broadcasting — DAB) 162, 176, 199 Range, AdBlue 15, 131 RDS 175, 198 Reading lamps 53 Rear screen, demisting 47 Recharging the battery 148149 Recirculation, air 4445 Recorder, total distance 17 Recovery 150 Recovery of the vehicle 150 Reduction of electrical load 127 Regeneration of the particle filter 132 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection system 96 Reinitialising the remote control 29 Reminder, key in ignition 87 Reminder, lighting on 56 Remote control 2427 Removing a wheel 141143 Removing the mat 50 Replacing bulbs 144146 Replacing fuses 147 Replacing the air filter 132 Replacing the oil filter 132 Replacing the passenger compartment filter 132 Reservoir, screenwash 131 Resetting the trip recorder 17

Reversing camera 97, 113114, 116 Roof bars 127128 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 137

S Safety, children 7480 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 132 Screen, instrument panel 21 Screen menu map 178 Screen, monochrome 1819 Screen, multifunction (with audio system) 160 Screenwash 61 Screenwash, front 60 Screenwash, rear 61 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 16, 133 Seat angle 37 Seat belts 7072, 78 Seat belts, rear 71 Seats, front 3637 Seats, heated 38 Seats, rear 3840, 76 Sensors (warnings) 97 Serial number, vehicle 157 Service indicator 14 Servicing 14, 132 Settings, equipment 1720 Settings, system 181, 204 Sidelamps 5557, 145146 Smartphone 48 Snow chains 96, 123

Socket, 12 V accessory 48 Socket, auxiliary 164, 177, 199 Socket, Jack 164, 199 Speed limiter 99, 101104 Speed limit recognition 100101 Speedometer 98 Stability control (ESC) 6768 Starting a Diesel engine 121 Starting the engine 86 Starting the vehicle 8687 Starting using another battery 88, 148 Station, radio 161, 174175, 198 Stay, bonnet 128129 Steering mounted controls, audio 160, 172, 185 Steering wheel, adjustment 41 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, expressive 136 Stopping the vehicle 8688 Stop & Start 22, 43, 46, 9395,

121, 128, 132, 150 Storage 48, 51 Storage box 53 Storage wells 53 Stowing rings 50 Sunroof, panoramic 3234 Sunshine sensor 43 Sun visor 48 Switching off the engine 86 Synchronising the remote control 29

216

Alphabetical index

T Tank, fuel 121122 Technical data 154, 156 Telephone 165168, 179180, 201203 Telephone, Bluetooth with voice recognition 168 Temperature, coolant 14 Time (setting) 1819, 23, 181, 205 TMC (Traffic info) 192 Tool box 53 Tools 137138 Topping-up AdBlue 134 Top Rear Vision 113 Top Tether (fixing) 78, 80, 82 Total distance recorder 17 Touch screen 1920, 61 Touch screen tablet 1920 Towball, quickly detachable 123126 Towbar 126 Towbar with quickly detachable towball 123126 Towed loads 153154, 156 Towing another vehicle 150, 152 Traction control (ASR) 6768 Traffic information (TA) 161 Traffic information (TMC) 192 Trailer 126 Trajectory control systems 67 Trip computer 2022 Trip distance recorder 17 Tyres 133, 158 Tyre under-inflation detection 95, 141

U Under-inflation (detection) 95 Unlocking 24, 26 Unlocking from the inside 30 Unlocking the doors 3031 Updating the date 182, 204 Updating the time 181, 205 USB 163, 176, 178, 195, 199

V Vehicle data recording and privacy 209 Ventilation 4244 Video 200 Voice commands 187190

W Warning and indicator lamps 9 Warning lamp, driver»s seat belt not fastened 72 Warning lamps 9 Warning lamp, seat belts 72 Warnings and indicators 910 Washing 98 Washing (advice) 135136 Weights 153154, 156 Wheel, spare 133, 137138, 141, 144 Window controls 3435 Windscreen, heated 4647 Windscreen wipers 60, 62

Wiper blades (changing) 6162 Wiper, rear 61 Wipers 60, 6263 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 6263

10-31-1282

Automobiles CITRON declares, in accordance with the provisions of European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproducing and translating this doc

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the C3 Aircross Citroën works, you can view and download the Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Handbook for Citroën C3 Aircross as well as other Citroën manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Handbook should include all the details that are needed to use a Citroën C3 Aircross. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Citroën C3 Aircross 2023 SUV Handbook as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Приемы прямого руководства игрой в средней группе
  • Изокардин 10 мл спрей инструкция по применению
  • Скачать руководство по ремонту мазда 3 2012
  • Nissan note e12 руководство по эксплуатации
  • Руководство секретариатом это